2016 2017 general catalogue by PAPA

MOTOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION

Head office | Via Don E. Mazza, 12 24020 Gorle, Bergamo, Italy Tel. +39 035 4282111 Fax +39 035 4282200 info@LovatoElectric.com Sales department | Tel. +39 035 4282354 Fax +39 035 4282400 sales@LovatoElectric.com

CONTROL AND SIGNALLING

CIRCUIT PROTECTION AND ISOLATION

Technical support and customer care | Tel. +39 035 4282422 Fax +39 035 4282295 service@LovatoElectric.com

AUTOMATION AND CONTROL

ENERGY MANAGEMENT

INDEX|

RUN MON

P STO

ENT

Motor protection circuit breakers

Pushbuttons and selector switches

Contactors

Signal towers and beacons

Motor protection relays

Limit, micro and foot switches

Electromechanical starters and enclosures

Soft starters

Variable speed drives

Rotary cam switches

TE R G LK E H LA R EA

In(A

oreest au

ST TE

I 5.10 CN2

1 A1 2

reesn ma tx

T C OIN FU

oreets au

In0,x

tx1 Inx

reesn ma

L A C IE S nT IN

(8)

In0,x

tx1 Inx In1x

(7)

t(sec

T SE RE

reesn ma tx

0, 0,2

0, 0,0 0,0

I TR

(7)

3 1

In1x

In0,x

tx1 Inx

OFF

24V 50/6

reesn ma tx

0Hz oreest au

Time relays

Metering instruments and current transformers

Inx

In0,x

ctor conta

Modu

Switch disconnectors

In1x

In0,x

tx1 Inx In1x

lar

Fuse holders and fuses

Protection relays

Power factor controllers and thyristor modules

Miniature and residual circuit breakers

Level controls

Automatic transfer switch controllers

Surge protection devices

Micro PLCs

Engine and generator controllers

Modular contactors

Switching power supplies

Software and applications

Earth leakage relays

Automatic battery chargers

Expansion modules and accessories

NEW PRODUCTS|2016|17

MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS UP TO 100A

40–80A CONTACTORS IN AC3

Available versions with rotary actuator and push button actuator, magnetic release for starters only and fuse control function. 45mm wide up to 40A rated current. Accessories include front-mount and side-mount auxiliary contacts, trip signalling contacts, supply connection busbars and a wide variety of enclosures.

The new contactors have a small footprint: 55mm for the three-pole versions and 73mm for the four-pole versions. Rated thermal current (lth) from 70 to 115A, power terminals with double lug clamp and 4-terminal coil. Available with two types of coil, AC or AC/DC with electronic control and wide supply voltage range (e.g. a single coil covers 100–250VAC/DC), low power consumption, only closes at correct supply voltage, with builtin noise filter. Also available in specific versions for DC load switching.

40–50kvar CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

ADLX SERIES SOFT STARTERS

Specific new contactors for controlling PFC capacitors are available with 40kvar, 45kvar or 50kvar ratings at 400V and a very small footprint (55mm wide). The double lug clamp terminals enable easy connection of cables even when multiple connections are required.

This new series complements the soft starter range with two-phase control starters from 30 to 320A, featuring integrated bypass and a very small footprint. Equipped with icon display and NFC connectivity for easy and immediate configuration, they are suitable for simple applications thanks to the installation wizard, or for applications requiring maximum performance in terms of motor control and protection. Available in 400 and 600V versions.

VLB SERIES VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

SIGNAL TOWERS Ø45mm AND MULTICOLOURED Ø70mm

Three-phase power input 400–480VAC, power ratings from 0.4kW to 30kW, small footprint with “book” format: the VLB series is ideal for lifting systems and pump/fan management, owing to specific integrated features such as S-curve, PID and quadratic torque control. Programming, monitoring and diagnostics from PC via USB or Wi-Fi. A RS485 communication port with integrated Modbus-RTU and supplied EMC filter are also standard equipment. Modules are available to equip the drive with the most common fieldbus systems, including PROFIBUS and CANopen.

The Ø45 mm towers are supplied fully assembled with the possibility of up to three light modules and a sound module. Perfect for mounting on small machines, their high brightness LED circuit ensures long-life illumination and low power consumption. The new Ø70mm multicoloured light modules are supplied up to three different colours per model. In the event of two or more alarms, the multicoloured module lights up in alternating colours corresponding to the event.

PLATINUM SERIES NEW COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

GX SERIES ROTARY CAM SWITCHES

The Platinum series also includes the following products: - continuous or pulse-tone monoblock buzzers - monoblock potentiometers - USB and RJ45 communication interfaces - monoblock LED pilot lights with IP66, IP67 or IP69K protection (Nema 4X) - adapter for DIN rail mounting - protective shrouds.

Our range of cam switches has been further expanded to include 20A AC1 ON/OFF switches with panel mounting by means of a threaded ring (with Ă&#x2DC;22mm drilled hole) and snap-on fitting. Quick and easy installation are the main benefits of these switches. The switch is available with knob or key control.

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS

GA SERIES 160A SWITCH DISCONNECTORS AND 48x48mm DOOR COUPLING HANDLE

The switch disconnector range is further boosted by the introduction of compact versions (54mm wide) rated for 40A at 1000VDC and 32A at 1200V in the category DC21B. These switch disconnectors are supplied with a handle for direct control and include bridges for connecting the poles in series. There are also versions with IP65 plastic enclosure.

GA series switch disconnectors are now available up to 160A AC21A. At 70mm wide, its small size enables it to be fitted inside electrical panels with limited space. Available in three-pole and four-pole versions and with IP65 plastic enclosure in 0-1 and 1-0-2 configurations. The range of door coupling handles for GA series switch disconnectors now includes a version with 48x48mm front plate.

UL489 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

CLASS B RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS

MCBs compliant with the UL489 standard are ideal for manufacturers of electrical machinery or appliances destined for the North American market. They comply with the IEC/EN60947-2 standard and can therefore be used in global markets. The range covers rated currents from 1 to 63A and trip curves C and D. The operating voltage for appliances up to 32A is 277V for the 1-pole versions and 480Y/277V for the 2-pole and 3-pole versions. Above 32A, the operating voltage becomes 120V for the 1-pole versions and 240V for the 2-pole and 3-pole versions.

In addition to tripping under the same conditions as for types AC and A, these RCCBs also trip due to highfrequency leakage currents up to 1000Hz and direct currents. They are particularly suitable in installations with variable speed drives, UPS systems and for electric vehicle charging stations.

NEW PRODUCTS|2016|17

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE ADD-ON BLOCKS

MODULAR CONTACTORS AND SOCKETS

A new line of residual current device add-on blocks connectable to miniature circuit breakers, available in 2, 3 and 4-pole versions for 30 or 300mA residual currents. All models are type A for sinusoidal alternating currents and pulsating direct currents. The rated current is 40A or 63A. Fast and functional MCB fitting in compliance with IEC/EN60009-1 requirements.

Two new modular contactor models with 32A current rating in two-pole or three/four-pole versions. Considerable space saving (1 module for two-pole versions and 2 modules for three/four-pole versions). Available in manually operated versions with Ith rated current of 20 or 32A. The modular sockets provide a power source near to or inside electrical panels. Suitable for 10/16A standard Schuko Italian or German plugs. Also compatible with standard French plugs without ground connection.

FLOAT SWITCHES

48VDC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES AND REDUNDANT MODULES

Available in grey water and dirty water versions. All are equipped with internal changeover contact, which is actuated based on liquid level. High quality 3x1 type cables (3 wires of 1mm2 cross-section area) allow the filling and emptying function to be selected when wiring the switch. Excellent mechanical and chemical resistance and first-rate reliability. Available in versions with PVC or Neoprene cable in lengths of 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20m. The patented version for dirty water consists of two watertight chambers that are insulated from each other by closed-cell foam material, providing a further protective barrier against infiltration and high thermal insulation.

Our range of switching power supplies has been extensively enhanced with 48VDC versions (single-phase from 30 to 480W, two-phase 100W and three-phase from 240 to 960W) and redundant modules. The modules are used for redundant connection of two or more power supplies, to increase the reliability of the DC power supply. The redundant modules ensure perfect isolation between the various connected power supplies.

BCG SERIES AUTOMATIC COMMUNICATING BATTERY CHARGERS

ENERGY METERS

The new communicating version BCG battery chargers incorporate essential features for applications where the charge state of the connected battery needs to be constantly controlled. In the event of an AC power failure, the battery chargers are able to maintain active communication by drawing power from the battery, thus ensuring constant supervision even in emergencies. They are equipped with a RS485 serial communication port and can be programmed wirelessly using NFC technology.

The range of DME energy meters for three-phase systems has been extended with three new models. The CT-connection DME D330 and direct-connection DME D301 up to 63A have an onboard RS485 port that allows them to be integrated into a network of power consumption monitoring instruments by means of supervision software. The user interface of the DME D305 model features a backlight icon display for electrical measurements and scrolling text for describing configuration parameters and user-customizable alarm messages.

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

ATL SERIES AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROLLERS

Our line of current transformers has been enhanced with new solid-core and split-core types. The new solid-core transformers are available up to 3000A and are designated as precision transformers due to their 0.5S accuracy class. We have also extended our split-core transformer offering with compact models and current ratings from 100A to 500A. They are supplied pre-wired with a 1m cable.

ATL 800 controls load switching between two sources, whereas ATL 900 can manage three power sources and two tie breakers and is therefore ideal for advanced applications. The current measuring inputs on ATL 900 define the switching threshold based on the absorbed power. The two models have a built-in RS485 port and can manage a third control device with tie-breaker or non-priority load management function. Closedtransition transfer switching. The integrated PLC logic enables the switching logics to be customized. Can also be programmed wirelessly using NFC technology.

DUAL POWER SUPPLY MODULE

GENERATING SET CONTROLLERS

Automatic switching is now more reliable than ever thanks to the dual power supply module. The device has two inputs (Line 1 and Line 2) and is able to verify the applied voltages, identifying which one is more suitable for connecting to the moduleâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s output. Ideal for supplying changeover switche disconnectors and motorised circuit breakers. The two single-phase voltage inputs are independent, insulated and each capable of supplying the internal measuring circuit. Further checks are carried out on the output voltage, enabling the correct operation of the device to be verified. In the event of a fault, the red LED will light up and voltage will be no longer available at the output terminals.

RGK4... is a compact stand-alone controller featuring an icon display with intuitive interface. The gen set can be activated locally or by remote control. When the gen set is not in operation, the controller can be switched off without physically removing the battery power supply. RGK4... is also available with a three-position key for local or remote shutdown and starting. RGK 610 is an AMF (Automatic Mains Failure) controller that is expandable by means of EXP series modules. USB, RS232 or RS485 communication ports can be incorporated by adding an EXP expansion module.

SOFTWARE and APP: SYNERGY CLOUD, XPRESS and NFC

GATEWAY AND 3G MODEM

The Synergy software is now available in the Cloud version! Multi-channel connections, data collation in SQL database and multi-user access via Web browser to live pages or tables without having to install special software. Easy monitoring of the main electrical parameters of LOVATO Electric devices. The XPRESS software can be used to configure all recent LOVATO Electric devices equipped with a communication port, particularly using the CX 01 (USB) and CX 02 (Wi-Fi) dongles. The NFC app enables LOVATO Electric devices to be programmed using smartphones and tablets by means of Android NFC technology.

The Internet connectivity of LOVATO Electric products is now enhanced by the availability of the RS485-Ethernet gateway (EXC CON 01) and 3G modem (EXC M3G 01). These devices enable the RS485 network over which LOVATO Electric products (such as a multimeter) are connected to interface with a LAN and a 3G wireless network respectively. This makes it possible to create a connection with a software, app or program capable of collating the measured data.

I N T E R N AT I O N A L PRESENCE|

GERMANY | • LOVATO Electric GmbH www.LovatoElectric.de

The presence of LOVATO Electric in the major world markets is the result of its ongoing strategy of internationalisation. LOVATO Electric Italy distributes its products worldwide to over 100 countries through its foreign subsidiaries and importer network.

ITALY | • LOVATO Electric S.p.A. www.LovatoElectric.com

FRANCE | • LOVATO Electric SAS www.LovatoElectric.fr

CANADA | • LOVATO Electric Corp. www.Lovato.ca

USA | • LOVATO Electric Inc. www.LovatoUsa.com

90 | 13 |

IMPORTERS FOREIGN SUBSIDIARIES

UK | • LOVATO Electric LTD www.Lovato.co.uk

100 |

• | POLAND LOVATO Electric SP.Z O.O. www.LovatoElectric.pl

• | CZECH REPUBLIC LOVATO Electric S.R.O. www.LovatoElectric.cz

• | RUSSIA OOO LOVATO Electric www.LovatoElectric.ru

• | ROMANIA LOVATO Electric SRL www.LovatoElectric.ro

• | SPAIN LOVATO Electric S.L.U. www.LovatoElectric.es

COUNTRIES

• | TURKEY LOVATO Elektrik LTD www.LovatoElectric.com.tr

CHINA | • LOVATO Electric (SHANGHAI) CO LTD www.LovatoElectric.cn

• | UNITED ARAB EMIRATES LOVATO Electric ME FZE www.LovatoElectric.ae

A LONG TRADITION OF STYLE |

1922

We have been managing energy since 1922, led by the same family for four generations, from the early days of electrical engineering

to the present day, in which electronics and automation go hand in hand. Italian design has always been our hallmark and an ever-present requirement in the daily work of our designers, researchers and engineering experts. Our company mission has always been the same: to create innovative and reliable products, offering services that exceed customer expectations.

innovation and reliability

Italian design

T H E F O U N D AT I O N S O N W H I C H W E A R E B U I LT |

ISO 9001

Quality is a keyword in every market, especially ours.That is why we have always made quality a top priority, such that in 1992 we were one of the first companies in Italy to certify our management system according to the ISO 9001 standard. These days, quality is a broad concept that embraces many issues. We have identified two issues that are central to our business. The first is environmental management and we have aligned our corresponding system with the ISO 14001 standard in order to protect and sustain the environment in which we live.

ISO 14001

The second issue is safety, a primary consideration in any workplace, which is why we are certified to OHSAS 18001.

OHSAS 18001

KEY COMPONENTS OF OUR SUCC ESS |

Products that are designed for the most diverse applications and installed all over the world need to meet high standards of reliability.

Behind our products there is a solid, flexible and innovative organisation with cutting-edge production facilities, where robotics and automation ensure that we can consistently replicate the desired results. Our testing laboratory is authorised to issue ACAE/LOVAG certificates, accredited to EN ISO/IEC 17025 and qualified to conduct tests according to national and international standards. Our technical support service helps customers to select the right products and commission them, in addition to offering after-sales advice.

LOVAG certified laboratory

technical support

C U T T I N G - E D G E L A B O R AT O R Y | MAIN TESTS PERFORMED: • Making and breaking capacities • Short-circuit with comparator system • Temperature rise • Thermal protection functionality • Verification of dielectric properties • Verification of terminals mechanical properties • Verification of IK code degree of protection (impact withstand) • Verification of IP code degree of protection (ingress protection against water jets) • Shock and vibration withstand • Electrical and mechanical durability • Low current-low voltage contact functionality • Ambient simulation in climatic chamber • Glow-wire ignitability of insulating parts • Immunity to conducted and radiated emission fields • Immunity to surges, fast transients / bursts and electrostatic discharges.

EXPERIENCE AND EXPERTISE| To meet the growing demand for technical training of industrial automation and energy management professionals, LOVATO Electric provides a high-profile programme of courses through the LOVATO Academy. The curriculum includes courses on micro PLCs, energy management and motor starting and control technologies.

energy management

LOVATO Academy

A training area equipped with the latest audiovisual technology and interactive training benches provides the perfect setting for understanding the true potential of our products and software during both function programming and simulation phases. Training is also available over the Internet:

interactive training benches

LOVATO Academy offers free live seminars that are streamed worldwide and simply require an Internet connection to participate. There is even a LOVATO Electric channel on YouTube, complete with video tutorials that demonstrate how to configure and use our products by means of practical examples.

free live seminars video tutorials

Page 1-4 SM1P... • Motor protection • Push button control • Ranges 0.1...40A (16 choices) • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: from 100 to 10kA • Suitable for mounting in modular panels.

Page 1-4 SM1R... • Motor protection • Rotary knob type • Ranges 0.1...40A (16 choices) • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: from 100 to 20kA • Thermal and magnetic trip indicator • UL 508 Type E via accessory.

Page 1-5

SM2R... • Motor protection • Rotary knob type • Ranges 34...63A (2 choices) • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: 50kA • UL 508 Type E.

SM3R... • Motor protection • Rotary knob type • Ranges 55...100A (3 choices) • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: 50kA • Thermal and magnetic trip indicator • UL 508 Type E via accessory.

Page 1-4 SM1RM... • Starter protection (magnetic only) • Rotary knob type • Rated current from 0.16 to 40A • IEC breaking capacity Icu at 400V: from 100 to 20kA.

Page 1-5 SM1PF... • Fuse monitoring function • Push button control • Fixed thermal protection: 0.2A • Magnetic trip threshold: 1.2A.

LOVATO Electric motor protection circuit breakers are suitable for new motors with high IE3 efficiency values

MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Wide adjustment range 0.1 to 100A IEC breaking capacity Icu 50kA (400V) up to 100A Suitable for isolation UL 508 Type E Comprehensive line of accessories Magnetic-only version Automatic trip indicators High reliability and accuracy of tripping.

4 4 5 5 6 8

1 - 12 1 - 14 1 - 15

P ROTECTION

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... Technical characteristics .................................................................................................

1 1 1 1 1 1

AND

Motor protection circuit breakers SM1… up to 40A. Magnetic and thermal protection ........................................................ Motor protection circuit breakers SM1RM… up to 40A. Magnetic protection ...................................................................... Motor protection circuit breakers SM2... and SM3... up to 100A. Magnetic and thermal protection ...................................... SM1PF... breakers. Fuse monitoring function ..................................................................................................................... Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1… ......................................................................................................................... Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2... and SM3... ........................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE

M OTOR C ONTROL

Motor protection circuit breakers

Motor protection (magnetic and thermal protection)

SM1P...

SM1R...

SM2R...

0.1...40A

34...63A

Thermal protection

Magnetic protection

Rated current

TRIP position Phase failure sensitive

Padlockable in O

Choice

230V

400V

440V

500V

690V

230V

400V

440V

500V

690V

230V

400V

440V

500V

690V

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

0.1...0.16

100

Ics -

0.16...0.25

100

0.25...0.4

100

0.4...0.63

100

0.63...1

100

1...1.6

100

1.6...2.5

100

2.5...4

100

4...6.5

100

6.3...10

100 100 100 100

12.5

100 100 100 100

9...14

100 100

12.5

100 100 100 100

13...18

100

12.5

100 100 100 100

17...23

100 100

20...25

100 100

24...32

100 100

30...40

100 100

34…50

100 100

45…63

100 100

55…75

70…90

80…100

SM1P... MODULAR SIZE – Mounting on front of panels or in modular panels for rapid access to buttons, avoiding the opening of the door by non-technical staff. – Auxiliary contacts, indicator contacts and releases compatible with modular panels.

40A IN 45mm – From 0.1A to 40A in a device just 45mm wide. – High short-circuit breaking capacity up to 40A. – Small, cost-effective starters.

45mm (1.77”)

SM1R... TRIP INDICATION – Thermal and magnetic trip indication with trip position of knob. – Specific optical indication for shortcircuit tripping; guarantees maximum safety for operators and reliability of the system. – Auxiliary trip indication contacts with ability to distinguish overload from short circuit.

UL 508 Type E – The entire rotary knob type is certified UL Type E. – Type E is a specific requirement of the UL standards that requires, of short-circuit protection devices, increased terminal isolation distances and strict breaking capacity tests. – Eliminates the need for further short-circuit protection devices upstream of the motor protection. SM1... HIGH-PERFORMANCE PLASTICS – IEC/EN 60335-compliant plastics for domestic and similar applications. Can be used in catering equipment. – EN 45545-compliant plastics: fire behaviour and emissions of fumes. Suitable for railway applications.

1-2

Motor protection circuit breakers Starter protection (magnetic protection)

Fuse monitoring

SM3R...

SM1RM...

SM1PF...

55…100A

0.1…40A

0.2A

230V

400V

440V

500V

690V

230V

400V

440V

500V

690V

230V

400V

440V

500V

690V

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

Ics

Icu

100

Ics -

100

ENCLOSURES – Various types of plastic enclosures are available for rotating and buttoncontrolled motor protection circuit breakers up to 40A. – Ideal for small machines and isolated motors. – IP65 (UL Type 4X) protection rating and UV-ray resistant. – Very robust plastics, IK07; pass even the strict UL “ball impact” test. – UL-certified.

DOOR COUPLING HANDLES – Padlockable door coupling handles for the entire rotary knob type. Make systems compliant with safety regulations. – Tough, easy and quick to install.

SM1... PADLOCKABILITY – Padlockability as standard on the entire rotary knob type and push button-controlled motor protection circuit breaker range. For greater operator safety during maintenance and bypassing of the equipment.

1-3

Motor protection circuit breakers

Motor protection circuit breakers SM1… up to 40A. Magnetic and thermal protection

Order code

Thermal trip adjustment range

Short circuit Qty breaking per capacity pkg at 400V Icu Ics

[A]

[kA]

[kA] n°

[kg]

Push button control.

SM1P...

SM1P 0016

0.1...0.16

100

0.280

SM1P 0025

0.16...0.25

100

0.280

SM1P 0040

0.25...0.4

100

0.280

SM1P 0063

0.4...0.63

100

0.280

SM1P 0100

0.63...1

100

0.280

SM1P 0160

1...1.6

100

0.280

SM1P 0250

1.6...2.5

100

0.350

SM1P 0400

2.5...4

100

0.350

SM1P 0650

4...6.5

100

0.350

SM1P 1000

6.3...10

100

0.350

SM1P 1400

9...14

12.5 5

0.350

SM1P 1800

13...18

12.5 5

0.350

SM1P 2300

17...23

0.350

SM1P 2500

20...25

0.350

SM1P 3200

24...32

0.350

SM1P 4000

30...40

0.350

SM1R 0016

0.1...0.16

100

0.320

SM1R 0025

0.16...0.25

100

0.320

SM1R 0040

0.25...0.4

100

0.320

SM1R 0063

0.4...0.63

100

0.320

SM1R 0100

0.63...1

100

0.320

SM1R 0160

1...1.6

100

0.320

SM1R 0250

1.6...2.5

100

0.320

SM1R 0400

2.5...4

100

0.390

SM1R 0650

4...6.5

100

0.390

SM1R 1000

6.3...10

100

0.390

SM1R 1400

9...14

100

0.390

SM1R 1800

13...18

100

0.390

SM1R 2300

17...23

0.390

SM1R 2500

20...25

0.390

SM1R 3200

24...32

0.390

SM1R 4000

30...40

0.390

Order code

Rated and magnetic trip current

Rotary knob type.

SM1R...

Motor protection circuit breakers SM1RM… up to 40A. Magnetic protection

Rat.

Trip.

Short circuit Qty breaking per capacity pkg at 400V Icu Ics

[A]

[kA]

[kA] n°

[kg]

SM1RM 0016

0.16 1.6

100

0.320

SM1RM 0025

0.25 3.2

100

0.320

SM1RM 0040

0.4

5.2

100

0.320

SM1RM 0063

0.63 8.2

100

0.320

SM1RM 0100

100

0.320

SM1RM 0160

1.6

100

0.320

SM1RM 0250

2.5

100

0.320

SM1RM 0400

100

0.390

SM1RM 0650

6.5

100

0.390

SM1RM 1000

130

100

0.390

SM1RM 1400

182

100

0.390

SM1RM 1800

234

100

0.390

SM1RM 2300

299

0.390

SM1RM 2500

325

0.390

SM1RM 3200

416

0.390

SM1RM 4000

420

0.390

Rotary knob type.

SM1RM...

1-4

Add-on blocks/ Accessories - page 1-6 and 7

Dimensions page 1-12

General characteristics SM1P... and SM1R... are modern circuit breakers with thermal and magnetic trip releases and high breaking capacity. Motor control and protection of up to 22kW (400V) are possible by choosing the suitable adjustment range, 0.1 to 40A. The dimensions of SM1P… breakers are compliant with the DIN43880 standard, allowing them to be mounted in all modular enclosures on the market. A magnetic trip indicator integrated on the SM1R… breakers avoids dangerous closing operations during shortcircuit conditions, previously disconnected by the breaker. SM1R… breakers are Type E-certified according to UL508. SM1P… and SM1R… motor protection circuit breakers are suitable for isolation in accordance with IEC/EN 60947 standards and can be padlocked in OFF position without using accessories. Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude protection fuses on the majority of the installations. Operational characteristics – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz – Maximum rated current: 40A – Adjustment ranges: 16 – IEC breaking capacity: See table on page 1-2 – Heat dissipation per phase: 0.7...3.3W – Magnetic tripping: 13In max. – Tripping class: 10A – Phase failure sensitive – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles – Electrical life: 100,000 cycles – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) – Mounting position: Any – IEC utilisation category: A – Padlocking in OFF: Ø4mm/0.16” – IEC degree of protection: IP20. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC. SM1R… breakers are Type E-certified (Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers) according to UL508. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. Plastic materials compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335 and EN 45545.

General characteristics SM1RM… are motor protection circuit breakers with magnetic tripping only and high breaking capacity. They are typically used to protect starters where there is a thermal relay or other overload protection. Starter control and protection of up to 22kW (400V) are possible by choosing the suitable adjustment range, from 0.1 to 40A. Operational characteristics – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz – Maximum rated current: 40A – IEC breaking capacity: See table on page 1-2 – Heat dissipation per phase: 0.7...3.3W – Magnetic tripping: 13In max. – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles – Electrical life: 100,000 cycles – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) – Mounting position: Any – IEC utilisation category: A – Padlocking in OFF: Ø4mm – IEC degree of protection: IP20. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. Plastic materials compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335 and EN 45545.

Wiring diagrams page 1-14

Technical characteristics page 1-15

Motor protection circuit breakers Motor protection circuit breakers SM2... and SM3... up to 100A. Magnetic and thermal protection

Order code

Thermal trip adjustment range

Short circuit Qty breaking per capacity pkg at 400V Icu Ics

[A]

[kA]

[kA] n°

[kg]

SM2R 5000

34…50

1.000

SM2R 6300

45…63

1.000

SM3R 7500

55…75

2.200

SM3R 9000

70…90

2.200

SM3R 9900

80…100

2.200

Rotary knob type.

Operational characteristics – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 8kV – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz – Maximum rated current: 63A (for SM2...); 100A (for SM3...) – Adjustment ranges: 2 (for SM2...); 3 (for SM3...) – IEC breaking capacity: See table on page 1-2 – Max. heat dissipation per phase: 7W – Magnetic tripping: 13In max. – Tripping class: 10A – Phase failure sensitive – Mechanical life: 50,000 cycles – Electrical life: 25,000 cycles – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) – Mounting position: Any – IEC utilisation category: A – Padlocking in OFF: Ø4mm/0.16” – IEC degree of protection: IP20 on front.

SM2R...

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC. SM2… and SM3… circuit breakers are Type E-certified (Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers) according to UL508; for Type E certification, SM3 only with accessory SM3X90 00R. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

SM3R...

SM1PF... circuit breakers Fuse monitoring function

Order code

Fixed thermal release current

Short circuit Qty breaking per capacity pkg at 400V Icu Ics

[A]

[kA]

[kA] n°

[kg]

100

0.280

Push button control. SM1PF 0020

0.20

SM1PF...

Add-on blocks/ Accessories page 1-6 to 1-8

General characteristics SM2R... and SM3R... are modern circuit breakers with thermal and magnetic trip releases and high breaking capacity. Motor control and protection, up to 45kW (400V) are possible by choosing the suitable adjustment range, up to 100A. SM2R… and SM3R… breakers are Type E-certified according to UL508. The SM2R… and SM3R… types are suitable for isolation according to IEC/EN 60947 standards and can be padlocked in OFF position without using accessories. SM3… has a trip function which indicates thermal and magnetic tripping. Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude protection fuses on the majority of the installations.

Dimensions page 1-12 to 1-14

General characteristics SM1PF… are breakers with magnetic-thermal tripping intended specifically for monitoring the status of fuses. By connecting every phase of the breaker to a fuse, when it blows, the motor protection breaks. Through the auxiliary contacts fitted on the motor protection, the blown fuses are signalled electrically. Operational characteristics – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V – IEC rated impulse withstand voltage: 6kV – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz – Rated current: 0.2A – Magnetic tripping: 1.2A. – Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles – Electrical life: 100,000 cycles – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) – Mounting position: Any – IEC utilisation category: A – Padlocking in OFF: Ø4mm/0.16” – IEC degree of protection: IP20. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. Plastic materials compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60335 and EN 45545.

Wiring diagrams page 1-14

Technical characteristics page 1-15

1-5

Motor protection circuit breakers Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1…

Order code

Characteristics

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

Add-on auxiliary contacts. SM1X11...

SM1X12...

SM1X11 20

Front mount 2NO

0.016

SM1X11 11

Front mount 1NO+1NC

0.016

SM1X12 20

Side mount 2NO

0.036

SM1X12 11

Side mount 1NO+1NC

0.016

SM1X12 02

Side mount 2NC

0.036

SM1X13 11

Side mount. Contacts for thermal and magnetic tripping indication 1NO+1NC

0.036

SM1X13 11M

Side mount. Contacts for magnetic tripping indication 1NO+1NC

0.036

SM1X13...

Undervoltage trip releases.

SM1X14... SM1X15...

SM1X16...

SM1X14 110

110VAC 50/60Hz

0.130

SM1X14 230

230VAC 50/60Hz

0.130

SM1X14 400

400VAC 50/60Hz

0.130

SM1X15 110R With early-make contacts 110VAC 50/60Hz

0.140

SM1X15 230R With early-make contacts 230VAC 50/60Hz

0.140

SM1X15 400R With early-make contacts 400VAC 50/60Hz

0.140

Shunt trip releases. SM1X16 024

24VAC 50/60Hz

0.130

SM1X16 110

110VAC 50/60Hz

0.130

SM1X16 230

230VAC 50/60Hz

0.130

SM1X16 400

400VAC 50/60Hz

0.130

0.006

Adjuster sealing kit. SM1X18 12

With wire and lead included

IP65 (4X) padlockable door coupling handle for SM1R... SM1X18 200R

SM1X18 200R

Red/yellow complete 1 with rod length 200mm/7.87”

0.115

SM1X18B 200R Black complete with rod length 200mm/7.87”

0.115

SM1X18 S

0.030

0.016

Support for rod >145mm/5.71”

Phase separation barriers for SM1R… SM1X9000R

For Type E as per UL508

Three-phase connection busbars 45mm/1.77” spacing.

SM1X18B 200R

11 SMX90 32

For 2 breakers

0.028

11 SMX90 33

For 3 breakers

0.050

11 SMX90 34

For 4 breakers

0.071

11 SMX90 35

For 5 breakers

0.092

Three-phase connection busbars 54mm/2.13” spacing. 11 SMX90 42

For 2 breakers

0.031

11 SMX90 43

For 3 breakers

0.056

11 SMX90 44

For 4 breakers

0.081

11 SMX90 45

For 5 breakers

0.090

General and operational characteristics ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS – Connectable to the left side of the breaker or on the front – Maximum combinations: 3 SM1X… blocks with 6 auxiliary contacts in total of which 1 front block and 2 side blocks – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A (5A for SM1X11...) – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V (300V for SM1X11...) – Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6kV (4kV for SM1X11...) – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 - Q600 (B300 - R300 for SM1X11...) – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG. – Screw tightening tool: Phillips 2 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 0.5 DIN 46880 modules. UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RELEASES – Snap on to the right side of the breaker – Consumption inrush/holding: 12/3.5VA – Release voltage: 0.35...0.7Us – Operating voltage: 0.85...1.1Us – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG. – Screw tightening tool: Phillips 2 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 1 DIN 46880 module. SHUNT TRIP RELEASES – Snap on to the right side of the breaker – In-rush consumption: 20VA – Operating voltage: 0.7...1.1Us – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG. – Screw tightening tool: Phillips 2 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm / 9lbin – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 1 standard DIN 46880 module. TERMINAL BLOCKS FOR BUSBAR SUPPLY – Imax 63A – Screw tightening tool: Phillips 2 – Maximum tightening torque: 2.3Nm / 20lbin – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum: 4...25mm 2 or 10...4AWG. THREE-PHASE CONNECTION BUSBARS – Imax 63A – SMX90 3... 45mm/1.77” spacing to reduce the width to the minimum – SMX90 4... 54mm/2.13” spacing to consent to fit one side-mount auxiliary contact block on the breaker. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Terminal block for busbar supply.

SM1X18 S

11 SMX90 30

For all busbar types

0.048

SM1X90 50

For all busbar types Type E as per UL508

0.033

For unused terminals

0.004

Safety cover. 11 SMX90 31

Accessories for screw-fixing motor protection.

SM1X89 02

Metal brackets for fixing SM1… motor protection with screws

0.006

BFX89 01

Universal plastic base for screw-fixing SM1… motor protection

0.016

BFX89 01

1-6

Only suitable for SM1R... motor protection circuit breakers

Dimensions page 1-12 and 13

Wiring diagrams page 1-14

Technical characteristics page 1-15

Motor protection circuit breakers Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1…

Order code

Characteristics

Qty Wt per pkg n°

SM1X30...

[kg]

Rigid SM1 breaker-contactor connections.

SM1X31... SM1X32...

SM1X30 40P

For motor protection breaker 10 SM1P... with BG… mini-contactors

0.019

SM1X31 41P

For motor protection breaker 10 SM1P... with BF09..25A contactors

0.035

SM1X32 41P

For motor protection breaker 10 SM1P... with BF26..38A contactors

0.045

SM1X30 40R

For motor protection breaker 10 SM1R... with BG… mini-contactors

0.019

SM1X31 41R

For motor protection breaker 10 SM1R... with BF09..25A contactors

0.035

SM1X31 42R

For motor protection breaker SM1R... with contactors BF09..25D and BF09…25L

0.044

SM1X32 41R

For motor protection breaker SM1R... with contactors BF26..38A

0.045

Surface mount enclosures IP65 (4X) for SM1P...

SM1Z17 01P

SM1Z17 02P

SM1Z17 01P

Width 80mm/3.15”

0.235

SM1Z17 02P

Width 80mm/3.15”. With button 1 for emergency stop

0.275

SM1Z17 11P

Width 100mm/3.94”

0.315

SM1Z17 12P

Width 100mm/3.94”. With button for emergency stop

0.345

0.205

SM1Z17 15R

With rotary actuator 1 red/yellow. Width 100mm/3.94”

0.350

SM1Z17 10R

With black rotary actuator Width 100mm/3.94”

0.350

Flush mount enclosure IP65 (4X) for SM1P... SM1Z17 05P

Width 87mm/3.42”

Surface mount enclosures IP65 (4X) for SM1R...

SM1Z17 05P

SM1X17 40P

SM1Z17 15R

SM1X17 45P

ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS. For SM1Z...P enclosures. SM1X17 40P

Emergency stop button. IP65 (4X)

0.044

SM1X17 45P

Rubber membrane with rim. IP65 (4X)

0.016

SM1X17 46P

Lockable block. IP65 (4X)

0.030

23 NEONV V Green

0.006

23 NEONV R Red

0.006

0.009

Pilot lights.

Plastic M25 to ½” NPT entry adapter. 11 LM M25 PG16 For enclosures SM1Z17 01P and SM1Z17 02P

SM1X17 46P

Starter assembly adapter plates.

11 SMX90 10

11 SMX90 12

11 SMX90 10

Adapter plate for direct starter comprising breaker SM1... and contactor BG..., BF09A...BF38A

0.058

11 SMX90 12

Adapter plate for reversing 1 switch comprising breaker for motor protection SM1… contactors BG..., BF09A...BF38A

0.095

11 SMX90 14

Adapter plate for starter star-delta comprising motor protection breaker SM1... and contactors BF09A...BF38A

0.118

11 SMX90 18

35mm rail for passage of wires underneath to contactor; for SMX90 14

0.025

11 SMX90 19

DIN rail extension 35mm/1.38”

0.025

General and operational characteristics RIGID SM1 BREAKER-CONTACTOR CONNECTIONS The SM1X3… connections electrically and mechanically fasten the motor protection breaker together with the contactor. This forms a highly compact single-unit starter for quick installation on a single 35mm DIN rail. The SM1X3… connections can also be mounted in combination with reversing switches and star-delta starters made with the rigid connections indicated in section 2. SURFACE MOUNT ENCLOSURES – Top or bottom entry: • SM1Z17 01P and SM1Z17 02P 4 M25-threaded knockouts • SM1Z17 11P and SM1Z17 12P 4 threaded knockout with Ø20.5mm/0.81” or Ø26.5mm/1.04” • SM1Z17 10R e SM1Z17 15R 4 threaded knockout with Ø20.5mm/0.81” or Ø26.5mm/1.04” – Possibility of rear entry too – Protection rating: IP65 (UL Type 4X) – Holds a breaker, one front-mount auxiliary contact block and either one shunt or undervoltage release; only for SM1Z17 10R and SM1Z17 15R, 2 side-mount auxiliary contact blocks can be fitted as well – The SM1Z17 10R and SM1Z17 15R rotary actuators can be padlocked with a maximum of 3 padlocks Ø4...8mm/0.16...0.31” – Earth/ground terminal included – Operating temperature: -25…+60°C – Storage temperature: -50...+80°C. FLUSH MOUNT ENCLOSURES – Holds a SM1P breaker, one front-mount auxiliary contact block and either one shunt or undervoltage release – Protection rating: IP65 (UL Type 4X) – Earth/ground terminal included – 70x115mm/2.76x4.53” cutout – Operating temperature: -25…+60°C – Storage temperature: -50...+80°C. ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES Emergency stop button: – Turn to release – Red button Ø35mm/1.38”. Lockable block: – Prevents closing operation; 3 padlocks maximum Ø4...8mm/0.16...0.31”. STARTER ASSEMBLY ADAPTER PLATES These accessories permit the assembly of starters, making slim and compact equipment that’s easy and quick to install. The starter adapter plates install on DIN rail 35mm/1.38”. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC for rigid connections and enclosures. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 141.

Complete with required voltage. Available voltages: – AC 50/60Hz 24/110/220...240VAC (indicate 220)/ 380...415VAC (indicate 380).

11 SMX90 14

Dimensions pages 1-12 and 13

Wiring diagrams page 1-14

Technical characteristics page 1-15

1-7

Motor protection circuit breakers Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2... and SM3...

Order code

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

Add-on auxiliary contacts.

SM2X11...

SM2X12...

Characteristics

SM2X11 20

Front mount 2NO

0.020

SM2X11 11

Front mount 1NO+1NC

0.020

SM2X11 02

Front mount 2NC

0.020

SM2X12 20

Side mount 2NO

0.040

SM2X12 11

Side mount 1NO+1NC

0.040

SM2X12 02

Side mount 2NC

0.040

SM2X13 11

Side mount. Indicator contacts for thermal and magnetic tripping 1NO+1NC

0.040

SM2X13 11

Undervoltage trip releases. SM2X14 230

230VAC 50/60Hz

0.100

SM2X14 400

400VAC 50/60Hz

0.100

SM2X14 440

440VAC 50/60Hz

0.100 0.100

Shunt trip releases.

SM2X14...

SM2X16...

SM2X16 024

24VAC 50/60Hz

SM2X16 110

110VAC 50/60Hz

0.100

SM2X16 230

230VAC 50/60Hz

0.100

SM2X16 400

400VAC 50/60Hz

0.100

SM2X16 440

440VAC 50/60Hz

0.100

SM2X18 200R Red/yellow complete with rod length 200mm/7.87”

0.115

SM2X18 B200R Black complete with rod with rod length 200mm/7.87”

0.115

0.175

Padlockable IP65 (4X) door coupling handle.

Phase separation barriers for SM3R… SM3X90 00R

For Type E as per UL508

SM2X18...

1-8

General and operational characteristics ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS – Insert on the top front or snap on the left side of the breaker – Maximum combinations: 3 SM1X… blocks with 6 auxiliary contacts in total of which 1 front block and 2 side blocks – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 10A (5A for SM2X11...) – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V (250V for SM2X11...) – UL/CSA and IEC/EN 60947-5-1 designation: A600 – Q300 (B300 - R300 for SM1X11...) – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5m or 18...14AWG – Screw tightening tool: Pz 2 – Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm / 10bin – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 0.5 DIN 46880 modules. UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RLEASES – Snap on to the right side of the breaker for motor protection – Consumption in-rush/holding: 8.5/3VA – Release voltage: 0.35...0.7Us – Operating limits: 0.85...1.1Us – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG – Screw tightening tool: Pz 2 – Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm / 10lbin – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 1 DIN 46880 module. SHUNT TRIP RELEASES – Snap on to the right side of the breaker – In-rush consumption: 20VA – Operating limits: 0.85...1.1Us – Conductor cross section minimum-maximum (1 or 2 wires): 0.75...2.5mm 2 or 18...14AWG – Screw tightening tool: Pz 2 – Maximum tightening torque: 1.2Nm / 10lbin – Width of side-mount auxiliary contacts equal to 1 standard DIN 46880 module. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Dimensions page 1-14

Wiring diagrams page 1-14

Technical characteristics page 1-15

Motor protection circuit breakers Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1…

Combinations

1 SM1X14...

SM1X15...

SM1X12...

SM1R...

SM1X12...

SM1X11...

SM1X12...

SM1X16...

SM1X13 11 SM1X12...

SM1X13 11M

SM1P...

SM1X11...

SM1X13 11

Only suitable for SM1R... motor protection circuit breakers

SM1X13 11M SM1X13 11M

Three-phase connection busbars. SMX90 30

SMX90 35 SMX90 31

SMX90 34

Three-phase connection busbar, 45mm/1.77” spacing (breakers without add-on blocks). SMX90 32

SMX90 33

SMX90 45 SMX90 30

SMX90 31

SMX90 44

SMX90 43 SMX90 42

Three-phase connection busbar, 54mm/2.13” spacing (breakers with add-on blocks)

Dimensions pages 1-12 and 13

Wiring diagrams page 1-14

1-9

Motor protection circuit breakers Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1…

Combinations Rigid SM1P... breaker - contactor connections.

SM1P...

SM1X30 40P

SM1P...

SM1X32 41P

SM1X31 41P

BG... BF09A...BF25A

BF26A...BF38A

Rigid SM1R... breaker - contactor connections.

SM1R...

SM1X31 41R

SM1X30 40R

SM1X32 41R

SM1X31 42R

BG... BF09...BF25

BF26A...BF38A

For BF09A...BF25A contactors. For BF09D…BF25D and BF09L…BF25L contactors.

Padlockable door coupling handle.

SM1R...

SM1X18 S SM1X18 200R SM1X18B 200R

1-10

Dimensions page 1-12 and 13

Wiring diagrams page 1-14

Motor protection circuit breakers Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1â&#x20AC;Ś Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2... and SM3... Combinations Surface mount enclosures for SM1P... Width 80mm.

Surface mount enclosures for SM1P... Width 100mm.

SM1Z17 02P

SM1Z17 0...

SM1Z17 12P

SM1X14... SM1X16...

SM1Z17 01P

SM1X14... SM1X16...

SM1Z17 11P

SM1X14... SM1P...

SM1X14...

SM1X11...

SM1P...

SM1X11...

SM1X1... SM1X1...

Flush mount enclosures for SM1P... Width 87mm.

Surface mount enclosures for SM1R... Width 100mm.

SM1Z17 05P

SM1X14... SM1X16...

SM1X14... SM1X11...

SM1P...

Combinations of SM2... and SM3... motor protection circuit breakers Padlockable door coupling handle.

SM2X14... SM2X16... LL

ato

SM2X11... SM2... SM3...

SM2... SM3...

SM2X13 11

SM2X18 200R SM2X18B 200R

SM2X12...

Dimensions pages 1-12, 13 and 14

Wiring diagrams page 1-14

1-11

Motor protection circuit breakers Dimensions [mm (in)] SM1P... with side-mount auxiliary contacts

SM1R... with side-mount auxiliary contacts

80.8 (3.18”)

SM1X14... SM1X15... SM1X16...

5.5 (0.22”)

43.6 (1.72”) 62.2 (2.45”)

44.8 (1.76”)

69.6 (2.74”)

SM1X13...

SM1X14... SM1X15... SM1X16...

SM1X12...

44 (1.73”)

37.5 (1.48”)

90 (3.54”)

44.4 (1.75)

96.6 (3.92”) 90 (3.54”) 37.5 (1.48”)

90 (3.54”)

44.8 (1.76”) SM1X12...

18 (0.71”)

9 (0.35”)

90 (3.54”)

18 (0.71”)

96.6 (3.92”)

9 (0.35”)

5.5 (0.22”)

49 (1.93”) 74.5 (2.93) 85.6 (3.37”)

SM1X13...

SM1P... with BG… mini-contactors and connection SM1X30 40P

SM1P... with BF09 A...BF25 A... contactors and connection SM1X31 41P

SM1P... with BF26 A...BF38 A... contactors and connection SM1X32 41P

198.1 (7.80”)

SM1X30 40P

189.1 (7.44”)

75.1 (2.96”)

161.6 (6.36”)

44.8 (1.76”)

SM1X31 41P

45 (1.77”)

SM1X32 41P

80.4 (3.16”) 45 (1.77”)

44.8 (1.76”)

SM1X30 40R

SM1R... with BF09 D...BF25 D... contactors BF09 L...BF25 L... and connection SM1X31 42R

91.1 (3.59”)

189.1 (7.44”)

91.1 (3.59”)

161.6 (6.36”)

44.8 (1.76”)

SM1R... with BF09 A...BF25 A... contactors and connection SM1X31 41R

89.8 (3.53”)

189.3 (7.45”)

SM1R... with BG… mini-contactors and connection SM1X30 40R

SM1X31 41R

SM1X31 42R

45 (1.77”)

SM1R... with BF26 A...BF38 A... contactors and connection SM1X32 41R

98.5 (3.88”)

SM1R... padlockable door coupling handle SM1X18 200R or SM1X18B 200R

91.1 (3.59”)

94.6 (3.72”)

34.3 (1.35”)

198.1 (7.80”)

SM1X32 41R

65 (2.56”)

45 (1.77”)

1-12

5.5 (0.22”)

74.5 (2.93”)

min. 56 (2.20”) / max. 212 (8.35”)

35 (1.38”) 1...4 (0.04...0.16”)

SM1X18 200R SM1X18B 200R

Motor protection circuit breakers Dimensions [mm (in)] These elements mounted with SM1... breakers without side-mount auxiliary contacts

These elements mounted with SM1... breakers with side-mount auxiliary contacts SMX12... or SMX13 11 13.5 (0.53”)

SMX90 31

Connection busbars – 45mm/1.77” spacing SMX90 32 - SMX90 33 - SMX90 34 - SMX90 35

Connection busbars – 54mm/2.13” spacing SMX90 42 - SMX90 43 - SMX90 44 - SMX90 45

45 (1.77”)

Safety cover SMX90 31

Enclosures SM1Z17 05P 70.5 (2.77”)

18 (0.71”)

115.5 (4.54”)

132.5 (5.22”)

87 (3.42”)

126 (4.96”)

135 (5.31”)

161.8 (6.37”)

Cutout

86 (3.38”)

101 (3.98”) 22 (0.87”)

Enclosures SM1Z17 15R and SM1Z17 10R 100 (3.94”)

175.8 (6.92”)

154 (6.06”)

100 (3.94”)

115 (4.53”)

159 (6.26”)

5 M2

42 (1.65”)

Enclosures SM1Z17 11P and SM1Z17 12P

54 (2.12”)

137.8 (5.42”) 23.3 (0.92”)

54 (2.12”)

115 (4.53”) 23.3 (0.92”)

Terminal block for busbar supply SMX90 30

54 (2.13”)

Enclosures SM1Z17 01P and SM1Z17 02P 80 (3.15”)

13.5 (0.53”)

SMX90 4...

29 (1.14”)

13.5 (0.53”)

SMX90 3...

29 (1.14”)

13.5 (0.53”)

SMX90 30 29 (1.14”)

29 (1.14”)

SMX90 30

1-13

Motor protection circuit breakers Dimensions [mm (in)] SM2... with side-mount auxiliary contacts SM2X11...

10 (0.39”)

17 (0.67”) SM2X14... 20 SM2X16... (0.79”)

SM2X12...

SM3... with side-mount auxiliary contacts 122.1 (4.81”) 102.6 (4.04”) 54.5 (2.14”)

SM2X11... SM2X12... 12.5 (0.49”)

22.5 (0.88”)

148.3 (5.84”) 138 (5.43”) 128.8 (5.07”) 77 (3.03”)

SM2X14... SM2X16...

SM2X11...

SM2X12... SM2X13 11

9 (0.35”)

30 (1.18”) 55 (2.16”) SM2X13 11

18 7.5 (0.71”) (0.29”)

112.3 (4.42”) 126.3 (4.97”) 130.3 (5.13”) 144.6 (5.69”)

45 (1.77”) 116 (4.57”) 150 (5.90”)

165 (6.50”) 155 (6.10”) 89 (3.50”)

125 (4.92”) 89 (3.50”)

45 (1.77”) 75.5 (2.97”) 130 (5.12”) 140 (5.51”)

SM2X12... SM2X13 11

9 (0.35”)

30 (1.18”) 70 (2.75”) SMX23 11

8 (0.31”)

18 (0.71”)

138 (5.43”) 152.7 (6.01”) 169 (6.65”)

SM2... and SM3... padlockable door coupling handle SM2X18 200R or SM2X18B 200R 34.3 (1.35”)

35 (1.38”) 1...4 (0.04...0.16”)

SM2X18 200R SM2X18B 200R

65 (2.56”)

min. 56 (2.20”) / max. 212 (8.35”) 65 (2.56”)

Wiring diagrams MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS SM1P...

SM1R... - SM2R... - SM3R...

For all motor protection circuit breakers

Three-phase LINE L2 L3 L1

T2 LOAD

ADD-ON BLOCKS Side mount For SM1… types Front mount auxiliary contacts auxiliary contacts SM1X11 20 SM1X11 11 SM1X12 11 SM1X12 20 13

CIRCUIT BREAKERS SM1PF...

SM1RM...

SM1X12 02 31

SM1X13 11 57

T2 LOAD

SM1X13 11M 65

T2 LOAD

Single-phase and DC LINE L2 L1

Side mount undervoltage trip releases SM1X14... SM1X15... D1

T2 LOAD

Side mount shunt trip release SM1X16...

U< U< 14

For SM2R… and SM3R types Front mount auxiliary contacts SM2X11 20 SM2X11 11 SM2X11 02 13

Side mount auxiliary contacts SM2X12 11 SM2X12 20 SM2X12 02 33

Side mount undervoltage trip release SM2X14...

SM2X13 11 57

Side mount shunt trip release SM2X16... C1

1-14

Motor protection circuit breakers Technical characteristics

TYPE

SM1P...

SM1R...

Rated insulation voltage Ui

690

Rated impulse withstand voltage

SM2R...

SM3R...

100

Rated frequency: 50/60Hz Maximum rated current

Number of adjustment ranges

No.

Total power dissipation

6…14

7.1...20

10...38

Magnetic tripping

13 x In

Mechanical life

cycles

100,000

50,000

Electrical life (Ie max AC3)

cycles

100,000

25,000

2.5...3

4.5

lbft

1.8...2.2

Tool

PH2

PZ2

Allen 4mm

Maximum terminal tightening torque

Conductor section minimum and maximum (1 or 2 wires)

AWG

No.

16…8

18...3

10...1/0

mm2

1…10

0.75...25

10...50

operating

°C

-20...+60

-20...+70

storage

°C

-50...+80

compensation

°C

-20...+50

-5...+40

Flexible without lug AMBIENT CONDITIONS Temperature

Maximum altitude

3000

Mounting position

Any

Fixing

On 35mm DIN rail or screw via accessory

On 35mm DIN rail or screw

E.g. PH = Phillips; PZ = Pozidriv; Allen is metric type.

SM1PF00 20 has a single 0.2A thermal adjustment and magnetic tripping at 6 x In (1.2A). When fitting more than one breaker side by side, without leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the breaker sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated motor current.

THERMAL TRIPPING CURVE (AVERAGE TIMES) Three-phase balanced operation

Two-phase operation (phase failure/single phasing)

Opening time [s]

10000 2h

30min

1000

10min

5min

2min 100

1min

COLD

HOT

HOT 1

0.1

0.01

0.001

1.05 1.5 2 1 1.2

4 5 6 7 8 910

30 40 50 6070

100 x Ie [A]

0.001 1

1.15 1.5 2

4 5 6 7 8 910

30 40 50 6070

100

x Ie [A]

Tripping times can have a ±20% deviation with respect to the average tripping curve value above.

1-15

Page 2-4 THREE-POLE CONTACTORS • IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C: 16 to 1600A • IEC Ie ratings in AC3 440V duty: 6 to 630A • IEC Power ratings in AC3 400V duty: 2.2 to 335kW • UL/CSA ratings: 3 to 500HP at 480V and 600V • AC, AC/DC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.

Page 2-12 FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS WITH 2NO+2NC MAIN POWER POLES • IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C: 20 to 115A • UL/CSA general use: 20 to 115A • AC, AC/DC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.

Page 2-8 FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS • IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C: 20 to 1600A • IEC Power ratings in AC1 400V duty: 14 to 950kW • UL/CSA general use: 16 to 1000A • AC, AC/DC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.

Page 2-13 FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS WITH 4 NC POLES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS • IEC Ith ratings in AC1 duty at 40°C: 25 to 40A • UL/CSA general use: 20 to 55A for 4NC types • Operational current up to 125A (DC1 at 55°C with 4 NO poles in series) for photovoltaic applications. • AC, AC/DC, DC and DC low-consumption coil.

Page 2-14

Page 2-15

CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION • With limiting resistors included • IEC Power ratings at 400V: 7.5 to 75kvar • UL/CSA ratings: 9 to 80kvar at 480V; 10 to 100kvar at 600V • AC coil.

CONTROL RELAYS • AC, DC and DC low-consumption coil • Screw or Faston termination • 4, 8 or 11 auxiliary contact composition.

LOVATO Electric contactors are suitable for new motors with high IE3 efficiency values

CONTACTORS

Three-pole versions up to 630A in IEC AC3 duty Four-pole versions up to 1600A in IEC AC1 duty Versions for power factor correction up to 75kvar at 400VAC Four-pole versions with 2NO+2NC or 4NC main poles Versions for photovoltaic application Versions with AC, AC/DC or DC control Low-consumption versions with DC control circuit for control relays and 9-38A contactors in IEC AC3 duty Extensive choice of add-on blocks and accessories Certified by primary international authorities.

Contactors Three-pole ......................................................................................................................................................................... Four-pole .......................................................................................................................................................................... Four-pole with 2NO and 2NC poles or 4NC poles ................................................................................................................ Four-pole with 4NO poles for photovoltaic applications ............................................................................................................ For power factor correction ............................................................................................................................................... Control relays ....................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 2 2 2 2 2 2

4 8 12 13 14 15

Add-on blocks and accessories For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................ For BF series contactors .................................................................................................................................................... For B series contactors ......................................................................................................................................................

2 - 16 2 - 18 2 - 26

Spare parts 28 29 30 31 31

2 - 32 2 - 44 2 - 48

P ROTECTION

AND

2 2 2 2 2

M OTOR C ONTROL

AC coils for BF series contactors ........................................................................................................................................ AC/DC and DC coils for BF series contactors ...................................................................................................................... AC/DC coils for B series contactors .................................................................................................................................... Main contacts for BF series contactors ............................................................................................................................... Main contacts and arc chutes for B series contactors .........................................................................................................

Contactors BG series mini-contactors

3 poles

• Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four contact points • AC and DC versions of same size • Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting • Distinct contact status indication • Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted • Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep • Positive (force) guided contacts (mechanically-linked per IEC)

Ith (AC1)

BG06

––

BG09

20A

BGF09

20A

BGP09

20A

BG12

12A

––

• Three-pole mini-contactors, 6 to 12A IEC AC3 duty / 3 to 7.5HP 480V - 3 to 10HP 600V UL/CSA • Four-pole mini-contactors, 20A IEC AC1 duty • Versions with 2NO+2NC main power poles • Highly conductive auxiliary contacts • Coils with AC or DC supply • Low-consumption DC versions • Screw, faston and rear PCB solder pin termination.

BF series contactors

• Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four contact points • Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting • Distinct contact status indication • Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted • Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep • Positive (force) guided contacts (mechanically-linked per IEC)

4 poles

Ie (AC3)

3 poles

• Three-pole contactors, 9 to 110A IEC AC3 duty / 5 to 75HP 480V - 7.5 to 100HP 600V UL/CSA • Four-pole contactors, 25 to 125A in AC1 duty • Power factor correction contactors, 7.5 to 75kvar at 400V IEC / 9 to 80kvar at 480V UL/CSA • Types with 2NO+2NC or 4NC main power poles • Types for photovoltaic applications • Highly conductive auxiliary contacts • Coils with AC or DC supply • Wide-range coils with electronic control for contactors from 40 to 80A AC3 • Low-consumption versions for control relays and 938A contactors in IEC AC3 duty.

Ie AC3

DC AC/DC

BF09

––

BF12

12A

––

BF18

18A

––

BF25

25A

––

BF26

26A

––

BF32

32A

––

BF38

38A

––

BF40

40A

––

BF50

50A

––

BF65

65A

––

BF80

80A

––

BF95

95A

––

BF110

110A

––

Ith AC1

4 poles DC

DC AC/DC

BF09

25A

––

BF12

28A

––

BF18

32A

––

BF26

45A

––

BF38

56A

––

BF40

70A

––

BF50

90A

––

BF65

100A

––

BF80

115A

––

Low-consumption version. Wide-range coil with electronic control. 80A for BF65 with AC/DC coil. 90A for BF80 with AC/DC coil.

B series contactors

• • • • • • • • • • •

3 frame sizes offering 11 different contactors Coil operates indifferently on AC or DC supply voltage Coil with low in-rush and holding Coil removable without disconnecting power wiring Red indicator when contactor is energised Unique right-angle magnet design - limits contact bounce Safety feature prevents contactor to be energised without arc chute in place and locked Convertible auxiliary contact block (2NO + 1NC or 1NO + 2NC), maximum of 4 blocks per contactor for a total of 12 contacts Contactor terminals with bolt, washer and nut Simple horizontal or vertical interlock Positive (force) guided contacts (mechanically-linked per IEC)

2-2

3 poles

• • • • •

Three-pole contactors, 110 to 630A IEC AC3 duty Four-pole contactors, 160 to 1600A IEC AC1 duty 100 to 500HP 600V UL/CSA Coils with AC/DC supply Screw termination.

4 poles

Ie (AC3)

Ith (AC1)

B115

110A

160A

B145

150A

250A

B180

185A

275A

B250

265A

350A

B310

320A

450A

B400

420A

550A

B500

520A

700A

B630

630A

800A

B630 1000

1000A

B1250

––

1250A

––

B1600

––

1600A

––

For AC1 / general use duty only.

Contactors Contactors BF00, BF09...BF80

THE

IDEAL SOLUTION!

45mm WIDE CONTACTORS Ratings up to 38A - 18.5kW IEC AC3 / 30HP UL - merely 45mm wide: exceptional benefit for electric panel dimensions. 55mm WIDE CONTACTORS Up to 80A in AC3 (45kW) with a width of just 55mm. COILS WITH WIDE OPERATING RANGE BF...D contactors are equipped with a wide operating range coil and are particularly useful in applications subject to considerable voltage variations, such as in electric traction railway equipment.

SIDE ADD-ON FOURTH POLE For the 45A to 115A AC1 ratings, a side-mount fourth power pole can be snapped on the three-pole contactor. This solution permits to optimise inventory.

MECHANICAL INTERLOCK Smaller-size contactors, 9 to 25A in AC3, can be mechanically and electrically interlocked with larger-size contactors, 26 to 38A AC3. The BFX50 01 and BFX53 01 mechanical interlock comprises two built-in NC auxiliary contacts to make the electrical interlock as well.

STARTER ASSEMBLY

The assembly and wiring of electromechanical starters is extremely fast and reliable. Versatile electrical and mechanical connecting systems provide easy and foolproof assembly of compact starters.

4-TERMINAL COIL Connecting cables can be coupled to the coil both on the line and load ends of the contactor. ELECTRONIC COIL A1 Contactors from 40 to 80A AC3 can be equipped with AC/DC electronic coil with wide operating range. Example: single 100 to 250V AC/DC coil.

BUILT-IN SURGE SUPPRESSOR BF series contactors up to 80A AC3 with voltages in DC or AC/DC already have a built-in surge suppressor. LOW-CONSUMPTION COILS The BF...L contactors feature a 2.4W low consumption. This characteristic widely allows their direct control by PLC outputs.

TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY Terminals are suitable for every type of cable: flexible, rigid, according to AWG standards and interlocked with any type of cable terminal. For BF09...BF38 contactors, a single type of screwdriver tightens the screws for the power contacts, auxiliary contacts and coil. SNAP-ON INSTALLATION

BREAKER-CONTACTOR CONNECTIONS The rigid connections between breaker and contactor allow complete compact starters to be created easily, quickly and with less space used in the panel. It is fitted on a single DIN rail.

IP20 CONNECTION SECURITY EFFORTLESS THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY LINK RF38 AND RF82 TYPES

35MM IN RAIL MOUNTING AND FIXING

Contactor mounting on and removal from a 35mm DIN rail are tool-less operations and are done by simply applying pressure on the contactor.

On the contactors, it’s quick and easy to fit and remove auxiliary contacts and accessories, without using tools; the same applies to replacing the coil in the AC BF09…BF38 contactors. During the connection of the thermal overload relay to the contactor, its auxiliary contact is simultaneously linked to the contactor coil terminal rigid connector. The complete overload relay fixing is obtained with one single operation and without other connections.

RUBBER PAD INSERT FOR NO DIN RAIL SLIDING

For BF09...BF38 contactors, the easy access and space for the terminals is combined with IP20 protection, preventing accidental contact with live parts.

DOUBLE LUG TERMINALS 40 to 80A AC3 contactors are equipped with double lug terminals for easy, functional access for power cables. It is extremely simple to create stardelta starters, reversing switches, changeovers and arrange parallel supply for several contactors.

A rubber insert prevents the contactors from sliding on the 35mm DIN rail even when out of tolerance or mounted vertically.

2-3

Contactors Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit

2 BG06 A...BG12 A

BF09 A...BF25 A

BF26 A...BF38 A

BF40 A...BF80 A

BF95...BF110

B115...B180

Three-phase motor control in AC3 duty Order code

B250...B400

UL/CSA details Maximum IEC power at 55°C (AC3)

AC coil

IEC operating current Ith (AC1) 40°C 55°C 70°C

Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings Ie (AC3) Single phase Three phase 440V at 55°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V

600V

[A]

[kW]

[HP]

11 BG06 01 A

1.5

2.2

2.4

2.5

––

1 3

11/2

2.2

4.3

4.5

––

1 2

11/2

2.2

4.3

4.5

––

1 2

11/2

2.2

4.3 4.5 5

––

1 2

11/2

––

3.2

5.7

6.2

5.5

––

1 2

11/2

71/2

2.2

4.2

4.5

4.8

5.5

7.5

––

71/2

3.2

5.7

6.2

7.5

––

71/2

7.5

––

12.5

13.4

––

71/2

BF26 00 A 12

7.3

15.6

18.5

––

71 / 2

71/2

BF32 00 A 12

8.8

––

71/2

BF38 00 A

56 (60 ) 45 (48 ) 40 (42 ) 38

18.5

––

71/2

BF40 00A

18.5

71/2

BF50 00A 12

BF65 00A 12

100

18.5

––

11 BG06 10 A 11 BG09 01 A 11 BG09 10 A 11 BGF09 01 A 11 BGF09 10 A 11 BGP09 01 A 11 BGP09 10 A 11 BG12 01 A 12 11 BG12 10 A 12 BF09 01 A 12

BF09 10 A 12 BF12 01 A 12 BF12 10 A 12 BF18 01 A 12 BF18 10 A 12 BF25 01 A BF25 10 A

BF80 00A

115

––

11 BF95 00

125

100

27.6

––

75 100

11 BF110 00

125

100

110

––

11 B115 00

160

150

110

100

––

100

11 B145 00

250

235

190

150

100

120

––

100

125 150

11 B180 00

275

250

200

185

100

108

115

123

144

103

––

150

11 B250 00

350

300

250

265

140

155

164

176

212

156

––

100

200

250

11 B310 00

450

370

300

320

100

170

188

200

213

256

180

––

100

125

250

300

11 B400 00

550

430

360

420

130

225

247

263

271

352

208

––

125 11

150 11

350 11

400 11

11 B500 00

700

550

500

520

156

290

306

328

367

416

312

––

150 11

200 11

400 11

450 11

11 B630 00

800

335

368

440

368

640

540

630

198

––

200

250

500

11 B630 1000 00 1000

850

700

––

For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8.

––

11 B1250 24

1250

1050

880

––

For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8.

No UL ––

––

11 B1600 24

1600

1360

1120

––

For AC1/Resistive duty only, see page 2-8.

No UL ––

––

Complete order code with coil voltage digit or with voltage digit followed by 60 (if 60Hz). Standard voltages are as follows: -- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V -- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: 11 BG06 10 A230 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil. 11 BG06 10 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG06 with one NO contact and 460VAC 60Hz coil. The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are: -- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) / 440-480V (indicate 440). Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with 110-125VAC/DC coil. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. Other voltages available on request. If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…SL.00 If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…L.00 .

2-4

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 28

Spare parts pages 2-29 to 31

Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC. Available voltages are: – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380 – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220. Example: 11 B145L 00 110 220 for contactor B145 without auxiliary contacts, with 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VAC. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted. Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 110 or 220-240VAC (50/60Hz) indicate 220. Example: 11 B1250 24 110 for contactor B1250, three poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and 110125VAC 50/60Hz coil. Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.

For voltages 024 / 230 / 400VAC 50-60Hz: 10 pieces/package. For all other voltages: 1 piece/package. Highly conductive auxiliary contact.

For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used. 11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only. 12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.

Dimensions pages 2-32 to 38

Wiring diagrams page 2-44

Technical characteristics page 2-48 to 69

Contactors Three-pole contactors with AC control circuit

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained:

B500-B630 B630 1000

UL/CSA General (purpose) use

UL/CSA Fuse class

Short circuit current RMS sym. 600VAC

[A]

Type/[A]

[kA] UL/CSA

K5/30

B1250-B1600

Type of terminal

Clamp-screw Clamp-screw

20 20

K5/30

Faston

28 32

RK5/60

RK5/70

RK5/80

RK5/100

BG12 A

BGF09 A

E A C

n°

[kg]

––

0.180

BF18 A

––

0.180

BF25 A

0.180

BF26 A

0.180

BF32 A

0.180

BF38 A

–– ––

1 –– 1

10 10 10

––

0.180

BF40 A

Rear PCB solder pin ––

0.197

BF50 A

––

0.197

BF65 A

0.180

BF80 A

0.180

BF95

Clamp-screw Clamp-screw Clamp-screw Clamp-screw Clamp-screw

––

1 ––

10 10

0.367

––

0.367

B115

––

0.367

B145

––

0.367

B180

0.367

B250

0.367

B310

––

1 ––

––

0.367

B400

––

0.367

B500

––

0.432

B630

RK5/125

Clamp-screw

––

0.432

B630 1000

0.432

B1250

1.000

B1600

RK5/150

Lug-clamp 13

–– ––

1 1

RK5/200

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.000

100

RK5/225

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.000

115

RK5/250

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.000

125

RK5/250

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.360

125

RK5/250

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.360

160

RK5/500

Screw-nut

––

5.290

250

RK5/500

Screw-nut

––

5.400

275

RK5/500

Screw-nut

––

5.400

350

L/800

Screw-nut

––

9.575

450

L/800

Screw-nut

––

9.575

550

L/800

18 11

Screw-nut

––

9.575

700

L/1200 11

18 11

Screw-nut

––

18.000

800

L/1500 11

18 11

Screw-nut

––

18.620

1000

L/1500

Screw-nut

––

21.400

No UL

––

Screw-nut

48.000

No UL

––

Screw-nut

50.000

Spare parts pages 2-29 to 31

Certified products.

CSA

- UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602) for BG… BF110 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada ( File E93602 – Component - Products having this type of marking are intended for use as components of complete workshop-assembled equipment). BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V, consult Customer Service for information – see contact details on inside front cover. UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115…B400 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors. UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500... B630 1000 and B500 SL... B630 SL types as Industrial Control Switches. - BF09…BF95 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for Canada only (File 54332). In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA certified as “Elevator Equipment” (File 54332, class 2411). See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page 2-65 for BF65.

14 This contactor has also achieved CSA elevator equipment certification.

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; UL 60947-1, UL 60947-4-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1. Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335; for all BF09…BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard product order code. Example: BF09 10 A230V260 for BF09, three poles, with one NO contact and 230V 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic materials.

IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 28

Clamp-screw Clamp-screw

––

5 5

L R O S

BF110

RK5/100 RK5/150

R I N A

BF12 A

45 55

C C C

BF09 A

1 32

BG09 A

C S A

BGP... A

1 25

Type BG06 A

U L

Incorporated Quantity Weight auxiliary per contacts pkg

1 20

c U L u s

Dimensions pages 2-32 to 38

Wiring diagrams page 2-44

Technical characteristics page 2-48 to 69

2-5

Contactors Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit

2 BF09 D...BF25 D BF09 L...BF25 L

BG06 D...BG12 D BG09 L

BF26 D-BF38 D BF26 L-BF38 L

BF40 E...BF80 E

BF95 C...BF110 C

B115...B180

UL/CSA details

Three-phase motor control Order code DC coil

DC coil

IEC operating current Ith (AC1)

B250...B400

Maximum IEC power at 55°C (AC3)

Maximum UL/CSA horsepower ratings Single phase Three phase

55°C

70°C

Ie (AC3) 440V at 55°C 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V

[A]

[kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]

[HP]

1.5

2.2

2.4

2.5

––

1 3

11/2

Low consumption 40°C 11 BG06 01 D

––

11 BG06 10 D

––

11 BG09 01 D

11 BG09 01 L

2.2

4.3

4.5

––

1 2

11/2

11 BG09 10 D

11 BG09 10 L

11 BGF09 01 D

11 BGF09 01 L 20

2.2

4.3

4.5

––

11/2

11 BGF09 10 D

11 BGF09 10 L

11 BGP09 01 D

––

2.2

4.3 4.5 5

––

1 2

11/2

––

11 BGP09 10 D

–– 20

3.2

5.7

6.2

5.5

––

11/2

71/2

2.2

4.2

4.5

4.8

5.5

7.5

––

3 4

71/2

3.2

5.7

6.2

7.5

––

71/2

7.5

––

12.5 13.4 13.4 15

––

71/2

11 BG12 01 D 12

––

11 BG12 10 D 12

––

BF09 01 D 12

BF09 01 L 12

BF09 10 D 12

BF09 10 L 12

BF12 01 D 12

BF12 01 L 12

BF12 10 D 12

BF12 10 L 12

BF18 01 D 12

BF18 01 L 12

BF18 10 D 12

BF18 10 L 12

BF25 01 D

BF25 01 L

BF25 10 D

BF25 10 L

BF26 00 D 12

BF26 00 L 12

7.3

15.6 18.5 ––

71/2

BF32 00 D 12

BF32 00 L 12

8.8

––

71/2

BF38 00 D

BF38 00 L

56 (60 ) 45 (48 ) 40 (42 ) 38

18.5 18.5 18.5 20

––

71/2

BF40 00 E

––

18.5 22

71/2

BF50 00 E 12

––

71/2

BF65 00 E 12

––

18.5 30

––

60 75

BF80 00 E

––

11 BF95 C 00

––

125

100

27.6 50

––

11 BF110 C 00

––

125

100

110

––

100

11 B115 00

––

160

150

110

100

––

100

11 B145 00

––

250

235

190

150

100

120

––

100

125

11 B180 00

––

275

250

200

185

100

108

115

123

144

103

––

150

11 B250 00

––

350

300

250

265

140

155

164

176

212

156

––

100

200

250

125

250

300

11 B310 00

––

450

370

300

320

100

170

188

200

213

256

180

––

100

11 B400 00

––

550

430

360

420

130

225

247

263

271

352

208

––

125 11 150 11 350 11 400 11

11 B500 00

––

700

550

500

520

156

290

306

328

367

416

312

––

150 11 200 11 400 11 450 11

11 B630 00

––

800

640

540

630

198

335

368

440

368

––

200

250

500

1000

850

700

––

For AC1/Resisteve duty only, see page 2-8.

––

11 B630 1000 00 ––

Complete order code with coil voltage digit. For BG09…D 24VDC version complete with built-in surge suppressor, add suffix V120 to the standard order code. The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Standard voltages are as follows: – DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220V. Example: 11 BG06 10 D012 for mini-contactor BG06, three poles, with one NO contact and 12VDC coil. 11 BG09 10 D024 V120 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NO contact and 24VDC coil, complete with built-in TVS (diode) suppressor. Low-consumption version. No add-on auxiliary contacts or mechanical interlock can be mounted on BG... type contactors. Complete order code with coil voltage digit. The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Standard voltages are as follows: – DC 024 / 048V. Example: 11 BG09 01 L024 for mini-contactor BG09, three poles, with one NC contact and 24VDC low-consumption coil. The contactor coil is controlled electronically; it can have either an AC or a DC supply and has a wide operating range. The order code must be completed with the coil voltage digit. The standard voltages are as follows: – AC/DC 024 = 20...48V; 110 = 60...110V; 230 = 100...250V.

2-6

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 28

Spare parts pages 2-29 to 31

The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are: – AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) / 440-480V (indicate 440). Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts and with 110-125VAC/DC coil. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. Other voltages available on request. If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…SL.00 . If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…L.00 . Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC. Standard voltages are: – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380 – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220. Example: 11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, three poles, without auxiliary contacts, with 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted. Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V, consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover. Highly conductive auxiliary contact.

Dimensions pages 2-32 to 38

Wiring diagrams page 2-44

Technical characteristics pages 2-48 to 69

Contactors Three-pole contactors with DC control circuit

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained:

B500-B630 B630 1000

UL/CSA General (purpose) use

UL/CSA Fuse class

Short circuit current RMS sym. 600VAC

[A]

Type/[A]

[kA] UL/CSA

K5/30

Type of terminal

Clamp-screw Clamp-screw

Incorporated Quantity Weight auxiliary per contacts pkg

Type

c U L u s

U L

C S A

E A C

C C C

BG06 D

BG09 D

BG12 D

BGF09 D

BGP09 D

BF09 D - BF09 L

BF12 D - BF12 L

n°

[kg]

BF18 D - BF18 L

––

0.214

BF25 D - BF25 L

––

0.214

BF26 D - BF26 L

––

0.214

BF32 D - BF32 L

––

0.214

BF38 D - BF38 L

––

0.210

BF40 E

K5/30

Faston

––

0.210

BF50 E

K5/30

Rear PCB solder pin ––

0.240

BF65 E

––

0.240

BF80 E

––

0.214

BF95 C

––

0.214

BF110 C

K5/30

RK5/60

RK5/70

RK5/80

RK5/100

Clamp-screw Clamp-screw Clamp-screw Clamp-screw Clamp-screw

0.494

B115

––

0.494

B145

––

0.494

B180

––

0.494

B250

––

0.494

B310

––

0.494

B400

––

0.494

B500

––

0.494

B630

Clamp-screw

––

0.559

B630 1000

RK5/125

Clamp-screw

––

0.559

Certified products.

RK5/150

Clamp-screw

––

0.559

RK5/150

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.050

RK5/200

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.050

RK5/225

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.050

RK5/250

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.050

125

RK5/250

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.895

125

RK5/250

Lug-clamp 13

––

1.895

160

RK5/500

Screw-nut

––

5.290

250

RK5/500

Screw-nut

––

5.400

275

RK5/500

Screw-nut

––

5.400

350

L/800

Screw-nut

––

9.635

450

L/800

Screw-nut

––

9.635

500 13

L/800

18 11

Screw-nut

––

9.635

700 13

L/1200 11

18 11

Screw-nut

––

18.060

800

L/1500 11

18 11

Screw-nut

––

18.620

L/1500

Screw-nut

––

21.400

For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.

11 No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only. 12 Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact

details on inside front cover. 13 IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 28

Spare parts pages 2-29 to 31

––

RK5/100

1000

R I N A

Dimensions pages 2-32 to 38

Wiring diagrams page 2-44

CSA

- UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada ( File E93602 – Component). Products having this type of marking are intended for use as components of complete workshop-assembled equipment. BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V, consult Customer Service for information – see contact details on inside front cover. UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115…B400 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors. UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500... B630 1000 and B500 SL... B630 SL types as Industrial Control Switches. - BF09…BF95 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for Canada only (File 54332). In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA certified as “Elevator Equipment” (File 54332, class 2411). See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page 2-65 for BF65.

14 This contactor has also achieved CSA elevator equipment certification.

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; UL 60947-1, UL 60947-4-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1. Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335; for all BF09…BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard product order code. Example: BF09 10 D024 V260 for BF09, three poles, with one NO contact and 24VDC coil with compliant plastic materials.

Technical characteristics page 2-48 to 69

2-7

Contactors Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit

2 BG09 T4 A

BF09A T4 A...BF18 T4 A

BF26 T4 A...BF38 T4 A

B115 4...B180 4

BF40 T4 A...BF80 T4 A

B250 4...B400 4

Resistive load control Order code

UL/CSA details Maximum IEC power at 40°C (AC1)

IEC operating current Ith (AC1) 40°C 55°C

70°C

230V

400V

415V

440V

500V

690V

[A]

[kW]

[A]

11 BG09 T4 A

––

11 BGF09 T4 A

––

11 BGP09 T4 A

––

BF09 T4 A

9.5

––

BF12 T4 A

––

AC coil

1000V

UL/CSA General (purpose) use

BF18 T4 A

––

BF26 T4 A

––

BF38 T4 A

56 (60 )

45 (48 )

40 (42 )

––

BF40 T4 A

115

BF50 T4 A

102

148

BF65 T4 A

100

114

165

100

BF80 T4 A

115

120

185

115

11 B115 4 00

160

150

110

107

115

129

173

250

160

11 B145 4 00

250

235

190

150

162

180

196

270

390

250

11 B180 4 00

275

250

200

160

177

200

213

298

430

275

11 B250 4 00

350

300

250

124

214

234

255

282

380

560

350

11 B310 4 00

450

370

300

158

270

293

325

350

488

700

450

11 B400 4 00

550

430

360

200

345

377

400

452

598

870

550

11 B500 4 00

700

550

500

252

438

478

500

575

755

1100

700

11 B630 4 00

800

640

540

288

500

545

580

655

860

1250

800

11 B630 1000 4 00

1000

850

700

350

600

630

725

750

1000

1600

1000

11 B1250 4 24

1250

1050

880

480

830

900

905

1100

1450

2000

No UL/CSA

11 B1600 4 24

1600

1360

1120

550

950

1000

1160

1200

1650

2500

No UL/CSA

Complete order code with coil voltage digit or voltage digit followed by 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are as follows: -- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V -- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: 11 BG09 T4 A230 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 230VAC 50/60Hz coil. 11 BG09 T4 A460 60 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 460VAC 60Hz coil. The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are: -- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 (indicate 110) / 220-240 (indicate 220) / 380-415 (indicate 380) / 440-480V (indicate 440). Example: 11 B145 4 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with 110-125VAC/DC coil. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. Other voltages available on request. If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4SL 00 . If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4L.00 . Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC. Standard voltages are: -- AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380 -- DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220. Example: 11 B145 4L 00 110 C220 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 220-240VDC.

2-8

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 28

Spare parts pages 2-29 to 31

G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted. Complete the order code with the digit of the coil voltage. For 110-125VAC 50/60 Hz indicate 110 or 220-240VAC 50/60 Hz indicate 220. Example: 11 B1250 4 24 110 for contactor B1250, four poles, with 2NO+4NC auxiliary contacts and 110-125VAC/DC 50/60Hz coil. Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover. Whenever the BF26 T4 or BF38 T4 types need to be mechanically interlocked with either the BFX50 00 or BFX50 01, the add-on fourth pole of one of the contactors needs to be removed from the right side and fitted on the left side. For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used. Definite-purpose (DP) contactors are available. Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.

Dimensions pages 2-32 to 38

Wiring diagrams page 2-45

Technical characteristics pages 2-48 to 69

Contactors Four-pole contactors with AC control circuit

IEC utilisation current with poles in parallel If the poles of the contactors are arranged in parallel, the operating current is the one indicated in the table multiplied by the K factor given below, which account for the unequal distribution of the current in the various poles. To limit distribution inequality, it is advisable to use paralleling links (see pages 2-16, 2-21 and 2-26). 2 POLES in parallel: K = 1.6 3 POLES in parallel: K = 2.2 4 POLES in parallel: K = 2.8

B500 4-B630 4 B630 1000 4

UL/CSA Fuse class

Short circuit current RMS sym. 600VAC

Type / [A]

[kA] UL/CSA

K5 / 30

B1250-B1600 4

Type of terminal

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: c U L u U Type s L

Incorporated auxiliary contacts

Quantity Weight per pkg

n°

[kg]

Clamp-screw

none

0.180

Faston

none

0.180

BG09 T4 A

Rear PCB solder pin

none

0.197

BGF09 T4 A

RK5 / 60

Clamp-screw

none

0.367

BGP09 T4 A

RK5 / 70

Clamp-screw

none

0.367

BF09 T4 A

C S A

E A C

C C C

R I N A

RK5 / 80

Clamp-screw

none

0.367

BF12 T4 A

RK5 / 100

Clamp-screw

none

0.508

BF18 T4 A

RK5 / 150

Clamp-screw

none

0.508

BF26 T4 A

RK5 / 150

Lug-clamp 11

––

1.100

BF38 T4 A

RK5 / 200

Lug-clamp 11

––

1.100

BF40 T4 A

RK5 / 225

Lug-clamp 11

––

1.100

BF50 T4 A

RK5 / 250

Lug-clamp

––

1.100

BF65 T4 A

RK5 / 500

Screw-nut

none

6.220

BF80 T4 A

RK5 / 500

Screw-nut

none

6.340

B115 4

RK5 / 500

Screw-nut

none

6.340

B145 4

L/800

Screw-nut

none

11.195

B180 4

L/800

Screw-nut

none

11.195

B250 4

18 12

Screw-nut

none

11.195

B310 4

L/1200 12

18 12

Screw-nut

none

20.910

B400 4

L/1500 12

18 12

Screw-nut

none

21.880

B500 4

L/1500

Screw-nut

none

25.620

B630 4

––

Screw-nut

57.500

B630 1000 4

––

Screw-nut

58.400

B1250 4

B1600 4

L/800

11 12

IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal. No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only.

Certified products. UL

CSA

- UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada ( File E93602 – Component). Products having this type of marking are intended for use as components of complete workshop-assembled equipment. BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V, consult Customer Service for information – see contact details on inside front cover. UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115…B400 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors. UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172189) for B500 4... B630 1000 4 and B500 4SL... B630 4SL types as Industrial Control Switches. - BF09…BF80 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for Canada only (File 54332). In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA certified as “Elevator Equipment” (File 54332, class 2411). See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page 2-65 for BF65.

13 This contactor has also achieved CSA elevator equipment certification.

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; UL 60947-1, UL 60947-4-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1. Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335; for all BF09…BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard product order code. Example: BF09 T4 A230 V260 for BF09, four poles, 230V 50/60Hz coil with compliant plastic materials.

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 28

Spare parts pages 2-29 to 31

Dimensions pages 2-32 to 38

Wiring diagrams page 2-45

Technical characteristics pages 2-48 to 69

2-9

Contactors Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit

2 BG09 T4 D

B115 4...B180 4

BF09 T4 D-BF18 T4 D BF09 T4 L-BF18 T4 L

BF26 T4 D-BF38 T4 D BF26 T4 L-BF38 T4 L

BF65 T4 E BF80 T4 E

B250 4...B400 4

DC coil Low consumption

IEC operating current Ith (AC1) 40°C 55°C

70°C

230V

400V

415V

440V

500V

690V

1000V

UL/CSA General (purpose) use

[A]

[kW]

[A]

UL/CSA details

Resistive load control Order code DC coil

Maximum IEC power at 40°C (AC1)

11 BG09 T4 D

––

11 BGF09 T4 D

––

11 BGP09 T4 D

––

BF09 T4 D

BF09 T4 L

9.5

––

BF18 T4 D

BF18 T4 L

––

BF26 T4 D

BF26 T4 L

––

BF38 T4 D

BF38 T4 L

56 (60 )

45 (48 )

40 (42 )

––

BF65 T4 E

––

112

––

BF80 T4 E

––

120

––

11 B115 4 00

––

160

150

110

107

115

129

173

250

160

11 B145 4 00

––

250

235

190

150

162

180

196

270

390

250

11 B180 4 00

––

275

250

200

160

177

200

213

298

430

275

11 B250 4 00

––

350

300

250

124

214

234

255

282

380

560

350

11 B310 4 00

––

450

370

300

158

270

293

325

350

488

700

450

11 B400 4 00

––

550

430

360

200

345

377

400

452

598

870

550

11 B500 4 00

––

700

550

500

252

438

478

500

575

755

1100

700

11 B630 4 00

––

800

640

540

288

500

545

580

655

860

1250

800

11 B630 1000 4 00

––

1000

850

700

350

600

630

725

750

1000

1600

1000

Complete order code with coil voltage digit. The BF09-BF38D types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Standard voltages are as follows: – DC 012 / 024 / 048 / 060 / 110 / 125 / 220VDC. Example: 11 BG09 T4 D012 for mini-contactor BG09, four poles, with 12VDC coil. Low consumption version. Complete the order code with coil voltage digit. The BF09-BF38L types already have a standard supplied built-in TVS (Transient Voltage Suppressor). Standard voltages are as follows: – DC 024 / 048V Example: BF09 T4 L024 for contactor BF09, four poles, with 24VDC low-consumption coil. The contactor coil is controlled electronically; it can have either an AC or a DC supply and has a wide operating range. Complete the order code only with the digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are: – AC/DC 024 = 20...48V; 110 = 60...110V; 230 = 100...250V. The coil of the contactor can be powered indifferently in AC or DC. Complete the order code only with the digit of the coil voltage. Standard voltages are: -- AC/DC 24 / 48 / 60 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415 indicate 380 / 440-480V indicate 440. Example: 11 B145 00 110 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts and with 110-125VAC/DC coil. The 24VAC/DC voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. The 24V voltage is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. Other voltages available on request.

2-10

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 28

Spare parts pages 2-29 to 31

If predisposed for mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4SL 00 . If already fitted with mechanical latch (G495), the order code becomes 11 B…4L.00 . Indicate rated voltage of the mechanical latch, preceded by the letter C if in DC. Standard voltages are: – AC 50/60Hz 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240 indicate 220 / 380-415V indicate 380 – DC 48 / 110-125 indicate 110 / 220-240V indicate 220. Example: 11 B145L 00 110 C48 for contactor B145, four poles, without auxiliary contacts, with 110-125VAC/DC coil and mechanical latch powered at 48VDC. G495 mechanical latch cannot be mounted. Maximum voltage is limited at 300V for UL. For certified type up to 600V consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover. For use at this other current value, a 16mm2 cable, headed with a fork terminal, must be used.

Dimensions pages 2-32 to 38

Wiring diagrams page 2-45

Technical characteristics pages 2-48 to 69

Contactors Four-pole contactors with DC control circuit

B500 4-B630 4 B630 1000 4

UL/CSA Fuse class

Short circuit RMS sym. 600VAC

Type / [A]

[kA] UL/CSA

K5 / 30

Type of terminal

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: c U L u U Type s L

Incorporated auxiliary contacts

Quantity Weight per pkg

n°

[kg]

Clamp-screw

––

0.220

Faston

––

0.220

BG09 T4 D

Rear PCB solder pin

––

0.242

BGF09 T4 D

RK5 / 60

Clamp-screw

––

0.498

BGP09 T4 D

RK5 / 80

Clamp-screw

––

0.498

BF09 T4 D - BF09 T4 L

C S A

E A C

C C C

R I N A

RK5 / 100

Clamp-screw

––

0.665

BF18 T4 D - BF18 T4 L

RK5 / 150

Clamp-screw

––

0.665

BF26 T4 D - BF26 T4 L

RK5 / 225

Lug-clamp 11

––

1.150

BF38 T4 D - BF38 T4 L

RK5 / 250

Lug-clamp 11

––

1.150

BF65 T4 E

RK5 / 500

Screw-nut

––

6.220

BF80 T4 E

RK5 / 500

Screw-nut

––

6.340

B115 4

RK5 / 500

Screw-nut

––

6.340

B145 4

L/800

Screw-nut

––

11.195

B180 4

L/800

Screw-nut

––

11.195

B250 4

L/800

Screw-nut

––

11.195

B310 4

L/1200

Screw-nut

––

20.910

B400 4

L/1200

Screw-nut

––

21.880

B500 4

L/1500

25.600

B630 4

B630 1000 4

Screw-nut

––

No UL/CSA ratings; data given for indication and reference purposes only. IEC/EN 60947-1 designation: Pillar terminal.

Certified products. UL

CSA

- UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93602) for BG…BF110 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors, except for BGP09… types which are UL Recognized, for USA and Canada ( File E93602 – Component). Products having this type of marking are intended for use as components of complete workshop-assembled equipment. BGP is UL rated up to 300V; for type with rating up to 600V, consult Customer Service for information – see contact details on inside front cover. UL Listed for USA only (File E93602) for B115…B400 types indicated, as Motor Controllers – Contactors. UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E172185) for B500 4... B630 1000 4 and B500 4SL... B630 4SL types as Industrial Control Switches. - BF09…BF95 and B115…B400 contactors are also CSA certified, for Canada only (File 54332). In addition, BF12…, BF25…, BF38… and BF65… types are CSA certified as “Elevator Equipment” (File 54332, class 2411). See technical characteristics on page 2-63 for BF12-BF38 and page 2-65 for BF65.

12 This contactor has also achieved CSA elevator equipment certification.

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14; UL 60947-1, UL 60947-4-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-1, CSA C22.2 n° 60947-4-1. Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335; for all BF09…BF38 versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard product order code. Example: BF09 T4 D024 V260 for BF09, four poles, 24VDC coil with compliant plastic materials.

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 28

Spare parts pages 2-29 to 31

Dimensions pages 2-32 to 38

Wiring diagrams page 2-45

Technical characteristics pages 2-48 to 69

2-11

Contactors Contactors for power factor correction with AC control circuit BFK contactors (including limiting resistors)

Order code

Maximum IEC operational power at 50°C (AC-6b) 240V 400V 440V 690V 480V

Qty Wt per pkg

Operational characteristics IEC rated operational Type current 440V

IEC - UL/CSA protection fuse gG-SC

[A]

BFK09

BFK12

0.413

BFK18

0.472

BFK26

–

0.472

BFK32

–

0.472

BFK38

–

1.080

BFK50

–

1.080

BFK65

100

–

1.080

BFK80

125

–

1.470

BF80K

125

11 BF110K 00 45

100

–

1.470

BF110K

110

160

[kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] NO n°

[kg]

BFK09 10A

4,5

7,5

0.413

BFK12 10A

12,5 14

0.413

BFK18 10A

BFK26 00A

–

BFK32 00A

27,5 30

BFK38 00A

BFK50 00A

BFK65 00A

BFK80 00A

11 BF80K 00

AC COIL.

BFK...

To use the contactor in the delta, consult our Customer Service office, see contact details on front cover. NO auxiliary contacts available. The order code must be completed either with the coil voltage digit if 50/60Hz or with the coil voltage digit followed by the number 60 if 60Hz. Standard voltages are: -- AC 50-60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400VAC -- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: BFK09 10 A230 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact and 230VAC 50/60Hz coil. BFK09 10 A460 60 for contactor BFK09 with one NO contact and 460VAC 60Hz coil. Note: the maximum thermal current Ith of the BF110K contactor is 125A.

Ambient operating temperature: 50°C. For ambient temperatures higher than 50°C and up to 70°C, the maximum operating power values indicated in the table must be reduced by a percentage equal to the difference between the operating ambient temperature and 50°C. E.g.: Using a BFK26 00 contactor at the ambient temperature of 60°C, the maximum operating power (at 400V) of the contactor will be equal to 20kvar – 10% = 18kvar. Operating cycle: 120 cycles/h Electrical life: 400,000 cycles. Add-on auxiliary contacts The following contact blocks, can be fitted on the BFK contactors: BFX12..., G418..., G481..., G482... and G218. Certifications and compliance Certification obtained: CCC, EAC; UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602), as Motor Controllers Magnetic Capacitive Switches. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. Plastic materials are compliant with standards IEC/EN 60335; for BFK versions only, add suffix V260 to the standard product order code.

Kit to assemble BFK contactors

Order code

For contactor

Qty Wt per pkg n°

[kg]

11 G460

BF09 10A - BF12 10A BF18 10A - BF26 00A BF32 00A - BF38 00A

0.072

BFX10K3

BF50 00A - BF65 00A BF80 00A

0.078

11 G464

BF80 00 - BF110 00

0.080

General characteristics To optimise contactor stock management, a kit is available to transform normal three-pole contactors into BFK types for power factor correction. The table to the left indicates which kits to purchase depending on the standard contactor in stock.

11 G46...

2-14

Add-on blocks / Accessories page 2-16 to 25

Spare parts pages 2-28 to 31

Dimensions pages 2-39

Wiring diagrams page 2-44

Technical characteristics page 2-56 and 57

Page 3-4

Page 3-2

Page 3-8

FOR BG SERIES MINI-CONTACTORS

FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS

FOR B SERIES CONTACTORS

• Type RF9, phase failure sensitive, manual resetting • Type RFA9, phase failure sensitive, automatic resetting • Type RFN9, non phase failure sensitive, manual resetting • Type RFNA9, non phase failure sensitive, automatic resetting.

• Type RF38, phase failure sensitive, manual or automatic resetting • Type RFN38, non phase failure sensitive, manual or automatic resetting • Type RF82 and RF95, phase failure sensitive, manual resetting • Type RFA82 and RFA95, phase failure sensitive, automatic resetting • Type RFN82 and RFN95, non phase failure sensitive, manual resetting • Type RFNA82 and RFNA95, non phase failure sensitive, automatic resetting.

• Type RF200 and RF420, phase failure sensitive, manual or automatic resetting • Type RFN200 and RFN420, non phase failure sensitive, manual or automatic resetting.

Page 3-11 THERMISTOR PROTECTION RELAY

• 24VDC and 24 to 240VAC supply types.

RF38 features

FRONT PROTECTION COVER OF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS A sealable protection cover is available. When fitted on to the relay front, it precludes all possible adjuster tampering and involuntary activation of the “Reset” and “Stop” buttons of the thermal overload relay.

FIXING EASE OF THE THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY While the thermal overload relay is being linked to the contactor, its auxiliary contact fits on and connects to the coil terminal by rigid terminal. Complete relay fixing is done in a single operation, with no need of other connections.

CLEAR IDENTIFICATION OF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESETTING The RF38 thermal overload relay is supplied configured for manual resetting. Breaking the plate below the “Reset” button allows for the automatic resetting configuration.

SEALABLE RELAY COVER A handy closing flap feature excludes any tampering of the thermal overload relay adjuster.

MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS

Thermal overload relays for currents between 0.09 and 420A Phase failure sensitive and non phase failure sensitive versions Automatic and/or manual resetting Independent or direct mounting on contactor Thermistor protection relay.

SEC. - PAGE

Thermal overload relays For BG series mini-contactors ............................................................................................................................................ For BF series contactors .................................................................................................................................................... For B series contactors ...................................................................................................................................................... Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................................

3 3 3 3

2 4 8 10

Electronic relay Thermistor protection relay ...............................................................................................................................................

3 - 11

3 - 12 3 - 13 3 - 14

Manual/hand reset

Automatic reset

Manual/hand reset

Automatic reset

RF9

RFA9

RFN9

RFNA9

3-2 and 3-3

RFNA82

3-5 and 3-7

RFNA95

3-4...3-7

RF38

BF09...BF38 BF40...BF80

RF82

BF95...BF110

RF95

RFN38 RFA82

RFN82

RFA95

RFN95

B115...B180

RF200

RFN200

B250...B400

RF400

RFN400

For BF80 contactors ...A... and ...E... type.

Pages

3-4...3-6

3-8 and 3-9

AND

Non phase failure / non single phase sensitive

M OTOR C ONTROL

BG06...BG12

Phase failure/single phase sensitive

P ROTECTION

TYPE OF THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY Type of contactor

Motor protection relays Thermal overload relays for BF series contactors Phase failure / single phase sensitive Three poles (three phase)

Order code

Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt range IEC UL per aM gG pkg

Three-phase IEC motor powers 230V

400V

415V

440V

500V

690V

[A]

[kW]

[A]

n°

[kg]

MANUAL RESETTING. Direct mounting on BF40...BF80 contactors (BF80 ...A... and ...E... type). Complete with G261 links. Independent mounting with G270 base.

RF82

RF82 3300

20...33

110 1

0.365

7.5

11-15

RF82 4200

28...42

150 1

0.365

9-10

15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25

30-33

RF82 5000

35...50

100 175 1

0.365

10-11

RF82 6500

46...65

125 200 1

0.365

RF82 8200

60...82

100 200 250 1

0.365

11-15

15-18.5 15-18.5 22-25

37-40

15-18.5 25-30

30-33

33-40

45-55

33-40

37-45

45-55

59-75

MANUAL RESETTING. Direct mounting on BF95...BF110 contactors. Complete with G261 links. Independent mounting with G270 base.

11 RF95 3...

11 RF95 3 82

60...82

100 200 250 1

0.365

33-40

37-45

45-55

11 RF95 3 95

70...95

100 200 350 1

0.365

22-25

40-45

45-51

45-55

55-63

75-80

11 RF95 3 110

90...110

125 200 350 1

0.365

11-15

15-18.5 15-18.5 22-25

AUTOMATIC RESETTING. Direct mounting on BF40...BF80 contactors (BF80 ...A... and ...E... type). Complete with G261 links. Independent mounting with G270 base. RFA82 3300

20...33

110 1

0.365

7.5

11-15

RFA82 4200

28...42

150 1

0.365

9-10

15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25

30-33

RFA82 5000

35...50

100 175 1

0.365

10-11

37-40

RFA82 6500

46...65

125 200 1

0.365

15-18.5 25-30

30-33

33-40

45-55

RFA82 8200

60...82

100 200 250 1

0.365

33-40

37-45

45-55

59-75

AUTOMATIC RESETTING. Direct mounting on BF95...BF110 contactors. Complete with G261 links. Independent mounting with G270 base. RFA82

11 RFA95 3 82

60...82

100 200 250 1

0.365

33-40

37-45

45-55

59-75

11 RFA95 3 95

70...95

100 200 350 1

0.365

22-25

40-45

45-51

45-55

55-63

75-80

11 RFA95 3 110

90...110

125 200 350 1

0.365

30 55 55 55 75 90 The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always

UL RK5 fuse class for RF38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types.

NOTE: Two pole (single phase) versions are available on request. Add the letter “S” in the order code e.g. RF828200 is three pole; RFS828200 two pole. The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line starting is considered.

11 RFA95 3...

check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment range.

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained:

Tipo

c U L u s

C S A

E A C

C C C

RF82

––

RFNA82

––

RF95

RFA95

––

Certified products. cULus – UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices – Thermal Overload Relays, 600VAC, open type, ambient compensated, 5000 Amps RMS symmetrical short circuit rating up to 82A FLA range and 10000 Amps RMS for 95A and 110A FLA range; the trip current is 120% FLA. CSA – CSA certified for Canada only (File 54332) as Auxiliary Devices for use with magnetic contactors. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. FIXING EASE OF THE THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY While the thermal overload relay is being linked to the contactor, its auxiliary contact fits on and connects to the coil terminal by rigid terminal. Complete relay fixing is done in a single operation, with no need of other connections. Accessories page 3-10

Dimensions page 2-32, 2-33 and 3-12

Wiring diagrams page 3-13

Technical characteristics pages 3-14 and 15

3-5

Motor protection relays Thermal overload relays for BF series contactors Non phase failure / non single phase sensitive Three poles (three phase)

Order code

Adjustment Protection fuses Qty Wt range IEC UL per aM gG pkg

Three-phase IEC motor powers 230V

400V

415V

440V

550V

690V

[A]

[kW]

[A]

n°

[kg]

MANUAL RESETTING. Direct mounting on BF40...BF80 contactors (BF80 ...A... and ...E... type). Complete with G261 links. Independent mounting with G270 base.

RFN82

RFN82 4200

28...42

150 1

0.365

9-10

15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25

30-33

RFN82 5000

35...50

100 175 1

0.365

10-11

RFN82 6500

46...65

125 200 1

0.365

RFN82 8200

60...82

100 200 250 1

0.365

37-40

15-18.5 25-30

30-33

33-40

45-55

33-40

37-45

45-55

59-75

MANUAL RESETTING. Direct mounting on BF95...BF110 contactors. Complete with G261 links. Independent mounting with G270 base. 11 RFN95 3 82

60...82

100 200 250 1

0.365

33-40

37-45

45-55

11 RFN95 3 95

70...95

100 200 350 1

0.365

22-25

40-45

45-51

45-55

55-63

75-80

11 RFN95 3 110

90...110

125 200 350 1

0.365

AUTOMATIC RESETTING. Direct mounting on BF40...BF80 contactors (BF80 ...A... and ...E... type). Complete with G261 links. Independent mounting with G270 base. 11 RFN95 3...

RFNA82 4200

28...42

150 1

0.365

9-10

15-18.5 18.5-22 18.5-22 22-25

30-33

RFNA82 5000

35...50

100 175 1

0.365

10-11

37-40

RFNA82 6500

46...65

125 200 1

0.365

RFNA82 8200

60...82

100 200 250 1

15-18.5 25-30

30-33

33-40

45-55

0.365

33-40

37-45

45-55

59-75

AUTOMATIC RESETTING. Direct mounting on BF95...BF110 contactors. Complete with G261 links. Independent mounting with G270 base.

RFNA82

11 RFNA95 3 82

60...82

100 200 250 1

0.365

33-40

37-45

45-55

59-75

11 RFNA95 3 95

70...95

100 200 350 1

0.365

22-25

40-45

45-51

45-55

55-63

75-80

11 RFNA95 3 110

90...110

125 200 350 1

0.365

30 55 55 55 75 90 The indicated powers apply to 4-pole motors; it is advisable to always

UL RK5 fuse class for RFN38 types and UL K5 fuse class for RF…95 types.

NOTE: The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current when direct, across the line starting is considered.

11 RFNA95 3...

check that the nameplate motor current is within the relay adjustment range.

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained:

Type

c U L u s

C S A

E A C

C C C

RFN82

––

RFNA82

––

RFN95

RFNA95

Accessories page 3-10

Dimensions page 2-32, 2-33 and 3-13

Wiring diagrams page 3-13

Technical characteristics page 3-14 and 15

3-7

Page 4-2 DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTERS • Motor ratings up to 95A 440V in IEC AC3 duty • General use up to 65A / motor rating up to 52A 600V per UL/CSA • Versions with Start-Stop/Reset buttons or Reset button • Versions with and without thermal relay • Versions with motor protection circuit breaker.

Page 4-5 CHANGEOVER CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES • For 20A loads at ≤40°C in IEC AC1 duty • For 20A general use per UL/CSA • With built-in mechanical interlock.

Page 4-7 STAR-DELTA STARTERS IN NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURE • Suitable for three-phase motor control, 16...60A 440V / 7.5kW...30kW 400V ratings in IEC AC3 duty.

Page 4-5 REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES • For three-phase motor control 9...25A 440V / 4...12.5kW 400V, in IEC AC3 duty and up to 15HP 600V per UL/CSA • Versions with built-in or external mechanical interlock • Complete with rigid connections • PCB version 9A 440V / 4kW 400V in IEC AC3 duty; 5HP 300V per UL/CSA.

Page 4-6 STAR-DELTA STARTERS OPEN FRAME • Suitable for three-phase motor control, 16A...690A 440V / 7.5kW...375kW 400V ratings in IEC AC3 duty.

Page 4-8 EMPTY NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES • Versions without pushbuttons, with Reset button only or Start-Stop/Reset buttons • For starters, with pushbuttons and metal plate • Suitable to contain BG mini-contactor or BF09A to BF110 contactors, up to 110A 440V rating in IEC AC3 duty; up to 52A at 600V for UL/CSA.

ELECTROMECHANICAL STARTERS AND ENCLOSURES

Direct-on-line starters in non-metallic enclosure complete with or without thermal relay Versions with RESET or START/STOP pushbuttons Non-metallic enclosures for customer-assembled starters Reversing and changeover contactor assemblies Star-delta starters, open frame and in non-metallic enclosure versions.

Direct-on-line starters - Full voltage across the line - Non reversing Enclosed with thermal relay ............................................................................................................................................... Enclosed without thermal relay .......................................................................................................................................... Enclosed with motor protection circuit breaker ................................................................................................................... Combinations ....................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 4 4 4 4

2 3 4 10

Reversing contactor assemblies With BG series mini-contactors ....................................................................................................................................... With BF series contactors ................................................................................................................................................

4 - 5 4 - 5

Changeover contactor assemblies With BG series mini-contactors .......................................................................................................................................

4 - 5

Star-delta starters Open frame ....................................................................................................................................................................... Enclosed ........................................................................................................................................................................... Non-metallic enclosure for starters ....................................................................................................................................

4 - 6 4 - 7 4 - 7

4 - 16 4 - 20

AND

4 - 8 4 - 8 4 - 9

M OTOR C ONTROL

Enclosures ........................................................................................................................................................................ Accessories and spare parts .............................................................................................................................................. Combinations ....................................................................................................................................................................

P ROTECTION

Empty non-metallic enclosures

Electromechanical starters and enclosures Direct-on-line starters – Full voltage across the line. Non reversing three phase Enclosed with motor protection circuit breaker

Order code

Relay adj range

IEC technical characteristics (≤440V) Ie kW

Qty Wt per pkg

[A]

[A] [kW]

n°

M2 P009 11 A4

0.63-1 1

M2 P009 11 A5

1-1.6

M2 P009 11 A6

1.6-2.5 2.5 0.75

M2 P009 11 A7

2.5-4

1.515

M2 P009 11 A8

4-6.5

6.5 2.2-3

1.515

M2 P009 11 A9

6.3-10 10

3-5

1.515

M2 P009 11 B0

9-14

5.5

1.515

M2 P009 11....

[kg]

1.450

1.6 0.37-0.55 1

1.450

0.25

1.1-1.5

1.515

Complete order code with coil voltage digit (if 50/60Hz) or with voltage digit followed by 60 (if 60Hz). Standard voltages are as follows: -- AC 50/60Hz 024 / 048 / 110 / 230 / 400V -- AC 60Hz 024 60 / 048 60 / 120 60 / 220 60 / 230 60 / 460 60 / 575 60 (V). Example: M2 P009 11 400 A8 for direct-on-line starter in M2 type with reset and reset/emergency button, 9A/AC3 contactor with 400VAC 50/60Hz coil and motor protection circuit breaker 4...6.5A.

General characteristics The M2 P009 11... starters are composed of an IP65 plastic enclosure where the following devices are mounted: – a motor protection circuit breaker type SM1R... with the short circuit and overload protection function – a contactor with start / stop function of the motor – 2 push-buttons for the start and stop – a mushroom push-button for the emergency stop – a padlockable rotary actuator, that operates the circuit breaker, for the isolation. These starters are easily and quickly installable. They are especially suitable to operate the motor of smaller machines where there is no electrical panel. Inside the enclosure, other components can be added like timers, level relays, protection relays, etc. Operational characteristics – M2… - 2 knockouts PG13.5/M20 or PG16/M25 on enclosure top and bottom – Ambient conditions: • Operating temperature: -25...+60°C • Storage temperature: -40...+70°C – Degrre of protection: IEC IP65, type 4/4X for UL version. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1.

4-4

Combinations pages 4-10 to 15

Dimensions pages 4-16

Wiring diagrams page 4-20

Page 5-4 ADXC • Two phase control • IEC rated starter current Ie 12...45A • IEC rated motor power 5.5...22kW at 400VAC and 9...37kW at 600VAC • UL/CSA ratings 3 to 25HP at 400VAC and 10 to 40HP at 600VAC • Built-in bypass relay • Total protection against over temperature and wrong phase sequence • Initial voltage, ramp up and ramp down time adjustable on front • LED indication for starter status • DIN rail mount and only 45mm wide.

Page 5-5 ADXL... • Two phase control • Reduced voltage starter with torque control and built-in bypass relay • For standard and severe duty • IEC rated starter current le 30....320A • IEC rated motor power 15...160kW (400VAC); 18.5...200kW (500VAC) • Maximum starting current limitation • PC remote control • Programming, data download and diagnostics via optical port • Parameter programming via NFC • Modbus-ASCII, Modbus-RTU and Modbus-TCP communication protocols • Backlit LCD display.

Page 5-6 ADX... • Three phase control • Reduced voltage starter with torque control and built-in bypass contactor up to 245A • For severe duty, IEC starting current 5•Ie • IEC rated starter current Ie 17...1200A • IEC rated motor power 7.5...710kW (400VAC) • Maximum starting current limitation • PC remote control supervision • Modbus-RTU and property ASCII communication protocols • Backlit LCD display.

Guide for selecting the best device ADXC

ADXL

Controlled phases

ADX 3

Built-in bypass

(up to 245A)

Built-in display and keypad

––

Languages

––

View measurements

––

Torque control

––

Adjustable current limit

––

Dynamic braking

––

Kick Start function

––

Motor overload electronic protection

––

Motor protection PTC input

––

Protection against phase reversal

Protection against phase inversion

Protection against locked rotor

––

Protection against thyristor overtemperature

Protection against low load

––

Programmable alarm functions

––

Programmable digital inputs

––

Programmable analog inputs

––

Programmable digital outputs

––

Programmable analog output

––

Monitoring communication via RS485

––

Programming communication

––

Event log

––

Motor hour counter

––

Startup counter

––

Clock calendar

––

Remotable external keypad

––

Standard Optional Not available

SOFT STARTERS

12A to 1200A soft starter ratings Standard and severe duty types Internal bypass contactor up to 320A rating Startup with torque control, voltage ramp or current limit Integrated total motor protection Clock calendar Digital control and adjustment RS232 and RS485 for monitoring and remote control Modbus-RTU and proprietary ASCII communication protocols.

4 5 6 7 8

5 - 10 5 - 12 5 - 13

P ROTECTION

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... Technnical characteristics ...............................................................................................

5 5 5 5 5

CONTROL AND

Type ADXC... 2 phase control ........................................................................................................................................... Type ADXL... 2 phase control ........................................................................................................................................... Type ADX... 3 phase control ............................................................................................................................................. Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... Software ...........................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE

M OTOR

Soft starters

ADXL SERIES SIMPLE, EFFICIENT

AND

SAFE

MOTOR

CONTROL 5

SIMPLE The new ADXL soft starter series is equipped with a backlit LCD display with icons and NFC connectivity, for a simple configuration, possible also via smartphones and tablets. They are ideal for simple “plug and play” applications, thanks to the installation AUTO SET wizard, and for high-performance applications, with control and protection during the motor startup and operation. EFFICIENCY After the start-up is completed, the soft starter closes the internal bypass contacts and reduces energy consumption. SAFETY ADXL built-in functions allow to protect the connected motor and the starter; it’s capable of monitoring the motor thermal status, to manage the thermal protection, and its internal temperature, in order to protect the SCR from overtemperature. Furthermore, a motor overtemperature protection can be enabled through an external PTC temperature sensor.

AUTO SET Upon startup, the soft starter launches a user wizard to simplify the setup. The user can set the device through 4 simple parameters: – language: it is possible to choose the text view by selecting the preferred language. The available languages are: English, Italian, French, Spanish, Portuguese, German; – motor current size: the motor nominal current (can be set between 50 and 100% of the starter size); – application type: it includes predefined setups for the most common applications: centrifugal pump, fire pump, conveyor belt, fan, mixer and general purpose. By selecting one type, the soft starter automatically updates the parameter programming to adapt to the requested application. – soft starter duty level: the same application, based on the load connected to the motor, can be more or less heavy-duty. ADXL is capable of automatically adapting to standard or heavy-duty startups by adjusting the related parameters based on the user selection. Expert users can customize the settings through the complete parameter menu.

ADXL: from start-up to operation in 4 steps

5-2

EASY SETUP The ADXL series soft starters are equipped with NFC technology to simplify the parameter setting procedure. Using a compatible smartphone or tablet, the user, even with the soft starter turned off, can download, save and edit the parameter menu using the LOVATO NFC configurator app. The device front includes an optical port compatible with the CX01 dongles, to connect via USB it to the PC through the Xpress software, and the CX02 dongles, for Wi-Fi connection to the PC or the SAM1 app.

Soft starters

TORQUE CONTROL The new two-phase control range includes the torque control. This motor starter solution allows to perform gradual accelerations and decelerations, with consequent significant reduction of mechanical faults and wear of the transmission devices. Circuit limit Maximum motor torque

Rated motor torque [%]

100 %

Torque ramp Starting torque

Ramp time

Time [s]

Starting

Run

Stopping

KICK START This function allows to start the motor when the initial torque is not sufficient to overcome friction forces; it transmits a high torque during the very first moments of the startup. 100 % Starting torque

Rated motor torque [%]

USER INTERFACE A backlit icon display shows the data to the user in a clear and immediate way. • Alarm texts available in 6 languages (ENG-ITA-FR-ES-POR-DE) • 6 icons indicate the default setup in use: centrifugal pump, fire pump, conveyor belt, fan, mixer and general purpose; • Two graphic bars show the motor and thyristors temperature; • Two alphanumeric displays allow to view texts and measures; • A status bar shows the starter, start, bypass, stop status.

Maximum motor torque

Torque ramp

PASSWORD Access to the soft starter parameters can be protected by user customizable passwords. There are two access levels, user and advanced. Furthermore, it’s possible to block the serial communication using the remote control password. RS485 COMMUNICATION AND REMOTE KEYPAD All ADXL series soft starters are equipped with a slot to house the EXC1042 MiniCard, an expansion dedicated to the RS485 communication. RS485 communication can be used to connect the EXCRDU1 remote keypad, to view the measures or to perform the setup through the touch screen installed on the front panel.

Kick start Ramp time

Starting

Time [s]

FIRE PUMP PRESET SETUP F While choosing the application in the AUTO SET wizard, it’s possible to select the fire pump function. This parameter setting is optimized to start fire pumps overriding all alarms and protections. In this situation, the main priority is the pump start-up, without considering the possible consequences for the pump starter and motor. INPUTS, OUTPUTS, LIMITS AND REMOTE VARIABLES The input and output functions are preset with the most common settings; the user can easily edit the preset configuration to adapt the soft starter to the application needs. All inputs and outputs can be edited. There are three types of programmable internal variables: – limit thresholds; – remote variables; – user alarms. MAINTENANCE COUNTERS ADXLs have two counters dedicated to count the number of start-ups and the motor operation hours. It is possible to set a threshold for the operation hours; when this threshold is exceeded, a dedicated alarm is triggered. COOLING FAN The fan is supplied as an accessory for sizes from 30 to 115A, while it is built-in for all larger sizes. In order to increase its life span, the fan is activated only when necessary. Furthermore, the ADXL is capable of checking the fan conditions; any blocks or faults are signalled through two specific alarms.

MONITORING AND REMOTE CONTROL Through the optional EXC1042 communication module and compatibility with the supervision and energy management software , setup and remote control software , it’s possible to constantly monitor all the measures available on the Modbus, the soft starter status and edit the setup parameters.

DIN MOUNT GUIDE For sizes from 30 to 115A, the EXP8003 accessory is available to mount the soft starter on a 35mm DIN rail.

5-3

Soft starters Two phase control ADXL... types

Order code

IEC rated starter current Ie

IEC rated Qty motor per power ≤40°C pkg IEC UL508 400V 440/ 480V

[A]

[kW]

[kg]

[HP]

n°

For standard and heavy-duty applications. With built-in bypass relay. 100...240VAC auxiliary power supply. Start control from dry contact

ADXL 0030 ... ADXL 0060

ADXL 0030

1.940

ADXL 0045

1.940

ADXL 0060

1.940

ADXL 0075

2.670

ADXL 0085

2.670

ADXL 0115

115

2.670

ADXL 0135

135

100

ADXL 0162

162

125

ADXL 0190

195

110

150

ADXL 0250

250

132

200

ADXL 0320

320

160

250

Order code

IEC rated starter current Ie

IEC rated Qty motor per power ≤40°C pkg IEC UL508 500V 550/ 600V

[A]

[kW]

[kg]

ADXL 0075 ... ADXL 0115

[HP]

n°

For standard and heavy-duty applications. With built-in bypass relay. 100...240VAC auxiliary power supply. Start control from dry contact

ADXL 0135 ... ADXL 0162

ADXL 0030 600

18.5

1.940

ADXL 0045 600

1.940

ADXL 0060 600

1.940

ADXL 0075 600

2.670

ADXL 0085 600

2.670

ADXL 0115 600

115

100

2.670

ADXL 0135 600

135

125

ADXL 0162 600

162

110

150

ADXL 0190 600

195

132

200

ADXL 0250 600

250

160

250

ADXL 0320 600

320

200

300

Contact our Customer Service office; see contact details on inside front cover.

General characteristics The new series of ADXL soft starters allow control the start and stop of three-phase asynchronous motors on two-phases with built-in bypass. ADXLs are equipped with a backlit display with icons and NFC technology, for a simple configuration, possible also from smartphones and tablets. ADXLs are ideal for simple “plug and play” applications, thanks to the installation wizard, and for high-performance applications, with control and protection during the motor start-up and operation. The ADXLs include protection features for the starter and motor, and it’s possible to enable specific alarms to signal maintenance needs, such as the number of startups performed or the operation hours of the motor. It has the following main features: – Backlit LCD display – Texts available in 6 languages (ENG-ITA-FR-ES-PORDE) – IEC rated starter current Ie from 30 to 320A – IEC rated motor power 15...160kW (400VAC) and 25...300HP (550/600VAC) – Voltage ramp startup – Torque control – Kick start – Limited maximum starting current – Free wheel or controlled stop – Built-in bypass relay – Optical port for programming data download and diagnostics through the software and app – NFC technology for parameter programming through the app – Optional RS485 communication – Modbus-ASCII, Modbus-RTU and Modbus-TCP communication protocols – Supervision and energy management software . Operational characteristics – Two phase control – Input voltage: • 208...500VAC ±10% for ADXL • 208...600VAC ±10% for ADXL...600 – Network frequency 50 or 60Hz ±10% self-configurable – 100...240VAC auxiliary power supply – Signalling LED: power supply startup or bypass phase, alarm – Three programmable outputs: 1 changeover contact 2 normally open contacts – 2 programmable digital inputs – 1 programmable digital input, that can be used as PTC – Protection rating: IP20. Displayed measures: Maximum current, L1 current, L2 current, L3 current, %-torque, average line voltage, total active power, total PF, motor thermal status, starter temperature. Protections – Motor: thermal protection, PTC protection, locked rotor, current asymmetry, startup too long, minimum torque – Power supply: no power supply, phase loss, wrong phase sequence and out-of-range frequency – Starter: overtemperature, overcurrent, SCR fault, bypass relay fault, temperature sensor fault and fan fault. Certifications and compliance Certificates pending: cULus; EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-2, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Accessories and software page 5-7 and 8

Dimensions page 5-10

Wiring diagrams page 5-12

Technical characteristics page 5-14

5-5

Soft starters Accessories Accessories for ADXL... types

Order code

Description

CX 01

USB connection dongle 1 PC ADXL with optical connector for programming, data download, diagnostics and firmware update

0.090

CX 02

Wi-Fi connection dongle 1 PC ADXL for data download, programming, diagnostics and cloning

0.090

EXC RDU1

Remote keypad, LCD display with touchscreen, 128 x 112 pixel, IP65 protection

0.360

EXC 1042

RS485 communication board

0.010

EXC CON 01 RS485/Ethernet converter, 12…48VDC, including DIN mounting guide kit

0.400

EXC M3G 01 RS485 gateway/3G modem, 9.5…27VAC/9.5…35VDC, including antenna and programming cable

0.340

EXP80 03

DIN guide mount kit for ADXL0030...ADXL0115

0.145

EXP80 04

Fan for ADXL0030...ADXL0115 (codes ADXL0075...ADXL0115 max. of two EXP80 04 fans)

0.030

CX 01

CX 02

EXC RDU1

EXC 1042

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

EXP 8003

Remote keypad for ADX... types

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

51 ADX TAST

Remote keypad 1 96x96mm, 2x16 backlit LCD, 208-240VAC supply c/w 3m/10ft long connecting cable

0.350

31 PA 96X96

Protective cover (IP54) (IP54)

0.077

51 C2

PC ADX connecting cable, 1.8m/6ft long

0.090

51 C3

PC GSM modem connecting cable, 1.8m/6ft long

0.210

51 C4

PC 4 PX1 converter drive connecting cable, 1.8m/6ft long

0.147

51 C5

ADX Analog modem connecting cable, 1.8m/6ft long

0.111

51 C6

ADX 4 PX1 converter drive connecting cable, 1.8m/6ft long

0.102

51 C7

ADX GSM modem connecting cable, 1.8m/6ft long

0.101

51 C8

ADX remote keypad connecting cable, 3m/10ft long

0.080

4 PX1

RS232/RS485 converter drive, opto-isolated, 220...240VAC (or 110...120VAC)

0.600

n°

51 ADX TAST

Accessories for ADX... types

51C4

4PX1

[kg]

Consult Customer Service for modem details; see contact details on inside front cover.

RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud-rate maximum, automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision, 220...240VAC ±10% supply (110...120VAC available on request).

Dimensions page 5-12

General characteristics Communication devices to connect LOVATO Electric products to: – Personal computer (PC) – Smartphones – Tablets. CX 01 This USB/optical dongle, complete with cable, allows the frontal connection of products compatible with PCs without having to disconnect the power supply from the electric panel. The PC identifies the connection as a standard USB. CX 02 Via Wi-Fi connection, compatible LOVATO Electric products can be viewed on PCs, smartphones and tablets with no need for cabling. For dimensions, wiring diagrams and technical characteristics, consult the manuals available online in the Download section of the following website: www.LovatoElectric.com EXC RDU1 Through the EXC RDU1 remote keypad, it’s possible to edit the ADXL programming, view the motor measures, operational data and alarms and turn off the alarms. – 100...240VAC / 12...24VDC double power supply – 128x112 pixel touchscreen LCD display – Built-in buzzer – Static output (SSR) to signal general alarms – Opto-isolated RS485 communication port – Conductor cross section: 0.2...2.5mm2 (24...12 AWG; 18...12 AWG for UL/CSA) – Tightening torque: 0.56Nm (4.5lbin) – Compatible with ADXL... ADX TAST remote keypad The flush-mount ADX TAST remote keypad is identical to the one on board the soft starter except for the start and stop controls of the motor, which are permanently disabled. With this keypad, starter setup can be conducted, motor readings and operating data displayed and data and parameter transfer (ADX remote keypad) made as well. A backup copy of the starter data and parameter setup is obtainable with the transfer functions. As a result quick and easy setup operations can be done especially with machines assembled in series. The baud transmission rate, the contrast and backlight can also be adjusted by this keypad. It is supplied standard with a 3m long cable and suitable connectors to complete the link to the ADX RS485 port. The three terminals of the keypad supply are removable. For longer distances, this keypad can be connected to the ADX RS232 port via RS232/RS485 converter. Advantages – Flush mount – Messages in selectable language – Readings display – Parameter setup – Two-way data and parameter transfer. Operational characteristics – Auxiliary supply voltage: 208...240VAC ±10% – Power consumption: 6.9VA – Dissipation: 3.2W – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz – RS485 port: RJ4/4 connector – Supply: Removable 3-pole 2.5 mm2 terminal block. – Display: 2 line, 16 character backlit LCD – LED indication (3): POWER, RUN and FAULT – Keys (6) ENTER/START, RESET/STOP, PREVIOUS, NEXT , and – Ambient conditions • Operating temperature: -10...+60°C • Storage temperature: -20...+70°C – Flush mount enclosure – Degree of protection on front: IP41; IP54 with protective cover. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC. Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 61000-6-1 and IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for 4 PX1 types.

5-7

Soft starters Software For ADXL... configuration and remote control software

5 supervision and energy management software

General characteristics By using the software, the quick setup of the soft starter can be carried out via PC, avoiding possible parameter programming errors. The parameter programming of ADXL… soft starters can also be PC saved and quickly uploaded into another device requiring the same programming. It allows the following operations: – Graphical and numerical display of measurements – Soft starter status – Access all setup parameters – Saving / loading parameters – Highlighting of changed values – Resetting to default values. software allows to remotely control and monitor the soft starters. The software structure and applications are based on MS SQL relational databases and the data can be consulted via the most common browsers. It is an extremely versatile system that can be accessed via intranet network, VPN or internet by several users/units at the same time. For details, consult section 27 or our Customer Service office; see contact details on inside front cover.

APP

APP for smartphones and tablets The application allows the user to set the soft starter, view the alarms, send commands, read the measures, download the events and submit the data collected via e-mail. The connection is made by Wi-Fi with a smartphone or tablet using the CX 02 device. It is iOS and Android compatible. For details, consult section 27 or our Customer Service office; see contact details on inside front cover. APP for smartphones and tablets The ADXL soft starters are equipped with built-in NFC technology. Using the LOVATO application it is possible to program the parameters and save them on smartphones and tablets. Available only for Android devices. For details, consult section 27 or our Customer Service office; see contact details on inside front cover.

APP

5-8

Pag. 6-3 and 4 VE1 AND VFNC3 TYPES • Single-phase 200...240VAC supply • Three-phase motor power, 0.2...2.2kW / 0.25...3HP ratings at 230VAC • Compliant with standard IEC/EN 61800-3, cat. C1 or cat. C2 without external filters • Optional three-phase motor inductances for VFNC3.

Pag. 6-6 VFS15 TYPE • Three-phase 380...500VAC supply • Three-phase motor power, 0.4...15kW / 0.5...20HP ratings at 400VAC • Compliant with standard IEC/EN 61800-3, cat. C1 or cat. C2 without external filters • Integrated dynamic braking circuit • Optional three-phase motor inductances • Optional braking resistors.

Pag. 6-5 VLB3 TYPE • Three-phase 400...480VAC supply • Three-phase motor power, 0.4...30kW / 0.54...40HP ratings at 400VAC • Compliant with standard IEC/EN 61800-3, cat. C1 or cat. C2 without external filters • Integrated dynamic braking circuit • Optional three-phase motor inductances • Optional braking resistors • Parameter programming also via USB and Wi-Fi modules.

Pag. 6-7 VFPS1 TYPE • Three-phase 380...480VAC supply • Three-phase motor power 18.5...630kW / 25...1000HP ratings at 400VAC • Compliant with standard IEC/EN 61800-3, cat. C1 or cat. C2 without external filters • Integrated dynamic braking circuit up to 220kW • Optional three-phase motor inductances • Optional braking resistors.

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

Versions for single-phase up to 2.2kW / 3HP and three-phase up to 630kW / 1000HP Special function for pump and fan control using PID algorithm Active earth leakage protection EMC suppressor built-in all versions Selectable motor control mode: V/f, vector, energy saving Selectable digital and analog input and output functions.

Variable speed drives VE1 single-phase type ....................................................................................................................................................... VFNC3 single-phase type ................................................................................................................................................... VLB3 three-phase type ...................................................................................................................................................... VFS15 three-phase type ..................................................................................................................................................... VFPS1 three-phase type ....................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 6 6 6 6 6

3 4 5 6 7

Dimensions .................................................................................................................

6 - 10

AND

6 - 8 6 - 8 6 - 9

M OTOR C ONTROL

Three-phase inductances ................................................................................................................................................... Braking resistors ............................................................................................................................................................... Other accessories ..............................................................................................................................................................

P ROTECTION

Accessories

Variable speed drives

Description

VE1

VFNC3

VLB3

VFS15

VFPS1

1-phase

3-phase

normal load

––

0.75...37 (400V)

0.75...18 (400V)

––

heavy load

0.2...2.2 (240V)

0.4...30 (400V)

0.4...15 (400V)

18.5...630 (400V)

Constant torque V/f

Sensorless vector

––

Automatic torque boost

Variable torque (for pump and fan)

Energy saving

Vector with encoder feedback

––

Three-phase motor power (kW)

6 Method of control

Maximum output frequency Overload Serial communications RS485

650Hz

400Hz

599Hz

500Hz

150% for 60s

120% for 60s

n° 1

n° 2

Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII

Modbus-RTU

Modbus-RTU, ProfiNET, canOPEN, Ethercat, ProfiBUS, EthernetIP

Modbus-RTU, PROFIBUS

Digital inputs (inputs marked with can be configured as analog or digital)

4+1

6+2

6+1

Digital outputs

Analog inputs (inputs marked with can be configured as analog or digital)

1+2

2+1

Protocols

Analog outputs

Sequencer (frequency/time cycles)

––

Onboard potentiometer

––

Auto-tuning

––

PID adjustment

PID SLEEP function

PID WAKE-UP function

––

FIRE function

––

Frequency potentiometer

––

3-wire motor running

DC braking

––

Preset speed frequency

Pump and fan functions

Auto-speed adjustment

––

Motor PTC thermistor input

––

S.T.O. (Safe Torque Off) per EN ISO 13849-1 cat. 3

––

Optional

––

6-2

Variable speed drives Single phase VE1 type

Order code

Output 3-phase Qty current motor power per at 240V pkg

Weight

[A]

[kg]

[kW]

[HP]

n°

General characteristics VE1 is a high-performance compact drive, with V/f torque control and boost, featuring advanced functions such as the built-in PID control and sequences. It is versatile, easy to install and program and can be used in numerous applications. It has a digital display to simplify parameterising which can also be done remotely using the RS485 port. Motor speed can be adjusted with the front potentiometer or by using one of the preset V/f curves, each provided with dedicated acceleration and deceleration ramps. It can be used in general applications such as automatic door controls, on conveyor belts, assembly, packaging and packing machinery, or for pump and fan control.

Single-phase supply 200...240VAC 50/60Hz. Three-phase motor output 240VAC max. Built-in EMC suppressor, cat. C2. 12VDC pNp digital inlets; version with 24VDC pNp inlets available upon request. VE1 02 A240

1.8

0.2

0.25

VE1 04 A240

2.6

0.4

0.5

1.200

VE1 07 A240

4.3

0.75

1.200

VE1 15 A240

7.5

1.5

1.800

VE1 22 A240

10.5

2.2

1.800

VE1...

V/f CURVE PROGRAMMING VE1 can handle 3 V/f preset curves and one programmed by the user. 3 V/f preset curves I – General use (V)% 100

B=10%, C=8% Conveyor belts and assembly machinery

B C 1 2.5 (3.0)

1.200

SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS Reference signals for speed adjustment are obtained by: – Front potentiometer – Voltage signals: 0...10V – Current signals: 4...20mA – 8 preset speeds – RS485 serial signals.

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS – 5 digital multifunction inputs – PNP 12VDC connection; 24VDC on request.

Sequencer The user can program frequency-time cycles made up of a maximum of 8 steps, each characterised by motor speed, rotation direction and step duration. The sequence cycle can be carried out in diverse modes: − One single cycle with final motor stopping − One single cycle with final motor running at last speed set − Repeat cycles with no pause. The sequence cycle can be stopped at any moment.

PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS – 1 programmable relay – 1 analog 0...10V. PROTECTION – Overload – Overvoltage – Minimum voltage – Output short circuit – Earth/ground leakage dispersion – Over-temperature – Restart after momentary power loss, with programmable number of attempts.

50 650 Hz (60)

II – High initial torque (V)%

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS – PID adjustment with sleep and wake-up functions – Sequencer (work cycles) – Motor control: V/f constant torque, variable torque, programmable motor start and stop curves (1 programmable by user) – Hour counter: Motor running hours and power supply on hours.

100

B=15%, C=10.5% Hoisting/lifting, grinders/ mills and agitators

B C

1 2.5 (3.0)

50 650 Hz (60)

III – Variable curve (V)%

B=25%, C=7.7%

100

Pumps and fans B C 1

2.5 (3.0)

50 650 Hz (60)

BOOST Torque boost can be applied on all preset curves with up to 10% Voltage to overcome very high inertia load conditions.

PID control In some applications, such as pumps or fans, the output frequency of the drive is defined by the target to keep pressure or flow constant. Typically, by using the analog input, feedback is monitored and, with the PID offset control, the motor drive sets motor speed to obtain the target set-point. VE1 PID control also includes the following functions: − Sleep: When the PID output frequency is lower than a programmed limit, that is the motor speed is close to the allowable minimum when propulsion is not needed, the motor drive completely stops the motor for energy saving. − Wake-up: During sleep phase, when the PID output frequency is higher than the programmed limit, the motor drive picks up motor control again at a suitable speed to reach the target set-point without a manual starting.

Operational characteristics – Input voltage: 200...240VAC single phase – Output voltage: 0...240VAC three phase – Rated operational current: 1.8...10.5A – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz – Output frequency: 0...650Hz – Current voltage: 150% for 60s – IEC degree of protection: IP20 – Ambient conditions • Operating temperature: -10…+40°C (up to 50°C with forced ventilation or 20% output current derating) • Maximum altitude: 1000m • Relative humidity: 95%.

PID calculated frequency

(V)%

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus – File E360929) as Power Conversion Equipment. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61800-5-1, IEC/EN 61800-3 cat. C2, IEC/EN 60721-3-3, UL 508 C, CSA C22.2 n° 14

Generated frequency

100

Each function also has a programmable delay time to avoid inopportune and repetitive start-stop motor cycles.

01-10 B C 1

2.5 (3.0)

50 (60)

1 Programmable V/f curve The user can customise a curve by defining 4 voltage / frequency points.

Wake up delay delay

(V)% Sleep

V4 (Vmax) V3 (Vmid2) V2 (Vmid1) V1 (Vmin)

t F1

Accessories pages 6-8 and 9

Hz 650.00

Dimensions page 6-10

6-3

Variable speed drives Three phase VLB3 type

Order code

Output current

3-phase motor power at 400VAC with heavy load

Qty Weight per pkg.

[A]

[kW]

n°

[HP]

[kg]

Three-phase supply 400...480VAC 50/60Hz. Three-phase motor output max. 480VAC. Built-in EMC suppressor, cat. C1. Built-in display and RS485 communication port.

VLB3...

VLB3 0004 A480

1.3

0.4

0.5

0.850

VLB3 0007 A480

2.4

0.75

1.100

VLB3 0015 A480

3.9

1.5

1.380

VLB3 0022 A480

5.6

2.2

1.380

VLB3 0040 A480

9.5

2.450

VLB3 0055 A480

5.5

7.5

2.450

VLB3 0075 A480

7.5

3.950

VLB3 0110 A480

23.3 11

3.950

VLB3 0150 A480

10.650

VLB3 0185 A480

18.5

10.650

VLB3 0220 A480

10.650

VLB3 0300 A480

10.650

Operational characteristics for standard load

The drive efficiency is 25% higher than the reference value for the IE1 class.

Type

Output current

3-phase motor power at 400VAC with standard load

VLB3 0004 A480

1.5A

0.75kW

1HP

VLB3 0007 A480

2.7A

1.5kW

2HP

VLB3 0015 A480

4.5A

2.2kW

3HP

VLB3 0022 A480

6.4A

4kW

5HP

VLB3 0040 A480

10.9A

5.5kW

7.5HP

VLB3 0055 A480

15A

7.5kW

10HP

VLB3 0075 A480

19.6A

11kW

15HP

VLB3 0110 A480

27.1A

15kW

20HP

VLB3 0150 A480

36.9A

18.5kW

25HP

VLB3 0185 A480

46.1A

22kW

30HP

VLB3 0220 A480

54.2A

30kW

40HP

VLB3 0300 A480 76.1A 37kW Operation up to 45°C without power derating. Heavy-duty load: 150% overload for 60s.

50HP

Standard load: 120% overload for 60s.

Accessories for VLB3

Order code Description

Qty Wt per pkg.

VLBX C01

Display and keyboard

0.032

VLBX P01

Door-mount installation kit

0.032

VLBX C02

USB communication module

0.032

VLBX C03

Wi-Fi communication module

0.032

VLBX SM

S.T.O. (Safe Torque Off) module

0.032

VLBX L01

Logic unit with can OPEN

0.209

VLBX L02

Logic unit with ProfiBUS

0.209

VLBX L03

Logic Unit with ProfiNET (available upon request)

0.209

VLBX L04

Logic Unit with Ethercat (available upon request)

0.209

VLBX L05

Logic Unit with EthernetIP (available upon request)

0.209

n°

VLBX C01

VLBX C02

SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS – External potentiometer: 0…10kΩ – Voltage signals: -10…10VDC (two-pole) – Current signals: 0/4…20mA – Buttons on front keyboard – Remote control panel – 15 preset speeds via digital inputs – Motopotentiometer – Setting via modbus protocol (RS485). PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS/OUTPUTS – pNp or nPn connections – 5 digital inputs – 1 digital output, 1 changeover relay output – 2 voltage analog inputs -10…10VDC (two-pole) or current analog inputs 0/4…20mA – 1 voltage analog output 0…10VDC (two-pole) or current analog output 0/4…20mA. PROTECTIONS – Overcurrent – Output short circuit and earth/ground leakage – Overvoltage – Undervoltage – Phase loss – Motor heat overload (I2t) – Motor PTC heat protection – Drive, motor and braking resistor overload – Overspeed – Speed reverse. FUNCTIONS – Speed or torque control – V/f linear or squared curves – Open or closed ring vector control – Energy-saving ECO control – S curves – Quick speed search – Access to DC bus – DC braking and DC injection at start – Built-in PID with sleep and wake-up thresholds – Programmable frequency/time cycles – Ideal for asynchronous or permanent magnet motors – Different parameter configurations – User menu (favorite parameters) – Safe Torque Off (STO) input accessory class SIL 3 (EN62061 / EN61800-5-2). Operational characteristics – Input voltage: 400...480VAC three-phase – Rated operational current: 1.3…66A – Mains frequency: 45...65Hz – Output frequency: 0...599Hz – Frequency modulation: 2...16kHz – Current overload: 150% for 60s; 200% for 0.5s – IEC degree of protection: IP20 – Ambient conditions • Operating temperature: -10...+60°C (45°C without derating) • Maximum altitude: 3000m (with power derating) • Relative humidity: 5...95% (with no condensing) – Side-by-side installation – Built-in EMC suppressor (EN61800-3) motor cable length: up to 3m for cat. C1; up to 20m for cat. C2 – IE2 efficiency level (EN50598-2). Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, CSA, EAC. Compliant with standards: EN61800-5-1, UL61800-5-1, CSA 22.2 No. 274.

VLBX L...

Accessories pages 6-8 and 9

[kg]

General characteristics VLB3 is a compact drive with three-phase supply input. It is ideal for general applications and, in particular, to lift and manage pumps and fans, thanks to several specific built-in functions (S Curve, PID, torque squared control). It does not require any space for side ventilation, allowing to install several side-by-side drives. The user interface, which comprises built-in keyboard and display, allows to access the setting parameters easily, thanks to the use of extended texts describing the functions and codes. Using the USB or Wi-Fi connection accessories, the programming, monitoring and diagnostics can be performed using a PC. The RS485 communication port with built-in RTU modbus and EMC filter complete the hardware supply. The logic unit can be replaced with one of the VLB... codes, obtaining a different communication port.

Dimensions pages 6-10 to 12

6-5

Page 7-4 to7 and 11 7-28 to 30 and 33

BUTTON ACTUATORS Ø22mm • Spring return flush, extended and shrouded • Push-push flush and extended • Mushroom-head • Mechanical reset • Illuminated.

Page 7-13 to 15 PILOT LIGHTS Ø22mm • Monoblock LED. MONOBLOCK BUZZERS Ø22mm • Continuous or pulse tone. COMMUNICATION INTERFACES Ø22mm • USB • RJ45.

Page 7-14 7-36 POTENTIOMETERS Ø22mm • Potentiometer included in the product with graduated scale. • Metal potentiometer drives with: – graduated scale – variable index.

Page 7-8 and 12 7-31 and 34

DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH ACTUATORS Ø22mm • Double touch with or without indicator • Triple touch.

Page 7-16 to 24 7-38 to 43

ADD-ON ELEMENTS, ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS FOR PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES • Mounting adapter • Contact elements • LED integrated elements • Lamp holders • Labelling and label holders • Bulbs.

Page 7-37 METAL JOYSTICKS Ø22mm • 2 directions • 4 directions • 2 directions with mechanical interlock • 4 directions with mechanical interlock • Complete with contact elements.

SELECTOR SWITCHES Ø22mm • Short lever • Long lever • Key • Knob • Illuminated.

Page 7-9 and 12 7-32 and 35

Page 7-25 CONTROL STATIONS • 1 to 6 holes option without actuators • Complete units with 1 button.

PUSHBUTTONS

AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

Simple and snap on installation Highly conductive contacts Robust for severe ambient conditions Contact operation: double breaking action, direct opening operation and self cleaning.

Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................ Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................ Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................ Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ........................................................................................................... Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ........................................................................................................................... Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return ................................................................................................ Selector switch actuators ............................................................................................................................................... Illuminated button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................................... Illuminated push-push actuators .................................................................................................................................... Illuminated mushroom-head actuators .......................................................................................................................... Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ......................................................................................... Illuminated selector actuators ........................................................................................................................................ Pilot light heads .............................................................................................................................................................. Potentiometer drives ....................................................................................................................................................... Joysticks ......................................................................................................................................................................... Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................ Mounting adapter and contact - lamp holder - test elements ..........................................................................................

4 4 5 5 7 8 9 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 15 15 16 20

7 - 25 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

28 28 29 29 30 31 32 33 33 34 34 35 36 36 37 38 41

7 - 46 7 - 51

S IGNALLING

series control stations ..................................................................................... 8 LM Ă&#x2DC;22mm metal series

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

AND

Pushbutton actuators, spring return ................................................................................................................................ Push-push button actuators ............................................................................................................................................ Mechanical reset button, spring return ............................................................................................................................ Pushbutton actuators with symbol, spring return ........................................................................................................... Mushroom-head pushbutton actuators ........................................................................................................................... Double and triple-touch button actuators, spring return ................................................................................................. Selector switch actuators ............................................................................................................................................... Selector switch actuator knobs ....................................................................................................................................... Illuminated button actuators, spring return .................................................................................................................... Illuminated push-push button actuators ........................................................................................................................ Illuminated mushroom-head actuators .......................................................................................................................... Double-touch button actuators, spring return, with indicator ......................................................................................... Illuminated selector actuators .......................................................................................................................................... Pilot light heads .............................................................................................................................................................. Monoblock LED pilot lights, steady light ........................................................................................................................ Monoblock potentiometers ............................................................................................................................................. Monoblock buzzers ......................................................................................................................................................... USB-RJ45 communication interfaces ............................................................................................................................. Accessories, spare parts and labels ................................................................................................................................ Mounting adapter and contact, LED, test elements ........................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE

C ONTROL

Ă&#x2DC;22mm series

Pushbuttons and selector switches Ø22mm series

QUALITY TOUCH!

HIGH DEGREE OF PROTECTION IP66, IP67 and

IP69K The actuators have been tested to guarantee a degree of protection per IEC/EN IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X, appropriate for use even in extreme ambient conditions.

ELEGANT STYLE AND ERGONOMIC DESIGN All the series elements have an ergonomic design and, at the same time, particular care has been given to minimum detail aesthetics.

10mm

LOW ACTUATOR PROFILE

LONG ACTUATOR MECHANICAL LIFE

The external actuator bezel has a low profile and reduced front thickness.

High performance characteristics assure 5,000,000 cycle mechanical life for spring-return actuators, 1,000,000 for double and triple touch units and 300,000 for emergency-stop types.

MATERIALS RESISTANT TO OILS, SOLVENTS AND HYDROCARBONS USAGE AT EXTREME TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS Operation temperature range between -25° and +70°C.

CUSTOMISING CAPABILITY To simplify stock management, the series includes actuators without cap or lens and separate caps and lenses for quick installation or replacement on spring return and push-push types; all these are sold as accessories.

QUICK AND EASY ACTUATOR INSTALLATION

cULus, EAC, RINA and CCC CERTIFICATIONS.

REDUCED DIMENSIONS AND INTERAXIS

CONTACT ELEMENTS

30 (1.18”)

Click!

40 (1.57”)

- Actuator fixing on the mounting surface, through a Ø22mm/0.87” drilled hole, is obtained using its threaded ring, easily rotated by hand or by socket spanner/wrench.

- The mounting adapter and the actuators each have clearly visible reference indications making the snap-on fitting between the two easy and intuitive.

Click!

40 (1.57”)

30 (1.18”)

Ø22.3 (0.88”)

Minimum pitch: - 30x40mm/1.18x1.57” between drillings for two actuators on a mounting surface - 30x55mm/1.18x2.16” between drillings for two double and triple-touch actuators or when spring clamp contacts are used.

- Miniaturised size - High electric conductivity - 5V 1mA - Up to 9 contact elements can be installed - Available versions: Front and base mount with screw terminals while front-mount only with faston and spring-clamp terminals - Contact operation: double breaking action, direct (positive) action operation and wiping effect. HIGH-LUMINOSITY LED ELEMENTS

43mm (1.69”) - There is an anti-rotation fastener, duly sized to avoid actuator rotation on the mounting surface and to give an orientation reference point for users during panel installation and during contact fitting on the actuator. - This anti-rotation fastener collapses inside the gasket to allow fitting also when drilled holes are round without reference index. - The sealing gasket for the actuator mounting surface has a gripping action (suction effect) offering additional adhesion properties.

7-2

- Electrical contact and LED elements are snapped onto the mounting adapter. - The activation of the middle contacts is standard supplied on all non-illuminated spring return and push-push button or selector switch actuators. - Total depth, from the external mounting surface to the end of the first contact element is just 43mm/1.69”.

- Miniaturised size - Long electrical life: 100,000h - Versions for base mounting and with screw or spring-clamp terminals - Overvoltage protection - Withstand vibrations - Protection against stray currents in wiring - Flickering phenomenon reduction - Steady and flashing light versions - Supply voltages: • 12...30VAC/DC • 85...140VAC • 185...265VAC - Test elements installed beside and connected with the relative LED element allow checking if all LED elements of the installation are working properly.

Pushbuttons and selector switches Ø22mm series

DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH ACTUATORS

EMERGENCY STOP ACTUATORS

SELECTOR SWITCH ACTUATORS

PILOT LIGHTS

- Lever design assures excellent grip

- IEC IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X degree of protection - Double touch button actuators, with 2 flush or 1 flush and 1 extended buttons - Triple touch button actuators with 2 flush and middle extended butons - Versions with or without indicator.

MECHANICAL RESET BUTTONS

- Protection rating IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X for LED monoblock pilot lights and pilot light heads. - Long life and low consumption. - Actuator structure suitable to warrant direct opening operation with mechanical latching for emergency stopping per ISO 13850 and IEC/EN 60947-5-5. - Auto-monitor contact elements are available with functions to: • Constantly control the correct installation (mounting adapter and NC contact with the actuator) and proper operation of the NC contact • Open the circuit in the case of malfunctions (e.g. the contact detaches from the mounting adapter due to strong vibrations or shock).

MONOBLOCK BUZZERS - High visibility on front or side and actuator inscription shows exact switch position

- Continuous or pulse-tone monoblock buzzers in a single product. - IP40 version (90dB/10cm) and IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X, version (80dB/10cm) available. - Use of Ronis keys

- Rod adjustment directly on acutator front (1...4mm/0.04...0.16”).

- Up to 6 contact elements can be mounted

COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

- There is a green line around the actuator body to spot when the emergency stop is at rest or activated. - Use of Ronis keys - Various accessories available (e.g. yellow E-stop disks, padlockable protection and rubber actuator boots).

- Activation of the middle contacts is standard supplied on 2 and 3 position selector switches.

MONOBLOCK POTENTIOMETERS SHROUD ADAPTER FOR DIN RAIL MOUNTING

- Potentiometer included in the product. - Protection rating IP66, IP67 and IP69K and UL Type 4X. - Resistance values from 1 to 500kΩ.

- Permits the fitting of the Platinum and 8 LM2T series buttons on DIN rail, in panels and modular boxes. Only 35mm/1.38” wide (2 modules).

- Protection rating IP65, UL Type 4X. - USB and RJ45 for Ethernet types with data transmission in both directions. - USB type 3.0 (backward compatible with USB 2.0). PLASTIC CONTROL STATIONS

- Suitable for all Platinum and 8 LM2T mushroom-head latch buttons, guarantees protection against accidental on-board machinery contact. - IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X protection degrees. - Empty pushbutton stations with 1 to 6 way option and complete control stations with various mushroomhead stop buttons - Quick installation and wiring ease with the relative base-mount contact and LED elements, snap in place on the base - Installation of screw and springclamp terminal contact and LED elements also on the internal cover surface.

7-3

Pushbuttons and selector switches Ø22mm series Selector switch actuators knob

Order code

Type of positions

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

LPC S420

0.037

LPC S421

0.037

LPC S430

0.037

Materials Polyamide.

LPC S431

0.037

LPC S432

0.037

LPC S433

0.037

2 position (without mounting adapter)

3 position (without mounting adapter). LPC S4...

Contact activation of 2-position selector switch

Contact activation of 3-position selector switch

3 Column

Contacts

—

3 Column

Contacts 1

—

Mechanical endurance Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles. Mounting adapter See page 7-20. Type: LPX AU120. Actuators are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on the cover of LPZ control stations. The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator. Contact elements See page 7-20, 7-23 or 7-24. Type

Termination

Front-mount types snap onto LPX AU120 mounting adapter (to purchase separately). Up to 6 contacts can be fitted: 2 each on the left, middle and right or 3 each on the left and right, one behind the other. They can also be fitted internally on the cover surface of LPZ control stations, up to 3 elements per actuator. 1NO

LPX C10

Screw

LPX CF10

Faston

LPXCS10

Spring clamp

1EM

LPX C10A

Screw

1NC

LPX C01

Screw

LPX CF01

Faston

LPX CS01

Spring clamp

LPX C01D

Screw

1LB

Base-mount types snap into LPZ control station base. See example on page 7-27. Up to 3 contacts can be fitted per control station actuator. 1NO

LPX CB10

Screw

1NC

LPX CB01

Screw

Activation of the middle contacts is coupled to the side contacts; the relative mechanism pins are standard supplied.

The middle contact activation, with respect to the right and left side contact, can be changed by the user, if required, by removing one or both mechanism pins. Consult the relative instructions available online in the Downloads section at www.LovatoElectric.com. Type of position Maintained position. Spring return position. Rotation angles 2 position 90°

3 position 45°

45°

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained:UL Listed for USA and Canada, (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC (pending), RINA (pending). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

7-10

Add-on blocks pages 7-20 to 24

Accessories and spare parts pages 7-16 to 19

Dimensions page 7-47

Pushbuttons and selector switches Ø22mm series Pilot light heads

Order code

Colour

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

Without mounting adapter.

LPL...

LPL 3

Green

0.024

LPL 4

Red

0.024

LPL 5

Yellow

0.024

LPL 6

Blue

0.024

LPL 7

Transparent

0.024

LPL 1187

Transparent

0.024

With symbol indicating dangerous voltage (IEC/EN 60417 5036-a).

Operational characteristics – Any mounting position allowed – Ambient conditions: • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C – Degree of protection: • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K. Materials Polyamide. Mounting adapter See page 7-20. Type: LPX AU120. Pilot light heads are installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/ 1.69lbft) also on the cover of LPZ control stations, with LED element in central position. The mounting adapter directly snaps onto the actuator. LED light elements See pages 7-20 to 7-24. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: UL Listed for USA and Canada, (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices; EAC, CCC, RINA. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

LED integrated monoblock pilot lights steady light

Order code

Rated auxi- LED liary supply colour voltage

LPM LA3

12VAC/DC

n°

[kg]

0.021

LPM LA4

Red

0.021

LPM LA5

Yellow

0.021

LPM LA6

Blue

0.021

Transparent 10

0.021

Green

0.021

LPM LB4

Red

0.021

LPM LB5

Yellow

0.021

LPM LB6

Blue

0.021

Transparent 10

0.021

Green

0.021

LPM LD4

Red

0.021

LPM LD5

Yellow

0.021

LPM LD6

Blue

0.021

LPM LD7

Transparent 10

0.021

Green

0.024

LPM LE4

Red

0.024

LPM LE5

Yellow

0.024

LPM LE6

Blue

0.024

LPM LE7

Transparent 10

0.024

LPM LB3

24VAC/DC

LPM LB7 LPM LD3

LPM LE3

LPM LM3

Add-on blocks pages 7-20 to 22

Green

LPM LA7 LPM...

Qty per pkg

48VAC/DC

110VAC

Green

0.024

LPM LM4

Red

0.024

LPM LM5

Yellow

0.024

LPM LM6

Blue

0.024

LPM LM7

Transparent 10

0.024

Accessories and spare parts pages 7-16 to 19

230VAC

Dimensions page 7-47

Operational characteristics – Nominal frequency: 50-60Hz – Supply voltage: 12VAC/DC, 24VAC/DC, 48VAC/DC, 110VAC, 230VAC (-15%...+10% Ue) – Consumption: ≤20mA – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on cover of LPZ control stations – Electrical life: >30,000 hours – Screw termination – Side cable entry – Maximum tightening torque: 0.8Nm – Ambient conditions: • Operating temperature: -5...+40°C – Degree of protection: • per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K on front; IP20 at rear • per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K on front. Materials Polyamide. Maximum conductor cross section 1 or 21.5mm2 or AWG16 cables. Wiring diagram

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus (pending), EAC, CCC (pending). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

7-13

Pushbuttons and selector switches Ø22mm series Monoblock potentiometers

LPC PA...

Order code

Resistance value

Qty Wt per pkg. n°

[kg]

LPC PA001

1kΩ

0.040

LPC PA002

2.5kΩ

0.040

LPC PA005

5kΩ

0.040

LPC PA010

10kΩ

0.040

LPC PA050

50kΩ

0.040

LPC PA100

100kΩ

0.040

LPC PA500

500kΩ

0.040

General characteristics Monoblock potentiometers are typically used for regulating the parameters of many devices (e.g. the speed of the electric motors through static converters). The monoblock body design permits direct use of the potentiometer by panel fitting with fixing ring and subsequent tightening of cables into the built-in terminal block. The potentiometer is made with Cermet technology, which ensures stable, constant resistance values over time. The, UL-certified, range is made for resistance values from 1 to 500kΩ. All potentiometers are IP66, IP67, IP69K and UL Type 4X, which means that they can be used in demanding ambient conditions. Operational characteristics – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC – Impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 4kV – Potentiometer included in the product – Monoblock body with 1-turn graduated scale – Any fitting position permitted – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on the cover of LPZ control stations – Resistive material: cermet – Operation: linear – Resistance tolerance: ±10% – Max. power: 1W (70°C) – Mechanical endurance: 25,000 operations – Mechanical travel: 290° – Side cable entry – Ambient conditions: • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C – Degree of protection: • Per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67 and IP69K on front • Per IEC/EN: IP20 at rear • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K on front.

Materials Polyamide. Maximum conductor cross section Screw terminal connections with three separate connections: – Min. cable 0.5mm2 / AWG24 – Max. cable 2.5mm2 / AWG14 – Maximum tightening torque: 0.5Nm/0.37lbft – Flat-head screwdriver: 0.6x3.5mm/0.02x0.14”. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC (pending), RINA (pending). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

7-14

Dimensions page 7-47

Wiring diagrams page 7-51

Pushbuttons and selector switches Ø22mm series Monoblock buzzers

Order code

Voltage

Sound Qty Wt intensity per at 2800Hz pkg.

[V]

[dB/10cm] n°

[kg]

Continuous or pulse tone, IP40 version.

LPC ZS...

LPC ZSA

9...15VAC/DC

0.020

LPC ZSB

18...30VAC/DC

0.020

LPC ZSE

85...140VAC/DC

0.020

LPC ZSM

185...265VAC/DC 90

0.020

Continuous or pulse tone, IP66, IP67, IP69K, UL Type 4X version. LPC ZSAIP

9...15VAC/DC

LPC ZSBIP

18...30VAC/DC

0.020 0.020

LPC ZSEIP

85...140VAC/DC

0.020

LPC ZSMIP

185...265VAC/DC 80

0.020

Pulse-tone sound graph Hz 3500 3000 2800 2500

LPC ZS...IP

0.3s

2000 1500

General characteristics Monoblock buzzers are used as sound indicators in automation systems and on-board machinery in the production processes. Long life, low consumption values, compact size and the use of materials, in accordance with the North American market, are the main features of this product. Operational characteristics – Rated frequency: 50…60Hz – Supply voltage: 9..15VAC/DC, 18..30VAC/DC, 85..140VAC/DC, 185..265VAC/DC – Maximum absorption: 20mA-0.30W (type 9..15VAC/DC), 15mA-0.40W (type 18..30VAC/DC), 5.5mA-0.80W (type 85..140VAC/DC), 3.5mA-0.95W (type 185..265VAC/DC) – Minimum activation voltage: >4V (type 9..15VAC/DC), >8V (type 18..30VAC/DC), >15V (type 85..140VAC/DC), >25V (type 185..265VAC/DC) – Impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 4kV – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on the cover of LPZ control stations – Service life: 30,000 hours (permanently powered) – Side cable entry – Ambient conditions: • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C – Degree of protection (type LPC ZS...IP): • per IEC/EN: IP66, IP67, IP69K on front and IP20 at rear • per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K on front. Materials Polyamide.

1000 500 s

0 0.6

0 0.3

0.9 1.2

1.5

Maximum conductor cross section Screw terminal connections with three separate connections: – Min. cable 0.5mm2 / AWG24 – Max. cable 2.5mm2 / AWG14 – Maximum tightening torque: 0.5Nm/0.37lbft – Flat-head screwdriver: 0.6x3.5mm/0.02x0.14”. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC (pending), RINA (pending). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

USB and RJ45 communication interfaces

Order code

Description

Qty Wt per pkg. n°

[kg]

LPC D01

USB interface, A/A female type connection

0.018

LPC D03

USB interface, A/B female type connection

0.018

LPC D05

USB interface, B/A female type connection

0.018

LPC D06

RJ45 interface, Ethernet connection type

0.026

LPC D01

LPC D03

LPC D05

Dimensions page 7-47

Wiring diagrams page 7-51

General characteristics USB and RJ45 communication interface connectors are used in industrial environments, which in recent years have seen an increase in the number of connections between machines, production lines, equipment and measuring instruments. These interfaces provide the transmission of data in both directions between the various devices. Operational characteristics – Rated insulation voltage for LPCD01, LPCD03, LPCD05: 5VAC/DC – Rated insulation voltage for LPCD06: 24VAC – Interface mechanical endurance: ≥750 insertions – Installed through a Ø22mm/Ø0.87” drilling with a threaded fixing ring (Tmax = 2.3Nm/1.69lbft) also on the cover of LPZ control stations – Transmission characteristics for LPCD01, D03, D05: 5Gbps (625MB/sec) – Transmission characteristics for LPCD06: 10 Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3an-2006 – Rated current for LPCD01, LPCD03, LPCD05: 1.8A – Rated current for LPCD06: 1.5A – Insulation resistance: ≥100MOhm – Contact resistance for LPCD01, LPCD03, LPCD05: ≤30mOhm – Contact resistance for LPCD06: ≤40mOhm – USB connector class: 3.0 (backward compatible with USB class 2.0) – Ambient conditions: • Operating temperature: -25...+70°C • Storage temperature: -40...+85°C – Degree of protection: • Per IEC/EN: IP65 on front (with cap mounted) • Per IEC/EN: IP20 at rear • Per UL: Type 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 12K on front (with cap mounted) Materials Polyamide. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, CCC (pending), RINA (pending). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

7-15

Pushbuttons and selector switches Ø22mm series Accessories and spare parts

Order code

Description

LPX AU100

Label holder for engraved plastic LPX AU109 label

n°

[kg]

0.001

LPX AU109

Engravable silver plastic 50 label to use with LPX AU100 holder

0.002

LPX AU105

Label holder for engraved plastic LPX AU108 label

0.003

LPX AU108

Engravable silver plastic 50 label to use with LPX AU105 holder

0.002

LPX AU13

Rubber boot for flush 10 button LPC B1/BL1/R1...

0.006

LPX AU14

Rubber boot for buttons 10 LPC B2/3..., LPC BL2... and LPC R2...

0.009

LPX AU157

Rubber boot for double 10 and triple-touch buttons, transparent

0.007

LPX AU167

Rubber boot for 10 mushroom head buttons, LPC B63/B66/B67/ BL66... transparent

0.012

LPX AU158

Padlockable protection, 10 Ø5-8mm locks or buttons LPC B66/B67/ B68/BL664...; for LPC B634... Ø5-6mm/0.2-0.24” locks only.

0.005

LPX AU159

Shroud for buttons 10 LPC B63..., LPC B66/67/68/BL666...

0.010

LPX DIN

Adapter for mounting 10 LPC... buttons on DIN rail 35mm/1.38” wide (2 modules)

0.008

8 LM2T A161

Ø30mm/1.2” hole size adapter set for 22mm/ 0.87” (use 2 per hole)

0.002

8 LM2T A185

Yellow selector protection 10 shroud for knob type only

0.004

8 LM2T A200

Socket spanner/wrench 1 for fixing ring fitting, metal

0.184

LPX AU100

LPX AU105

LPX AU108 LPX AU109

Qty per Wt pkg.

LPX AU158

Other accessories

8 LM2T A185

For flush and extended push buttons, complete the order code by adding the digit of the required colour: 2 (black); 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white). For illuminated push buttons, add only digit 7 (transparent). Cannot be used when LPX AU100 or LPX AU105 is fitted. Cannot be used when LPX AU158 is fitted. Cannot be used when LPX AU167 is fitted.

LPX AU159

LPX DIN

Dimensions page 7-47

7-17

Page 8-2 SIGNAL TOWERS Ø45mm/1.77” • Signal towers supplied already assembled Ø45mm/1.77” • Steady light modules • Pulsed or continuous sound modules • Built-in LED circuit.

Page 8-4 and 5 SIGNAL TOWERS Ø70mm/2.75” • Modular signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” • Steady, blinking or flashing light modules • Pulsed or continuous sound modules • Incandescent and LED bulbs.

Page 8-3 MULTICOLOURED SIGNAL TOWERS Ø70mm/2.75” • Modular signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” • Steady light multicoloured modules • Pulsed or continuous sound multicoloured modules • Built-in LED circuit.

Page 8-6 SIGNAL BEACONS Ø62mm/2.44” • Signal beacons Ø62mm/2.44” • Steady or blinking light modules • Pulsed or continuous sound modules • Incandescent and LED bulbs.

SIGNAL

TOWERS AND BEACONS

Signal towers Ø45mm/1.77” Supplied already assembled Steady light and pulsed or continuous sound modules Multicoloured signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” Modular and combinations up to 5 modules Steady light and pulsed or continuous sound modules Signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” Modular and combinations up to 7 modules Steady or blinking light, pulsed or continuous sound modules Signal beacons Ø62mm/2.44” Steady or blinking light, pulsed or continuous sound modules.

2 3 4 6 7

8 - 10 8 - 11

S IGNALLING

Dimensions.................................................................................................................. Wiring diagrams ...........................................................................................................

8 8 8 8 8

AND

Signal towers Ø45mm/1.77” .......................................................................................................................................... Multicoloured signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” .................................................................................................................... Signal towers Ø70mm/2.75” .......................................................................................................................................... Signal beacons Ø62mm/2.44” ......................................................................................................................................... Accessories and spare parts ............................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE

C ONTROL

Signal towers and beacons

Signal towers and beacons Signal towers Ø45mm/1.77”

Order code

Description

Qty per Wt pkg n°

[kg]

Steady light and pulsed or continuous sound light modules. Built-in LED circuit . 8 LT4 K02BG Green, red, 24VDC

0.160

8 LT4 K03BG Green, red with continuous or pulsed sound, 24VDC

0.240

8 LT4 K04BG Green, orange, red, 24VDC

0.320

8 LT4 K05BG Green, orange, red with continuous or pulsed sound, 24VDC

0.400

For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8.

General characteristics The Ø45mm/1.77” signal towers are supplied completely assembled with the possibility of up to 3 light modules with a sound module. The high-brightness LED circuit lighting ensures low consumption and long life. Technical characteristics – Supply voltage: 24VDC (±10%) – Light module consumption: 37mA per module – Sound module consumption: 15mA – Sound intensity: 80dB/1m, pulsed or continuous sound – Material: polycarbonate – Connections: screw clamp terminals and maximum conductor section 1.5mm2/16 AWG – Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin – Operating temperature: -20…+50°C – IEC degree of protection: IP54. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus (pending), EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60947-1,UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

8 LT4 K02BG

Combinations

8 LT7 BP 01... (plastic)

8 LT4 K05BG

8 LT7 TM... (metal) 8 LT7 BM 01 (metal)

8 LT7 BM 02 (metal) 8 LT7 BP 02... (plastic)

Fixing base and extension tubes

8 LT7 BP 03G

For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8.

8-2

Accessories and spare parts page 8-7 and 8

Dimensions page 8-10

Wiring diagrams page 8-11

Signal towers and beacons Multicoloured signal towers Ø70mm/2.75”

Order code

Description

Qty per Wt pkg n°

[kg]

Steady light and pulsed or continuous sound multicoloured light modules. Built-in LED circuit . 8 LT7 3B 9A

Green, orange, red, 24VDC

8 LT7 3S2B 9A Green, orange, red, with continuous or pulsed sound 24VDC 8 LT7 3B 9B 8 LT7 3S …

Blue, orange, red, 24VDC

8 LT7 3S2B 9B Blue, orange, red, with continuous or pulsed sound 24VDC

0.090

0.200

0.090

0.200

For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8.

General characteristics The multicoloured signal towers incorporate the possibility of up to 3 different colours in a single light module. In the event of two or more alarms, the multicoloured module lights up in alternating colours corresponding to the event. The multicoloured module must always be placed last, at the top of the tower, should it be used together with light modules 8LT7 EL… 8LT7 GL … or 8LT7 FL…. Technical characteristics – Supply voltage: 24VDC (±10%) – Light and sound module consumption: 90mA – Sound intensity: 90dB/1m – Material: polycarbonate – Number of stackable elements: 4 with 8 LT7 3P modules, 1 with 8 LT7 3S modules – Connections: screw clamp terminals and maximum conductor section 1.5mm2/16 AWG – Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin – Operating temperature: -20...+50 °C – IEC degree of protection: IP65.

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus (pending), EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

8 LT7 3B …

Combinations Cover (supplied with 8 LT7 CM 01... and 8 LT7 CP 01... module)

8 LT7 ALB... (incandescent bulb) 8 LT7 ALL... (LED bulb)

8 LT7 EL... 8 LT7 GL... 8 LT7 FL...

8 LT7 3S...

MAX 1 MODULE

4 MODULES MAXIMUM

8 LT7 3B...

8 LT7 EL... 8 LT7 GL... 8 LT7 FL...

Connection module 8 LT7 CM 01... (metal) 8 LT7 CP 01... (plastic)

8 LT7 BP 03G

8 LT7 BP 01... (plastic)

8 LT7 TM... (metal) 8 LT7 BM 01 (metal)

8 LT7 BM 02 (metal) 8 LT7 BP 02... (plastic)

Fixing base and extension tubes

8 LT7 BP 03G

For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8.

Accessories and spare parts page 8-7 and 8

Dimensions page 8-10

Wiring diagrams page 8-11

8-3

Signal towers and beacons Signal towers Ø70mm/2.75”

Order code

Description

Qty per Wt pkg n°

[kg]

Pulsed or continuous sound modules, grey colour .

8 LT7 S … G

8 LT7 S0 BG 24VAC/DC, pulsed (90dB). IP54

0.240

8 LT7 S1 BG 24AC/DC, 16 sounds select. (max.80dB). IP65 8 LT7 S2 BG 24VAC/DC puls. sound (78dB) 8 LT7 S2 EG 110...120VAC or continuous 8 LT7 S2 MG 230...240VAC (75dB) . IP65

0.240

Pulsed or continuous sound modules, black colour . 8 LT7 S0 B

24VAC/DC, pulsed (90dB). IP54

8 LT7 S1 B

8 LT7 S …

24AC/DC, 16 sounds select. 1 (max.80dB). IP65 8 LT7 S2 B 24VAC/DC puls. sound 1 (78dB) 1 8 LT7 S2 E 110...120VAC or continuous 8 LT7 S2 M 230...240VAC (75dB) . IP65 1 Connection modules and cover (bottom entry).

0.240 0.240 0.240 0.240 0.240

8 LT7 CP 01G For plastic tubes, grey colour

8 LT7 CM 01G For metal tubes, grey colour

0.120

8 LT7 CP 01

For plastic tubes, black colour 1

0.110

8 LT7 CM 01

For metal tubes, black colour

0.120

0.110

Technical characteristics – The sound module must always be placed last, at the top of the tower (it cannot be fitted with an 8 LT7 3... multicoloured module). – Sound module consumption: • 8 LT7 S0 B...: 25mA • 8 LT7 S1 B...: 40mA • 8 LT7 S2 B...: 200mA • 8 LT7 S2 E...: 40mA • 8 LT7 S2 M...: 30mA – Material: polycarbonate – Max. number of sound modules: 1 per tower – Connections: screw clamp terminals and maximum conductor section 1.5mm2/16 AWG – Tightening torque: 0.5Nm/4.5lbin – Operating temperature: -20…+50°C (12VAC max. up to +40°C) – IEC degree of protection: IP65 (IP54 if 8 LT7 S0 B... sound module used). Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC, UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - file E318016) as Power Circuit and motor-mounted Apparatus - Stackable tower lights. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. Combinations Sound module (always on top) 8 LT7 S...

For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8. For 8 LT7 S2 B... = 84.5 dB. For 8 LT7 S2 B... = 82.6 dB.

7 MODULES MAXIMUM

8 LT7 CM 01 G 8 LT7 CP 01 G

8 LT7 CM 01 8 LT7 CP 01

Cover (supplied with 8 LT7 CM 01... and 8 LT7 CP 01... module)

8 LT7 ALB... (incandescent bulb)

8 LT7 EL... 8 LT7 GL... 8 LT7 FL...

8 LT7 ALL... (LED bulb)

Connection module 8 LT7 CM 01... (metal) 8 LT7 CP 01... (plastic)

8 LT7 BP 03G

8 LT7 BP 01... (plastic)

8 LT7 TM... (metal) 8 LT7 BM 01 (metal)

8 LT7 BM 02 (metal) 8 LT7 BP 02... (plastic)

Fixing base and extension tubes

8 LT7 BP 03G

For accessories and spare parts see page 8-7 and 8.

Accessories and spare parts page 8-7 and 8

Dimensions page 8-10

Wiring diagrams page 8-11

8-5

Signal towers and beacons Accessories and spare parts For signal towers and beacons

Order code

Description

Qty per Wt pkg n°

[kg]

Fixing bases. 8 LT7 BP 01G

Horizontal surface 1 mount, plastic grey colour with 100mm/3.94” extension

0.045

8 LT7 BP 02G

Vertical wall mount, plastic, grey colour

0.078

8 LT7 BP 03G

90° vertical wall mount, grey colour

0.080

8 LT7 BP 01

Horizontal surface 1 mount, plastic, black colour with 100mm/3.94” extension

0.045

8 LT7 BP 02

Vertical wall mount, plastic, black colour

0.078

8 LT7 BP 01G

General characteristics The assembly operation for the signal towers is simple and fast and does not require the use of any tools. The bayonet fitting with slight pressure and simple circular movement makes it possible to mount each element on top of the previous one. There are specific white marks to indicate the correct alignment.

1 2

Extension tube for plastic bases. 8 LT7 TP 0100G

100mm/3.94”, grey colour

0.029

8 LT7 TP 0100

100mm/3.94”, black colour

0.029

8 LT7 BP 01

8 LT7 BP 02G

8 LT7 BP 02

8 LT7 BP 03G

8 LT7 TP0100

8 LT7 TP0100G

Dimensions page 8-11

8-7

Signal towers and beacons Accessories and spare parts For signal beacons Ø62mm/2.44”

Order code

Description

Qty per Wt pkg n°

[kg]

Fixing bases for light modules. 8 LB6 BP 07G

For extension connection, 1 plastic, grey. Use with fixing bases 8 LP7 BP01G and 8 LP7 BP02G

0.020

8 LB6 BP 03

For horizontal mount, plastic, black

0.040

8 LB6 BP 05

For hole Ø22mm/0.87”, plastic, black

0.040

8 LB6 BP 07

For extension connection, 1 plastic, black. Use with fixing bases 8 LP7 BP01 and 8 LP7 BP02

0.020

8 LB6 BP07G

8 LB6 BP03

General characteristics The assembly operation of the light and sound modules is simple and fast and does not require the use of any tools. There are specific white marks to indicate the correct alignment.

Fixing bases for light and sound modules.

8 LB6 BP05

8 LB6 BP07

8 LB6 BP 08G

For extension connection, 1 plastic, grey. Use with fixing bases 8 LP7 BP01G and 8 LP7 BP02G

0.020

8 LB6 BP 04

For horizontal mount, plastic, black

0.040

8 LB6 BP 06

For hole Ø22mm/0.87”, plastic, black

0.040

8 LB6 BP 08

For extension connection, 1 plastic, black. Use with fixing bases 8 LP7 BP01 and 8 LP7 BP02

0.020

8 LB6 BP08G

8 LB6 BP04

8 LB6 BP06

8 LB6 BP08

Dimensions page 8-11

8-9

Page 9-2 PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES KB-KC TYPES • Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KB type • Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KC type • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing • Removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact blocks • Bi-directional versions • Unique fixing mechanism of operating head • IEC degree of protection IP65 • M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry available.

Page 9-19 PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES T SERIES • Dimensions to EN 50041 standards • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing • Heads rotatable in 4 different 90° angle positions • IEC degree of protection IP66 • PG13.5 cable entry.

Page 9-25 ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES FOR EMERGENCY STOPPING • Compliant to ISO 13850 standards • IEC degree of protection IP65 and IP66 • PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry.

Page 9-2 METAL LIMIT SWITCHES KM-KN TYPES • Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KM type • Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KN type • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing • Removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact blocks • Bi-directional versions • Unique fixing mechanism of operating head • IEC degree of protection IP65 • M20 cable entry; PG13.5 or 1/2 NPT entry available.

Page 9-21 METAL LIMIT SWITCHES PL SERIES • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing • Maximum of 2 auxiliary contacts • IEC degree of protection IP40 and IP65 • PG11 cable entry.

Page 9-26 PLASTIC MICRO SWITCHES KS TYPE • Polymer thermoplastic housing • Changeover contact switch • IEC degree of protection IP00 or IP20.

Page 9-18 PREWIRED METAL LIMIT SWITCHES KP TYPE • Dimensions to EN 50047 stadards • 2 metre long cable • IEC degree of protection IP67.

Page 9-23 ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES FOR NORMAL STOPPING • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing • IEC degree of protection IP40, IP65 and IP66 • PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry.

Page 9-27 FOOT SWITCHES • Versions with or without protection cover • Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing • Aluminium-zinc alloy housing • IEC degree of protection IP54 and IP65 • M20 cable entry.

LIMIT, MICRO AND FOOT SWITCHES

Dimensions to EN 50047 standards Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 Dimensions to EN 50041 standards Direct opening action of NC contacts Extensive range of operating heads Versions complete with interchangeable and rotatable heads Versions with removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact blocks.

Metal and plastic limit switches, K series (dimensions to/compatible to EN 50047) Top push rod plunger ........................................................................................................................................................ Top roller push plunger ...................................................................................................................................................... Roller centre push lever ..................................................................................................................................................... Roller side push lever ........................................................................................................................................................ Roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................................ Adjustable roller lever ........................................................................................................................................................ Ceramic rod lever .............................................................................................................................................................. Adjustable rod lever ........................................................................................................................................................... Wobble stick, omnidirectional ............................................................................................................................................ Hinge operating ................................................................................................................................................................. Slotted lever ...................................................................................................................................................................... Key operated ..................................................................................................................................................................... Accessories and spare parts .............................................................................................................................................. Prewired metal limit switches, K series ....................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

9 - 18

Plastic limit switches T series (dimensions to EN 50041) Top push rod plunger and roller lever.................................................................................................................................. Wobble stick, omnidirectional and key operated .................................................................................................................

9 - 19 9 - 20

Metal limit switches, PL series 21 22 22 22

Rope-pull lever limit switches for emergency stopping, ISO 13850 compliant ................................................ Plastic micro switches, K series .................................................................................................................................. Foot switches, K series ..................................................................................................................................................

9 9 9 9

- 23 - 25 - 26 - 27

9 - 28 9 - 35

S IGNALLING

AND

9 9 9 9

C ONTROL

Top push rod plunger, top roller push plunger, roller centre push lever ................................................................................ Latch and manual release ................................................................................................................................................... Manual reload and magnetic release .................................................................................................................................. Bi-directional .................................................................................................................................................................... Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping ................................................................................................

Page 10-2 GX SERIES • IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith 16A...40A ratings • Square-shaped contact body • IEC IP20 degree of protection of contacts • IEC IP65 degree of protection on front, standard supplied.

Page 10-12 GN SERIES • IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith 16A...125A ratings • Round-shaped contact body • IEC IP00 degree of protection of contacts • IEC IP40 degree of protection on front, standard supplied.

ROTARY CAM SWITCHES

Suitable for circuit connection, changeover, switching on and off as well as motor starting Possible special circuit schemes IEC IP40 or IP65 front degree of protection 2-screw fixing Wide range of features.

SEC. - PAGE PAGE SERIES GX GN Front mount versions On/Off switches. U version, front mount .................................................................................................................. Changeover switches with or without O (OFF). U version, front mount ..................................................................... Motor switches. U version, front mount .................................................................................................................. Voltemeter switches. Ammeter switches. U version, front mount ............................................................................. On/Off switches. U11 version, front ring mount with handle operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing .............................. On/Off switches. U12 version, front ring mount with key operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing ................................... On/Off safety switches. U25-U65 version, front mount with red/yellow padlockable handle ...................................... On/Off switches. U47 version, front snap on mount with handle operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing ........................ On/Off switches. U29D version, front snap on mount with key operation for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing ..........................

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

2 3 4 5 6 6 6 7 7

12 13 14 15 16 16 16 –– ––

10 -

––

10 10 10

18 18 18

Special circuit scheme form .............................................................................................................................. 10 -

11 20

19 20

Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 10 Wiring diagrams .................................................................................................... 10 Technical characteristics ......................................................................................... 10 -

22 25 26

23 25 26

Rear mount versions On/Off switches. O88-O98-O99 version, door coupling with red/yellow padlock system ........................................... On/Off switches. Changeover switches. Voltmeter switches. Ammeter switches. O48 version, modular DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mount ...............................................................

AND

C ONTROL

On/Off switches. Changeover switches. P version ................................................................................................... 10 Motor switches. P version with rotating handle ....................................................................................................... 10 On/Off switches. P25 version with padlockable handle ............................................................................................. 10 Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 10

S IGNALLING

Versions in enclosure

Rotary cam switches GX series U47 version front snap on mount with handle operation, for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF switches

Order code

IEC current AC1

Front plate size

Qty per pkg

Weight

[A]

[mm] n°

[kg]

0.100

ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. GX20 90 U47

General characteristics – IEC 20A conventional free air thermal current Ith ratings – Conductivity: 10mA 5V – Extended mechanical and electrical life – Rotation angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90° – Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts – Direct (positive) opening action ; safety function according to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 – IEC IP65 front degree of protection; IEC IP20 protection of contacts.

Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91. GX20 91 U47

Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. GX20 10 U47

0.120

Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92. GX20 92 U47

0.123

Selection See page 10-26. Optional Enlarged front plate for GX20 (65x65mm instead of standard 48x48): Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code E.g. GX20H 10 U47. Special versions In addition to standard types, particular versions are available with special operating circuit schemes. See page 10-20. Example of U47 switch mounting

U29D version front snap on mount with key operation, for Ø22mm/Ø0.88” fixing. ON/OFF switches

Order code

IEC current AC1

Front plate size

Qty per pkg

Weight

[A]

[mm] n°

[kg]

0.122

ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. GX20 90 U29D

Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91. GX20 91 U29D

Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. GX20 10 U29D

0.140

0.146

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and Canada (File E155982) as Manual Motor Controllers. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61058-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14.

Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92. GX20 92 U29D

Type

GX20

UL/CSA general use [A] 15

Accessories page 10-11

UL/CSA horsepower ratings 1 phase

3 phases

120V

230V

200V

230V

480V

600V

11/2

Dimensions page 10-22

Max IEC AC23 power [kW] at 400V 7.5

Wiring diagrams page 10-25

Technical characteristics pages 10-26 and 27

10-7

Page 11-4 GA SERIES 16A TO 160A (AC21A) • Switch disconnectors with direct operating handle and door coupling version • Switch disconnectors door mount version • Switch disconnectors in non-metallic enclosure • Changeover switches in non-metallic enclosure.

Page 11-16 GE SERIES 50A TO 1600A (AC21A) • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors • Three and four-pole switch disconnectors with NFC, NH and BS type fuse holders • Three and four-pole changeover switches; add-on motorised control unit available.

Page 11-24 FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS UP TO 850A 1000VDC (DC21B) • Direct operating and door coupling versions • Switch disconnectors in non-metallic enclosure.

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS

16A to 1600A ratings Versions: direct operating handle, door coupling, door mount and in plastic enclosure Wide range of accessories Types for photovoltaic applications up to 850A 1000VDC (DC21B) Changeover switches in polycarbonate enclosure.

GA series 16A to 160A Three-pole switch disconnectors .............................................................................................................................................. Fourth pole add on...................................................................................................................................................................... Add-on blocks and accessories ................................................................................................................................................. Empty enclosures .................................................................................................................................................................... Enclosed switch disconnectors ................................................................................................................................................. Enclosed changeover switches ..................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 11 11 11 11 11 11

4 4 5 11 12 14

11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

16 16 17 17 18 18 19 24

GE series 50A to 1600A Three-pole switch disconnectors .............................................................................................................................................. Three-pole switch disconnectors with fuse holder .................................................................................................................... Four-pole switch disconnectors ............................................................................................................................................... Four-pole switch disconnectors with fuse holder ...................................................................................................................... Three-pole changeover switches .............................................................................................................................................. Four-pole changeover switches ................................................................................................................................................. Add-on blocks and accessories ................................................................................................................................................. For photovoltaic applications .......................................................................................................................................

P ROTECTION

AND

I SOLATION

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 11 - 26 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 11 - 30 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 11 - 32

Switch disconnectors Overview GA series 16A to 160A

DIRECT OPERATING HANDLE AND DOOR COUPLING VERSION 36mm/1.42” width AC21A Three pole

DOOR MOUNT VERSION

70mm/2.75” width

16A

25A

32A

40A

63A

80A

4th pole - simultaneous closing

4th pole - early make

Three-pole for photovoltaic applications

100A 125A

36mm/1.42” width

70mm/2.75” width

160A

16A

25A

32A

40A

63A

80A

100A

125A

Fuse holder Mechanical 6-8 pole coupling system

Mechanical interlock for line switching

11 ENCLOSED VERSION - IEC/EN TYPE IP65 WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE AC21A 690V (IEC/EN) 16A

25A

32A

40A 63A

63A

ENCLOSED VERSION UL/CSA TYPE 4/4X WITH RED/ YELLOW OR BLACK HANDLE

80A 100A 125A 160A 16A

25A

32A

40A

63A

16A

25A

32A

40A

60A

60A 100A 100A 100A

General use 600VAC (UL/CSA) Enclosure width 100mm/3.94”

80A 100A 125A 160A ––

Enclosure width 220mm/8.66”

175mm/6.89”

100mm/3.94”

175mm/ 6.89”

220mm/8.66”

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS Three pole

Four pole

Enclosure width CHANGEOVER SWITCHES

175mm/6.89”

220mm/8.66”

Three pole

Four pole

GE series 50A to 1600A

Switch disconnectors

Changeover switches

DIRECT OPERATING AND DOOR COUPLING VERSION AC21A

50A

125A

160A

200A

250A

315A

400A

500A

630A

800A

1000A

1250A

1600A

SWITCH DISCONNECTORS 50A TO 1600A Three and four pole Three and four pole with NFC fuse holder

Three and four pole with NH fuse holder

Three and four pole with BS fuse holder

Four-pole for photovoltaic applications

CHANGEOVER SWITCHES 160A TO 1600A Three and four pole

Motorised control unit

11-2

Switch disconnectors GA series

VERSATILITY! COMPACT SIZE The three-pole 16A to 63A switch disconnectors, are made up of a single unit body, merely 36mm/1.42” wide, while the 63A to 160A ratings, of another body size of only 70mm/2.75” wide.

CERTIFICATIONS The 16A to 63A types are listed for Canada and the USA, certified according to UL508/CSA C22.2 n° 14. The 63A to 125A types are listed for Canada and the USA, certified according to UL98A/CSA C22.2 n° 4.

ACCESSORY FLEXIBILITY Mounting and removal of the fourth pole and add-on blocks are simple and quick operations with no need for tools.

VERSIONS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS The GA... and GD type switch disconnectors are suitable for both small domestic installations as well as those with a large number of solar cells. Use up to 1000V in DC21B category. SIDE MOUNT ADD-ON FOURTH POLE Simultaneous closing or early-make contact operation of the fourth pole with respect to the switch disconnector poles.

ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS Only one add-on block suitable for all the 9 ratings of switch disconnectors, having simultaneous closing with the switch disconnector poles. There are versions with an early-break NO contact with respect to the switch disconnector. MAXIMUM COMBINATIONS Mounting up to 4 auxiliary contacts or 1 fourth pole and 3 auxiliary contacts (2 blocks always on the right and 2 on the left side) of each switch disconnector. The earth and neutral terminals and fuse holder also can be added.

6 AND 8 POLE VERSION Mechanical coupling systems are available for the 16A to 160A switch disconnectors with direct operating handle to provide 6/8 pole disconnectors or a mechanical interlock mechanism for the line changeover function (I - 0 - II). The enclosed switches are cULus certified.

SWITCH STATUS INDICATION The switch open or closed state is clearly and unequivocally seen at a distance thanks to the simple and modern design of the handles.

11 DIN RAIL FIXING Switch disconnector mounting on and removal from the 35mm DIN rail are done by simply pressing it downwards with no need for tools.

ANTI-SLIDE INSERT FOR DIN RAIL

FUSE HOLDERS

HANDLE ADAPTABILITY The extensive number of fixing holes in the front handle plate can replace switch disconnectors, normally found out in the field, without having to drill others.

A three-pole fuse holder can be added to 16A to 32A switch disconnectors, with direct operating handle, to provide a single compact unit. Access to the fuse can be made only when the disconnector is in OFF position.

REDUCED HANDLE THICKNESS GAX61 and GAX 61 B handles are only 23mm thick. 9mm/0.35”

DOOR COUPLING HANDLE WITH FRONT DIMENSIONS 48X48MM The GAX68 and GAX68B handles can be used in panels and boxes of limited dimensions.

IP65 PADLOCKABLE HANDLES Wide range of selector or pistol grip handles, with screw or ring fixing. All handles are equipped with built-in padlockable mechanism. The selector handle GAX63... snaps onto the door mount switch disconnectors in 16A to 40A ratings, with no need for tools.

A rubber pad insert prevents the sliding of switch disconnectors on the DIN rail even when out of tolerance or mounted vertically.

TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY Terminals are suitable to accept any type of cable: flexible, rigid, AWG wire. The terminals can withstand high tightening torques. UL508A HANDLE VERSION In compliance with UL508A standards, which require internal panel inspection by authorised personnel with power applied, selector and pistol handles are available with defeatable feature of the door coupling when the switch disconnector is closed, i.e. in ON position.

HIGH IEC CAPABILITY IN AC23 The rated currents Ie in AC23 at 690VAC are the highest of the category.

MODULARITY The switch disconnectors can be mounted in modular panels.

23mm/0.90”

11-3

Switch disconnectors GA series 16A to 160A

IEC rated operational current Ie

[A]

Qty Wt per pkg

AC22A ( 690V) AC23A ( 415V) n°

[kg]

Direct operating version, complete with black handle. For door coupling version, separately purchase the handle and shaft extension (see page 11-8 and 11-10).

GA016 A... GA040 A GA063 SA

GA063 A... GA160 A

GA016 A

0.146

GA025 A

0.146

GA032 A

0.146

GA040 A

0.146

GA063 SA

0.148

GA063 A

0.388

GA080 A

0.388

GA100 A

100

0.388

GA125 A

125

0.388

GA160 A

160

125

0.388

Door mount version, complete with shaft extension (purchase handle separately, see page 11-8).

11 GA016 C... GA040 C

GA063 C... GA125 C

Fourth pole add on

GA016 C

0.170

GA025 C

0.170

GA032 C

0.170

GA040 C

0.170

GA063 C

0.404

GA080 C

0.404

GA100 C

100

0.404

GA125 C

125

0.404

Operational characteristics – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 1000V – Rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV – Electrical life in AC21A: • 100,000 cycles GA016...GA040, GAX...40A/C • 15,000 cycles GA063 SA, GAX...063SA • 30,000 cycles GA063...GA125, GAX...063...125A/C • 1,500 cycles GA160A, GAX42 160A – Mechanical life: • 100,000 cycles GA016...GA040 A/C, GA063 SA, GAX...40A/C, GAX...063SA • 30,000 cycles GA063...GA160A, GAX...063...125A/C, GAX42 160A. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained:

Type Order code

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith AC21A ( 690V)

IEC rated operational current Ie

Qty Wt per pack

GA016 A...GA040 A

––

GA063 SA

––

GA016 C...GA040 C

––

GA063 A...GA125 A

––

AC22A ( 690V) AC23A ( 415V)

GA160 A-GAX42 160A

––

[A]

GA063 C...GA125 C

––

Simultaneous closing operation as switch disconnector poles. For GA...A version.

GAX41 040A-GAX42 040A

––

GAX41 063SA-GAX42 063SA

––

GAX42 040A 40

0.045

GAX41 040C-GAX42 040C

––

GAX42 063SA 63

0.045

GAX41 125A-GAX42 125C

––

GAX42 063A

0.126

GAX42 063A...GAX42 125A

––

GAX42 080A

0.126

GAX42 063C...GAX42 125C

––

GAX42 100A

100

0.126

Certification obtained.

GAX42 125A

125

0.126

GAX42 160A

160

125

0.126

GAX42 040C 40

0.045

GAX42 063C

0.128

GAX42 080C

0.128

GAX42 100C

100

0.128

GAX42 125C

125

0.128

[A]

GAX42...A GAX41...A GAX42 063SA GAX41 063SA

General characteristics – 16A to 160A – Available versions: • Direct operating • Door mount • Door coupling. Use switch disconnector with direct operating handle and separately purchase the handle and shaft extension for this version. See pages 11-8 and 10. – Compact and modular size – Screw or 35mm DIN rail fixing – Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory.

KEMA

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith AC21A ( 690V)

EAC

Order code

cULus according to UL508 / CSA C22.2 no. 14 cULus according to UL98A / CSA C22.2 no. 4

Three-pole switch disconnectors

n°

[kg]

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, UL98A, CSA C22.2.

For GA...C version.

Early make closing operation with respect to switch disconnector poles. For GA...A version. GAX42 040C GAX41 040C

GAX41 040A 40

0.046

GAX41 063SA 63

0.046

GAX41 125A 125

125

0.116

For GA...C version. GAX41 040C 40

0.046

GAX41 125C 125

125

0.128

11-4

Accessories page 11-5 to 10

Strokes of GA poles (main poles and add-on pole) Travel 0→1 0° GA016A/C…GA040A/C - GA063SA Main poles GAX42040A/C - GAX42063SA Simultaneous closing fourth-pole add on GAX41040A/C - GAX41063SA Early-make fourth-pole add on

30°

60° 60° 60° 55°

GA063A/C…GA125A/C, GA160A Main poles GAX42063A/C…GAX42125A/C, GAX42160A Simultaneous closing fourth-pole add on GAX41125A/C Early-make fourth-pole add on OFF

55° 55° 48°

For GA016 A...GA040 A only. For GA063 SA only. For GA016 C...GA040 C only. For GA063 A...GA125 A only. For GA063 C...GA125 C only.

Dimensions page 11-26

Wiring diagrams page 11-30

90°

Technical characteristics page 11-32

Switch disconnectors GA series 16A to 160A Accessories Handles

Order code Characteristics

Qty Wt per pkg no.

[kg

DOOR COUPLING VERSION PADLOCKABLE, IP65 (4X). Red/yellow.

GAX61

GAX62

GAX61

For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C, GA040 D and GD... Screw fixing. Handle with selector flush-mounted . 5mm/0.2”

0.073

GAX62

For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C, GA040 D and GD... Screw fixing. Handle with selector protruding . 5mm/0.2”

0.072

GAX63

For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA016 C... GA040 C, GA040 D and GD... Ring fixing. Handle with selector protruding . 5mm/0.2”

0.068

GAX63 2

Per GA...A, GA063 SA, GA040 D and GD... Ring fixing lowered. Handle with selector protruding. 5mm/0.2”

0.057

GAX64

For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA040 D and GD... Ring fixing. Handle with selector protruding - defeatable (requirement UL508A) . 5mm/0.2”

0.064

GAX66

For GA063 A...GA160 A, and GAX60 01. Screw fixing. Pistol handle - defeatable (req. UL 508A) . 7mm/0.3”

0.140

GAX68

For GA016 A...GA063 SA, 1 GA040 D, GA016 C...GA040 C and GD... Screw fixing. Handle with selector lowered . 5mm/0.2”

0.060

GAX61 B

For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C, GA040 D and GD... Screw fixing. Handle with selector flush-mounted . 5mm/0.2”

0.073

GAX62 B

For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA...C, GA040 D and GD... Screw fixing. Handle with selector protruding . 5mm/0.2”

0.072

GAX63 B

For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA016 C... GA040 C, GA040 D and GD... Ring fixing. Handle with selector protruding . 5mm/0.2”

0.068

GAX63 1B For GA…A, GA063 SA, GA016 C... 1 GA040 C, GA040 D and GD... Ring fixing. Handle with selector protruding padlockable in ON pos. (UNI 9490 and UNI EN 12845) . 5mm/0.2”

0.074

GAX63 2B For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA040 D and GD... Ring fixing lowered. Handle with selector protruding. 5mm/0.2”

0.057

GAX64 B

For GA...A, GA063 SA, GA040 D 1 and GD... Ring fixing. Handle with selector protruding - defeatable (requirement UL508A) . 5mm/0.2”

0.064

GAX66 B

For GA063 A...GA160 A and GAX60 01. Screw fixing. Pistol handle - defeatable (req. UL 508A) . 7mm/0.3”

0.140

GAX67 B

For mechanical interlock GAX50... (I-O-II) . 5mm/0.2”

0.078

GAX68 B

For GA016 A...GA063 SA, 1 GA04 0 D, GA016 C...GA040 C and GD... Screw fixing. Handle with selector lowered . 5mm/0.2”

0.060

11 GAX66

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus for GAX68. See the table on page 11-10.

Black. GAX68

GAX63 B

GAX63 2B Low profile

GAX67 B

For GA...A and GA040 D switch disconnectors, separately purchase extension GAX7... Snap-on fixing of GA016 C...GA040 C switch disconnectors with the handle. Separately purchase GAX7…A shaft extension and GAX60 B handle having a 7mm square section, not required for GAX60 01.

11-8

ACCESSORIES FOR DOOR COUPLING CONTROL For GAX66 and GAX66 B handles. GAX60 B

Adaptor 7mm/0.3” per GA063 A...GA160 A

Dimensions page 11-27

General and operational characteristics – Choice of handle fixing: ring or screw – Fixing handle interaxis: • GAX61/61B-GAX62/62B-GAX67B: 36x36mm/1.42x1.42” or 48x48mm/1.89x1.89” • GAX66/66B: 36x36mm/1.42x1.42” • GAX68/68B: 28x28mm/1.10x1.10” or 36x36mm/1.42x1.42” • Compatible with pre-existing drillings of most common types in the marketplace – 1 to 3 padlocks in the Ø4…8mm/0.16...0.31” for all handles (except GAX68 only one Ø4… 8mm/0.16...0.31”) – Front plate dimensions: • GAX61/61B-GAX62/62B-GAX63/63B-GAX64/64BGAX67/67B: 65x65mm/2.56x2.56” • GAX66/66B: Ø75mm/2.95” • GAX68/68B: 48x48mm/1.89x1.89” – Tightening torque: • Fixing ring types: 2.3Nm/20.4lbin • GAX60B: 0.8Nm/7lbin • GAX66/66B: 1.5Nm/13.3lbin • All others: 1Nm/9lbin – Degree of protection for all: IP65 – Degree of protection for GAX66/66B: IP66; for UL/CSA data see detail on page 11-10.

0.010

Switch disconnectors GA series 16A to 160A Enclosed switch disconnectors IEC/EN IP65 non-metallic enclosure

Order code

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith AC21A ( 690V)

Qty per pkg

[A]

n째

[kg]

Components Enclosure Switch disconnector

Handle

THREE POLE. With red/yellow handle.

GAZ016...GAZ040...

GAZ016

0.450

GAZ1

GA016 A

GAX61

GAZ025

0.450

GAZ1

GA025 A

GAX61

GAZ032

0.450

GAZ1

GA032 A

GAX61

GAZ040

0.450

GAZ1

GA040 A

GAX61

GAZ063 SA

0.870

GAZ2

GA063 SA

GAX61

GAZ063 C

1.220

GAZ2

GA063 A

GAX61

GAZ080 C

1.220

GAZ2

GA080 A

GAX61

GAZ100 C

100

1.220

GAZ2

GA100 A

GAX61

GAZ125

125

2.220

GAZ3

GA125 A

GAX61

GAZ160

160

2.220

GAZ3

GA160 A

GAX61

THREE POLE. With black handle.

GAZ063...100 C

GAZ016 B

0.450

GAZ1 B

GA016 A

GAX61 B

GAZ025 B

0.450

GAZ1 B

GA025 A

GAX61 B

GAZ032 B

0.450

GAZ1 B

GA032 A

GAX61 B

GAZ040 B

0.450

GAZ1 B

GA040 A

GAX61 B

GAZ063 SAB 63

0.870

GAZ2 B

GA063 SA

GAX61 B

GAZ063 CB

1.220

GAZ2 B

GA063 A

GAX61 B

GAZ080 CB

1.220

GAZ2 B

GA080 A

GAX61 B

GAZ100 CB

100

1.220

GAZ2 B

GA100 A

GAX61 B

GAZ125 B

125

2.220

GAZ3 B

GA125 A

GAX61 B

GAZ160 B

160

2.220

GAZ3 B

GA160 A

GAX61 B

Enclosure

Switch 4th pole disconnector

Handle

FOUR POLE. With red/yellow handle.

GAZ125... GAZ160...

11-12

GAZ016 T4

0.550

GAZ1

GA016 A

GAX42040A

GAX61

GAZ032 T4

0.550

GAZ1

GA032 A

GAX42040A

GAX61

GAZ040 T4

GAX61

0.550

GAZ1

GA040 A

GAX42040A

GAZ063 SAT4 63

0.780

GAZ2

GA063 SA

GAX42063SA

GAX61

GAZ063 CT4 63

1.250

GAZ2

GA063 A

GAX42063A

GAX61

GAZ100 CT4 100

1.250

GAZ2

GA100 A

GAX42100A

GAX61

GAZ125 T4

125

2.500

GAZ3

GA125 A

GAX42125A

GAX61

GAZ160 T4

160

2.500

GAZ3

GA160 A

GAX42160A

GAX61

GAZ016 T4B 16

0.550

GAZ1 B

GA016 A

GAX42040A

GAX61 B

GAZ032 T4B 32

0.550

GAZ1 B

GA032 A

GAX42040A

GAX61 B GAX61 B

FOUR POLE. With black handle.

GAZ040 T4B 40

0.550

GAZ1 B

GA040 A

GAX42040A

GAZ063 SAT4B 63

0.780

GAZ2 B

GA063 SA

GAX42063SA

GAX61 B

GAZ063 CT4B 63

1.250

GAZ2 B

GA063 A

GAX42063A

GAX61 B

GAZ100 CT4B 100

1.250

GAZ2 B

GA100 A

GAX42100A

GAX61 B

GAZ125 T4B 125

2.500

GAZ3 B

GA125 A

GAX42125A

GAX61 B

GAZ160 T4B 160

2.500

GAZ3 B

GA160 A

GAX42160A

GAX61 B

Dimensions page 11-28

Wiring diagrams page 11-30

Technical characteristics page 11-32 and 37

Switch disconnectors GA series 16A to 160A Enclosed changeover switches UL/CSA Type 4/4X non-metallic enclosure

Order code

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith AC21A ( 690V)

IEC rated operational current Ie

Qty Wt per pkg

AC23B AC23B ( 400V) ( 500V)

[A]

n°

[kg]

Components Enclosure Switch disconnectors

Interlock

Handle

3-pole line changeover switches I-0-II.

GAZ 025 E...GAZ 063SA E...

GAZ025 ET6

1.060

GAZ UL

2x GA025A

GAX5000

GAX67 B

GAZ040 ET6

1.060

GAZ UL

2x GA040A

GAX5000

GAX67 B

GAZ063SA ET6 63

1.070

GAZ UL

2x GA063SA

GAX5000

GAX67 B

GAZ080 ET6

2.950

GAZ3

2x GA080A

GAX5001

GAX67 B

GAZ125 ET6

125

100

2.950

GAZ3

2x GA125A

GAX5001

GAX67 B

GAZ160 ET6

160

125

100

2.950

GAZ3

2x GA160A

GAX5001

GAX67 B

Enclosure

Switch disconnectors

Interlock

Handle

4-pole line changeover switches I-0-II.

GAZ 080 E... GAZ 160 E...

GAZ025 ET8

1.060

GAZ UL

2x GA025A + 2x GAX42040A

GAX5000

GAX67 B

GAZ040 ET8

1.060

GAZ UL

2x GA040A+ 2x GAX42040A

GAX5000

GAX67 B

GAZ063SA ET8 63

1.070

GAZ UL

2x GA063SA+ GAX5000 2x GAX42063SA

GAX67 B

GAZ080 ET8

2.950

GAZ3

2x GA080A+ 2x GAX42080A

GAX5001

GAX67 B

GAZ125 ET8

125

100

2.950

GAZ3

2x GA125A+ 2x GAX42125A

GAX5001

GAX67 B

GAZ160 ET8

160

125

100

2.950

GAZ3

2x GA160A+ 2x GAX42160A

GAX5001

GAX67 B

UL/CSA ratings Type

1 phase [HP]

120V

3 phase [HP]

240V

200208V

General use at 600VAC

Shortcircuit rating at 600VAC

Fuse class max rating at 600V

[kA]

Type - [A]

240V

480V

600V

[A]

GAZ025... 11/2

71/2

RK5 - 30A

GAZ040... 2

RK5 - 45A

GAZ063S... 2

71/2

RK5 - 45A

NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ025-GAZ040ET... types, according to UL508 and CSA 22.2 n°14. For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending.

Type

1 phase [HP]

3 phase [HP]

General use at 600VAC

Shortcircuit rating at 600VAC

Max fuse rating at 600V

[kA]

[A]

120V

240V

200240V 208V

480V

600V

[A]

GA080...

100

GA125...

71/2

100

For major details contact our Customer Service office; see contact details on inside front cover.

General characteristics – Enclosure material: Polycarbonate – Possibility of fitting: • 2 contact blocks both on the right and left side for GAZ…ET6 types • 1 contact block both on the right and left side for GAZ…ET8 types – Padlockable handle complete with extension – Earth and neutral plate terminals – Sealable enclosure cover – Tightening torque for cover screws: 1.5Nm/13lbin – Degree of protection: IP65; UL/CSA type 4/4X – Cable entry: • GAZ025…GAZ063SA… types: PG16/M25 and PG29/M32 knockouts • GAZ080… and GAZ160… types: Smooth surfaces; can be drilled by customer. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus (except GAZ160E...), EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-1, UL 508 and CSA C22.2 no. 14 (up to GAZ063SA…), UL98A and CSA C22.2 no. 4 (for all others except GAZ160E... ).

NOTE: Above ratings are valid for GAZ080-GAZ125ET... types, according to UL98 and CSA C22.2 N°4. For indication and references purposes only while cCSAus is pending. Voltage value not considered in UL98 / CSA 22.2 n°4 standards so not indicated in UL product marking.

11-14

Dimensions page 11-29

Wiring diagrams page 11-30

Technical characteristics page 11-32

Switch disconnectors GE series 50A to 1600A Add-on blocks and accessories Order code

Description

Qty Wt per pkg n°

[kg]

Selection of add-on contacts and accessories Refer to the combinations given on pages 11-21 to 23 and 11-25 for a correct choice based on the switch disconnector type used.

0.032

General characteristics for auxiliary contacts IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 16A.

Auxiliary contacts . GEX10 11 1NA/1NC changeover

GEX10...

Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0050 F, GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N and GE0160 NT4. GEX10 11N 1NA/1NC changeover

0.024

Auxiliary contacts for switch disconnector types GE0160 E, GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and GE1600 ET4. GEX10 11M 1NA/1NC changeover

0.016

0.040

Adapter kit for 35mm DIN fixing. GEX89 00 GEX89 00

For GE...P types only

Set of terminal covers consisting of pieces given below. See pages from 11-21 to 11-23 and 11-25 for choice according to switch disconnector type. Screw fixing. GEX81 01

1-piece set, transparent sheet covering 4 poles

0.048

GEX81 11

2-piece set, each covers two poles 1

0.080

GEX81 21

2-piece set, each covers two poles 1

0.140

GEX81 31

2-piece set, each covers two poles 1

0.170

GEX81 41

2-piece set, each covers two poles 1

0.440

GEX82 01

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.090

GEX82 03

4-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.120

GEX82 11

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.120

GEX82 12

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.120

General characteristics for motorised control unit – IEC rated auxiliary supply voltage: 230VAC/DC – 4 static outputs, 24VDC 120mA total – 4 inputs, contacts powered at 24VDC or 5VDC (500mA) for changeover control (pulsed or continuous) – RS485 Modbus (only for GEX692, GEX693) serial port for control, monitoring, programming – Padlockable at 0 position – Programming by position inputs – 4-digit display for status-error indications. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-3.

Snap-on fixing. GEX8...

GEX691C

GEX82 13

4-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.160

GEX82 21

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.240

GEX82 22

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.240

GEX82 23

4-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.320

GEX82 31

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.340

GEX82 32

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.340

GEX82 33

4-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.440

GEX83 11

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.120

GEX83 12

4-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.160

GEX83 21

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.260

GEX83 22

4-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.340

GEX83 31

3-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.360

GEX83 32

4-piece set, each covers one pole 1

0.460

Motorised control unit for changeover switches. Rated auxiliary supply voltage 230VAC/DC. Complete with control handle, shaft extension and fixing elements. GEX69 0C

For GE0160 E...GE0200 E and GE0160 ET4...GE0200 ET4

3.000

GEX69 1C

For GE0201 E...GE0400 E and GE0201 ET4...GE0400 ET4

3.000

GEX69 2

For GE0500 E...GE0800 E and GE0500 ET4...GE0800 ET4

5.340

GEX69 3

For GE1000 E...GE1600 E and GE1000 ET4...GE1600 ET4

5.753

Unsuitable for switch disconnectors type GE0050 F, GE0050 FT4, GE0125 F, GE0125 FT4, GE0160 N, GE0160 NT4, GE0160 E, GE0200 E, GE0160 ET4, GE0200 ET4, GE1600 E and GE1600 ET4. Changeover contact.

GEX69...

Wiring diagrams page 11-31

11-19

Switch disconnectors For photovoltaic applications GA series switch disconnectors

Order code

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith

IEC rated operational current Ie DC21B

Qty Wt per pkg

Poles in series 3 poles 4 poles 500V 600V 800V [A]

[A]

n°

[kg]

Switch disconnector complete with black handle. GA040 D

GA040 D

––

0.135

GAX42 040D 40

––

0.040

Fourth pole. GAX42...D

GD series switch disconnectors

Connection of 4 poles in series. For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page 11-37.

Order code

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith

IEC rated operational current Ie DC21B

Qty Wt per pkg

800V

1000V 1200V

[A]

n°

[kg]

Switch disconnector complete with black handle.

GD040 AT4

GD025 AT2

––

0.100

GD032 AT3

––

0.110

GD040 AT4

0.120

For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page 11-37.

General characteristics – Up to 40A, 1000VDC and 32A, 1200VDC – Modular construction – Jumpers for connecting the poles in series supplied as standard with disconnectors GD series... – Available versions: • Direct operating • Door coupling version. Use switch disconnector with direct actuator and separately purchase the handle and shaft extension for this version. See pages 11-8 to 11-10 – Screw or 35mm DIN rail fixing – Padlockable in 0 position with no extra accessory. Operational characteristics – Rated insulation voltage for GA...D and GD... Ui: 1000V (pollution degree 3) – Rated insulation voltage for GD... Ui: 1500V (pollution degree 2) – Rated impulse withstand Uimp: 8kV – Mechanical life: • 100,000 cycles GA040 D • 10,000 cycles GD... – Operating temperature: -25°C...+55°C – Storage temperature: -40°C...+70°C – Degree of protection: IP20. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93602) as Manual Motor Controllers, to UL508/CSA C22.2 n° 14 for GA040 D and GAX42 040D. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508. Strokes of GA…D types (main poles and add-on pole) Travel 0→1 0° GA040 D Main poles GAX420 40D Simultaneous fourth-pole add on

IEC/EN IP65 enclosed GD series switch disconnectors

Order code

30°

60° 60° 60°

Components Enclosure Switch disconnector

Handle

0.450

GAZ1

GD025 AT2

GAX61

1.050

GAZ2

GD032 AT3

GAX61

1.050

GAZ2

GD040 AT4

GAX61

––

0.450

GAZ1B

GD025 AT2

GAX61B

––

1.050

GAZ2B

GD032 AT3

GAX61B

1.050

GAZ2B

GD040 AT4

GAX61B

IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith

IEC rated operational current Ie DC21B

Qty Wt per pkg

800V

1000V 1200V

[A]

n°

[kg]

GAZ025 DT2 25

––

GAZ032 DT3 32

––

GAZ040 DT4 40

GAZ025 DT2B 25

GAZ032 DT3B 32

GAZ040 DT4B 40

90°

With red/yellow handle.

GAZ016 DT2

With black handle.

For other operational voltages, refer to technical characteristics on page 11-37.

For further details contact our Customer Service office; see contact details on inside front cover.

General characteristics – Enclosure material: ABS – Possible accessories to mount afterwards, if any required: • GAX30 to provide shielded cable connection continuity (e.g. with static converters) – Padlockable handles – Sealable cover – Tightening torque for cover screws: • GAZ025…: 1.3Nm/16lbin • Other types: 1.5Nm/13lbin. – Degree of protection: IP65 – Cable entry: • GAZ025... types: PG16/M25 and PG13.5/M20 knockouts • GAZ032... and GAZ040... types: PG16/M25 and PG29/M32 knockouts.

GAZ040 DT4

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60947-1.

11-24

Add-on blocks and accessories page 11-5 to 10

Wiring diagrams page 11-31

Technical characteristics page 11-37

Page 12-2 AC FUSE HOLDERS • Version without indicator: 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N • Version with indicator: 1P • For fuses 10x38, 14x51 and 22x58mm IEC class gG or aM. • IEC rated current: 32A, 50A, 100A • IEC rated voltage: 690VAC.

Page 12-2 AC FUSE HOLDERS CLASS CC FOR NORTH AMERICAN MARKET • Version without indicator: 1P, 2P, 3P • Version with indicator: 1P • For 10x38mm UL/CSA class CC fuses • IEC rated current: 30A • IEC rated voltage: 600VAC.

Page 12-3 DC FUSE HOLDERS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS • Version without indicator: 1P, 2P • Version with indicator: 1P, 2P • For 10x38mm IEC class gPV fuses • IEC rated current: 32A • IEC rated voltage: 1000VDC • IEC utilisation category: DC20B.

Page 12-3 DC FUSES FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS • 10x38mm, IEC class gPV • Rated current: 20A • Rated voltage: 1000VDC.

FUSE

HOLDERS AND FUSES

Modular size for 10x38, 14x51 and 22x58mm fuses Finger safe - IEC IP20 degree of protection against accidental contact with live parts and with sealable cover for operatorsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; safety Version with status indicator to quickly determine if the fuse is still operative or needs to be replaced UL and CSA certified versions.

Fuse holders AC fuse holders................................................................................................................................................................. DC fuse holders for photovoltaic applications..................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 12 - 2 12 - 3

Fuses for photovoltaic applications .................................................................................... 12 - 3 Accessories ................................................................................................................. 12 - 3

C IRCUIT P ROTECTION

AND

I SOLATION

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 12 - 4 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 12 - 4 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 12 - 5

Page 13-2 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS UP TO 63A • 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P and 4P versions • IEC rated current In: 1…63A • IEC short-circuit breaking capacity Icn: 10kA (6kA for 1P+N) • Trip characteristic curve: Type B, C, D • UL 1077 or UL 489 certified versions.

Page 13-10 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 80…125A • 1P, 2P, 3P and 4P versions • IEC rated current In: 80…125A • IEC short-circuit breaking capacity Icn: 10kA • Trip characteristic curve: Type C, D • UL 1077 certified versions.

Page 13-11 ADD-ON BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES • Auxiliary and indicator contacts • Undervoltage trip releases • Shunt trip releases • Connection accessories • UL 1077 or UL 489 certified versions • Modular 16A socket.

Page 13-12 RESIDUAL BLOCKS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS UP TO 63A • 2P, 3P and 4P versions • IEC rated current In: 40 and 63A • Residual current: 30 and 300mA • Residual current operating characteristic: Type A.

Page 13-12 RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS 25…63A • 2P and 4P versions • IEC rated current In: 25, 40 and 63A • IEC rated residual operating current IΔn: 30mA and 300mA • Residual current operating characteristic: Type A, B and AC.

Page 13-13 RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION UP TO 40A • 1P+N versions • IEC rated current In: 6…40A • IEC rated short-circuit capacity Icn: 10kA • Trip characteristic curve: Type C • Residual current: 30 and 300mA • Residual current operating characteristic: Type AC and A.

MINIATURE

AND RESIDUAL CIRCUIT BREAKERS

UL 1077 and UL 489 certified versions High breaking capacity Various trip characteristic curves: Type B, C or D Wide 1…125A current range Residuals with trip characteristic curves type A, AC and B Accessories available.

Miniature circuit breakers 1…63A, UL 1077 1P - 10kA, 1 module, curve types B, C and D .................................................................................................................. 1P+N - 6kA, 1 module, curve type C ................................................................................................................................ 1P+N - 6kA, 2 modules, curve type C .............................................................................................................................. 2P - 10kA, 2 modules, curve types B, C and D ................................................................................................................ 3P - 10kA, 3 modules, curve types B, C and D ................................................................................................................ 4P - 10kA, 4 modules, curve types B, C and D ................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 13 13 13 13 13 13

2 3 3 4 5 6

Miniature circuit breakers 1...63A, UL 489 1P - 10kA, 1 module ........................................................................................................................................................ 2P - 10kA, 2 modules ....................................................................................................................................................... 3P - 10kA, 3 modules .......................................................................................................................................................

13 - 7 13 - 8 13 - 9

Miniature circuit breakers 80…125A, UL 1077 1P, 2P, 3P and 4P - 10kA, curve type C ........................................................................................................................... 3P and 4P - 10kA, curve type D ...................................................................................................................................... Add-on blocks and accessories ...................................................................................................................................

13 - 10 13 - 10 13 - 11

AND

C IRCUIT P ROTECTION

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 13 - 14 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 13 - 14 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 13 - 15

I SOLATION

Residual blocks .............................................................................................................................................................. 13 - 12 Residual current operated circuit breakers .............................................................................................................. 13 - 12 Residual current operated circuit breakers with overcurrent protection ........................................................... 13 - 13

Miniature and residual circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers 1...63A, UL 489 1P - 10kA 1 module

Order code

Curve IEC Rat. N° of Qty Wt In volt. DIN per mod. pkg Type

[A] [V]

n°

[kg]

One pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve characteristic. P1 MB UH 1P C01

P1 MB... 1P...

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C01V6 C

1.6 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C02

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C03

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C04

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C05

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C06

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C07

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C08

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C10

10 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C12

12 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C13

13 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C15

15 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C16

16 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C20

20 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C25

25 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C30

30 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P C32

32 277

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P C35

35 120

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P C40

40 120

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P C50

50 120

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P C60

60 120

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P C63

63 120

0.133

General characteristics These devices comply with the UL 489 standard, mostly used in the North American markets, are designed to protect feeder circuits, the part of the system from the network supply point to the protection device for a branch circuit. They can in any case be used on the international market thanks to compliance with the IEC/EN60947-2 standard as well. They have characteristics of tripping instantaneously defined as follows: – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and inductive with low inrush current) – D-curve: instantaneous trip 10…14 times In for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and current such as motors). Operational characteristics – Dissipation per pole: 3…13W – Rated voltage 1…32A: 277V (UL489) – Rated voltage 35…63A: 120V (UL489) – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V (IEC/EN60947-2) – Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV (IEC/EN60947-2) – Rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC (IEC/EN60947-2) – DC operational voltage: 60V Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus. Compliant with standards: UL 489, IEC/EN 60947-2.

One pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve characteristic. P1 MB UH 1P D01

Accessories page 13-11

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D01V6 D

1.6 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D02

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D03

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D04

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D05

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D06

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D07

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D08

277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D10

10 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D12

12 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D13

13 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D15

15 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D16

16 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D20

20 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D25

25 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D30

30 277

0.133

P1 MB UH 1P D32

32 277

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P D35

35 120

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P D40

40 120

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P D50

50 120

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P D60

60 120

0.133

P1 MB UL 1P D63

63 120

0.133

Dimensions page 13-14

Technical characteristics page 13-15

13-7

Miniature and residual circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers 1...63A, UL 489 2P - 10kA 2 modules

Order code

Cur- IEC Rated N° of Qty Wt ve In voltage DIN per mod. pkg Type [A] [V]

n°

[kg]

Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve characteristic. 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C01V6 C

1.6 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C02

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C03

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C04

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C05

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C06

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C07

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C08

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C10

10 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C12

12 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C13

13 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C15

15 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C16

16 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C20

20 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C25

25 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C30

30 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C32

32 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UL 2P C35

35 240

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P C01

P1 MB... 2P...

P1 MB UL 2P C40

40 240

0.255

P1 MB UL 2P C50

50 240

0.255

P1 MB UL 2P C60

60 240

0.255

P1 MB UL 2P C63

63 240

0.255

General characteristics These devices comply with the UL 489 standard, mostly used in the North American markets, are designed to protect feeder circuits, the part of the system from the network supply point to the protection device for a branch circuit. They can in any case be used on the international market thanks to compliance with the IEC/EN60947-2 standard as well. They have characteristics of tripping instantaneously defined as follows: – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and inductive with low inrush current) – D-curve: instantaneous trip 10…14 times In for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and current such as motors). Operational characteristics – Rated voltage 1…32A: 480Y/277V (UL489) – Rated voltage 40…63A: 240V (UL489) – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V (IEC/EN60947-2) – Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV (IEC/EN60947-2) – Rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC (IEC/EN60947-2) – DC operational voltage: 125V Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus. Compliant with standards: UL 489, IEC/EN 60947-2.

Two pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve characteristic. 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D01V6 D

1,6 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D02

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D03

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D04

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D05

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D06

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D07

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D08

480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D10

10 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D12

12 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D13

13 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D15

15 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D16

16 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D20

20 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D25

25 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D30

30 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D32

32 480Y/277 2

0.255

P1 MB UL 2P D35

35 240

0.255

P1 MB UH 2P D01

13-8

Accessories page 13-11

P1 MB UL 2P D40

40 240

0.255

P1 MB UL 2P D50

50 240

0.255

P1 MB UL 2P D60

60 240

0.255

P1 MB UL 2P D63

63 240

0.255

Dimensions page 13-14

Technical characteristics page 13-15

Miniature and residual circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers 1...63A, UL 489 3P - 10kA 3 modules

Order code

Cur- IEC Rated N° of Qty Wt ve In voltage DIN per mod. pkg Type [A] [V]

n°

[kg]

Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, C-curve characteristic. 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C01V6 C

1.6 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C02

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C03

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C04

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C05

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C06

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C07

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C08

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C10

10 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C12

12 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C13

13 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C15

15 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C16

16 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C20

20 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C25

25 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C30

30 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C32

32 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P C35

35 240

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P C40

40 240

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P C50

50 240

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P C60

60 240

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P C63

63 240

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P C01

P1 MB... 3P...

General characteristics These devices comply with the UL 489 standard, mostly used in the North American markets, are designed to protect feeder circuits, the part of the system from the network supply point to the protection device for a branch circuit. They can in any case be used on the international market thanks to compliance with the IEC/EN60947-2 standard as well. They have characteristics of tripping instantaneously defined as follows: – C-curve: instantaneous trip 5…10 times In for inductive loads (mixed loads, resistive and inductive with low inrush current) – D-curve: instantaneous trip 10…14 times In for highly inductive loads (loads with high inrush and current such as motors). Operational characteristics – Rated voltage 1…32A: 480Y/277V (UL 489) – Rated voltage 40…63A: 240V (UL 489) – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 440V (IEC/EN60947-2) – Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV (IEC/EN60947-2) – Rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400VAC (IEC/EN60947-2) – DC operational voltage: 125V Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus. Compliant with standards: UL 489, IEC/EN 60947-2.

Three pole, thermal and magnetic trip type, D-curve characteristic. 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D01V6 D

1,6 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D02

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D03

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D04

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D05

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D06

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D07

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D08

480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D10

10 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D12

12 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D13

13 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D15

15 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D16

16 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D20

20 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D25

25 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D30

30 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D32

32 480Y/277 3

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P D35

35 240

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P D40

40 240

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P D50

50 240

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P D60

60 240

0.388

P1 MB UL 3P D63

63 240

0.388

P1 MB UH 3P D01

Accessories page 13-11

Dimensions page 13-14

Technical characteristics page 13-15

13-9

Miniature and residual circuit breakers Add-on blocks and accessories Add-on blocks for miniature circuit breakers 1…63A

Order code Description

Qty per Qty MCB per pkg

n°

[kg]

P1X 1011 1 changeover contact

0.040

P1X 1011UH 1 changeover contact for P1 MB U

0.040

0.070

Auxiliary contact.

Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip. P1X 1311 1 changeover contact Undervoltage trip release. P1X 14230 230V 50/60Hz Shunt trip release. P1X 1011

P1X 16230 110…415V 50/60Hz

P1X 16230

Add-on blocks for miniature circuit breakers 80...125A

Not suitable for P1 MB U...

Order code Description

Qty per Qty MCB per pkg

n°

[kg]

0.040

0.070

Auxiliary contact. P2X 1011

1 changeover contact

Indicator contact for thermal-magnetic trip. P2X 1311

1 changeover contact

Shunt trip release. P2X 16230 110…415V 50/60Hz

General characteristics – Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm/0.35” (0.5 module) – Undervoltage and shunt trip release width: 18mm/0.71” (1 module) – Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB left side only of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release directly on MCB side and then 2 contacts of which 1 auxiliary and 1 indicator. Operational characteristics – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV – IEC rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V; 3A 400V (auxiliary contacts). Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cURus (excluding P1X 14230), UL (only P1X 14230) Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1, CSA C22.2 n° 5. General characteristics – Auxiliary and indicator contact width: 9mm/0.35” (0.5 module) – Shunt trip release width: 17.5mm/0.69” (1 module) – Maximum combination: 3 add-on blocks on MCB sides of which 1 undervoltage or shunt release on MCB right side and 2 contacts on the left of which 1 auxiliary and 1 indicator. Operational characteristics – Rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV – Rated operational current in AC: 6A 230V; 3A 400V (auxiliary contacts). Compliance Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1.

P2X 1311

P2X 16230

Accessories for miniature circuit breakers

P1X 90 33

P1X 91 33

P1X 92 01

P1X 18 10

P1X 92 10

P2X 18 10

Suitable for P1 MB... Not suitable for P1 MB U...

Modular socket

P1X 92 02

Order code Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

P1X 90 31 Single-pole supply busbar

0.160

P1X 90 32 Two-pole supply busbar

0.320

P1X 90 33 Three-pole supply busbar

0.474

P1X 90 34 Four-pole supply busbar

0.600

P1X 91 30 Kit of 5 isolating covers for unused busbar terminals

0.030

P1X 91 31 End cap for P1X9031

0.001

P1X 91 32 End cap for P1X9032

0.001

P1X 91 33 End cap for P1X9033

0.001

P1X 91 34 End cap for P1X9034

0.001

P1X 92 01 Single-pole terminal for busbar supply; conductor cross section 25mm² max.

0.010

P1X 92 10 1-pole terminal for supplying 25 busbar; conductor cross section 25mm² max.; left entry

0.010

P1X 92 02 Single-pole terminal for busbar supply; conductor cross section 50mm² max.

0.022

P1X 18 10

Padlockable attachment for breaker control lever P1MB...

0.001

P2X 18 10

Padlockable attachment for breaker control lever P2MB...

0.002

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

P1X7

Modular socket for Italy and Germany (Schuko); 16A.

0.123

General and operational characteristics SINGLE-POLE SUPPLY BUSBAR – Rated operational voltage Ue: 1000V – Central point of power supply: 100A max. – Side point of power supply: 63A max. – Spacing: 17.5mm/0.69” – Busbar section: 10mm² – For paralleling connection – For 57 modules, 1000mm/39.37” long (57 1P breakers). TWO-POLE, THREE-POLE AND FOUR-POLE SUPPLY BUSBARS – Rated operational voltage Ue: 690V – Central point of power supply: 100A max. – Side point of power supply: 63A max. – Pitch: 18mm/0.71” – Busbar section: 10mm² – For paralleling connection – Two-pole: for 56 modules, 1000mm/39.37” long (28 2P breakers) – Three-pole: for 57 modules, 1012mm/39.84” long (19 3P breakers) – Four-pole: for 56 modules, 1000mm/39.37” long (14 4P breakers). PADLOCKABLE ATTACHMENT – Max. padlock diameter 5mm/0.20” – Padlockable in ON and OFF – One can be fitted for each pole of the breaker.

General and operational characteristics – Max. current: 16A – Connectable section 1.5...10mm2 – Tightening torque: 1.8Nm – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) – DIN modules: 2.5. Compliance Compliant with standards: IEC 60884-1.

P1X7

Dimensions page 13-14

Wiring diagrams page 13-14

Technical characteristics page 13-15

13-11

Miniature and residual circuit breakers Residual blocks and current operated circuit breakers Residual blocks

Order code

Type IEC IEC In IΔn [A]

N° of Qty DIN per module pkg

[mA] n°

n°

[kg]

Residual blocks – 2P – type A.

P1 RA 2P...

P1 RA 2P 40 A030 A

0.160

P1 RA 2P 40 A300 A

300

0.160

P1 RA 2P 63 A030 A

0.160

P1 RA 2P 63 A300 A

300

0.160

Residual blocks – 3P – type A. P1 RA 3P 40 A030 A

3.5

0.205

P1 RA 3P 40 A300 A

300

3.5

0.205

P1 RA 3P 63 A030 A

3.5

0.205

P1 RA 3P 63 A300 A

300

3.5

0.205

Residual blocks – 4P – type A. P1 RA 4P 40 A030 A

3.5

0.230

P1 RA 4P 40 A300 A

300

3.5

0.230

P1 RA 4P 63 A030 A

3.5

0.230

P1 RA 4P 63 A300 A

300

3.5

0.230

General characteristics These devices are intended for the protection of people against indirect contact (electric shock) and of installations against fire hazards due to a persistent earth/ground fault current. They snap onto the P1MB series thermal-magnetic circuit breakers; this combination forms a single device to protect people, protect against fire and protect lines. Operational characteristics – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400V – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz – IEC rated operational voltage Ue: 230/400V – IEC rated residual current for tripping IΔn: 30mA; 300mA. Certifications and compliance Compliance with standards: IEC/EN 61009-1.

P1 RA 3P...

Residual current operated circuit breakers

Order code

Type

IEC IEC N° of Qty per In IΔn DIN module pkg

[A] [mA] n°

[kg]

n°

Two pole RCCB type AC.

P1 RC 2P 25 AC030 AC

25 30

0.185

P1 RC 2P 25 AC300 AC

25 300 2

0.185

P1 RC 2P 40 AC030 AC

40 30

0.185

P1 RC 2P 40 AC300 AC

40 300 2

0.185

P1 RC 2P 63 AC030 AC

63 30

0.185

P1 RC 2P 63 AC300 AC

63 300 2

0.185

Two pole RCCB type A.

P1 RC 2P...

P1 RC 2P 25 A030

25 30

0.185

P1 RC 2P 25 A300

25 300 2

0.185

P1 RC 2P 40 A030

40 30

0.185

P1 RC 2P 40 A300

40 300 2

0.185

P1 RC 2P 63 A030

63 30

0.185

P1 RC 2P 63 A300

63 300 2

0.185

Four pole RCCB type AC. P1 RC 4P 25 AC030 AC

25 30

0.326

P1 RC 4P 25 AC300 AC

25 300 4

0.326

P1 RC 4P 40 AC030 AC

40 30

0.326

P1 RC 4P 40 AC300 AC

40 300 4

0.326

P1 RC 4P 63 AC030 AC

63 30

0.326

P1 RC 4P 63 AC300 AC

63 300 4

0.326

Four pole RCCB type A.

P1 RC 4P...

P1 RC 4P 25 A030

25 30

0.326

P1 RC 4P 25 A300

25 300 4

0.326

P1 RC 4P 40 A030

40 30

0.326

P1 RC 4P 40 A300

40 300 4

0.326

P1 RC 4P 63 A030

63 30

0.326

P1 RC 4P 63 A300

63 300 4

0.326

Two pole RCCB type B. P1 RC 2P 40 B030

40 30

0.280

P1 RC 2P 40 B300

40 300 4

0.280

P1 RC 2P 63 B030

63 30

0.280

P1 RC 2P 63 B300

63 300 4

0.280

Four pole RCCB type B.

P1 RC 4P B...

13-12

P1 RC 4P 40 B030

40 30

0.335

P1 RC 4P 40 B300

40 300 4

0.335

P1 RC 4P 63 B030

63 30

0.335

P1 RC 4P 63 B300

63 300 4

0.335

P1 RC 4P 80 B030

80 30

0.335

P1 RC 4P 80 B300

80 300 4

0.335

Dimensions page 13-14

General characteristics These RCCBs are intended for the protection of people against indirect contact (electric shock) and of installations against fire hazards due to a persistent earth/ground fault current. Specifically to prevent electric shock, RCCBs must be rated with a rated residual current (IΔn) not exceeding 30mA so that these devices trip in the case of earth/ground fault only. They usually are connected in series with thermal-magnetic breakers which assure short circuit and overcurrent protection too. P1RC types have a IΔn of either 30mA or 300mA and are available with three different versions of residual current tripping, as follows: Type AC – Tripping for earth/ground fault is ensured “for residual sinusoidal alternating currents, suddenly applied or slowly rising”. It is identified by the symbol: Type A – Tripping for earth/ground fault is ensured “for residual sinusoidal alternating currents and pulsating direct currents, suddenly applied or slowly rising”. In addition to the protection given by Type AC, this version protects against residual current with pulsating waveform. This can be caused by circuits connected with electronic equipment. The symbol identifying Type A is the following: Type B – tripping is ensured for all conditions already covered by types AC and A. They also ensure tripping for high-frequency leakage currents up to 1000Hz and direct currents. They are particularly suitable for applications with inverters, UPSs and electric vehicle charging stations. The symbol identifying Type B is the following: Main features include: – IEC rated current In: 25A, 40A and 63A – Versions: 2P and 4P – Type of operation: AC, A and B – Pole width: 17.5mm / 0.69” – Contact status with flag indicator – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715). Operational characteristics – Dissipation per pole: • 1.1W for P1RC2/4 P25… type AC or A • 2.9W for P1RC2/4 P40… type AC, A or B • 7.2W for P1RC2/4P63… type AC, A or B • 9.7W for P1RC2/4P80… type B – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 400V – IEC rated impulse voltage Uimp: 4kV – IEC rated frequency: 50/60Hz – IEC rated operational voltage Uc: 230VAC for 2P; 230/400VAC for 4P – IEC rated residual operating voltage Ue: IΔn: 30mA; 300mA – IEC short-circuit breaking capacity Icn: 10kA Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: TÜV SÜD (types AC and A); VDE (type B). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61008-1 (all types); IEC/EN 62423 (type B). Technical characteristics page 13-15

Page 14-4 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2 MONOBLOCK VERSIONS • 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P • IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs): 25kA • IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs): 100kA • SPD status indicator • Version with output for remote status indication.

Page 14-4 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 1 AND 2 VERSIONS WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE • 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P • IEC impulse current Iimp (10/350μs): 12.5kA • IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs): 60kA • IEC combined surge Uoc/Isc (1.2/50, 8/20μs): 10kV/5kA • Single module status indicator • Version with output for remote status indication.

Page 14-4 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 2 VERSIONS WITH PLUG-IN CARTRIDGE • 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P • IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs): 40kA • IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA • Single module status indicator • Versions with and without output for remote status indication.

Page 14-5 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES TYPE 2 FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC APPLICATIONS • Versions with plug-in cartridge: +, -, PE • IEC maximum operational voltage: 1200VDC • IEC maximum discharge current Imax (8/20μs): 40kA • IEC rated discharge current In (8/20μs): 20kA • Single module status indicator • Versions with or without output for remote status indication • Tested according to EN 50539-11 • UL Recognized versions.

Page 14-5 SPARE PLUG-IN CARTRIDGES • Versions suitable for SPDs: - Type 1 and 2 - Type 2 - Type 2 for photovoltaic applications • Status indicator for single modules.

SURGE

PROTECTION DEVICES

Protection against overvoltage and high surge conditions caused by direct or indirect lightning strikes Types with plug-in cartridge provide fast servicing capability Mechanical indicator for visual failure status signalling of single modules Versions with or without output for remote SPD status indication Versions for photovoltaic applications.

Surge protection devices (SPD) Type 1 and 2 monoblock .................................................................................................................................................. Type 1 and 2 with plug-in cartridge ................................................................................................................................ Type 2 with plug-in cartridge .......................................................................................................................................... Type 2 for photovoltaic applications ................................................................................................................................ Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 14 14 14 14 14

4 4 4 5 5

C IRCUIT P ROTECTION

AND

I SOLATION

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 14 - 6 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 14 - 7 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 14 - 8

Page 15-2 ONE AND TWO-POLE CONTACTORS • IEC rated current Ith AC1 (400V): 20A and 32A • IEC rated current AC3 (400V): 9A • Ideal for domestic and service applications.

Page 15-2 THREE AND FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS • IEC rated current Ith AC1 (400V): 25A, 32A, 40A and 63A • IEC rated current AC3 (400V): 8.5A, 22A and 30A • Ideal for industrial and service applications, such as office buildings, stores, hospitals, hotels, etc.

Page 15-3

ONE AND TWO-POLE CONTACTORS WITH MANUAL CONTROL • IEC rated current Ith AC1 (400V): 20A and 32A • IEC rated current AC3 (400V): 9A • Ideal for functional tests and dual pricing systems in domestic and service applications.

THREE AND FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS WITH MANUAL CONTROL • IEC rated current Ith AC1 (400V): 32A • IEC rated current AC3 (400V): 8.5A • Ideal for functional tests and dual pricing systems in domestic and service applications.

MODULAR CONTACTORS

Two, three and four-pole versions, 20A to 63A Very silent during operation or control stage Manual control version Operating flag indicator Add-on auxiliary contacts.

Modular contactors Contactors ........................................................................................................................................................................ Contactors with manual control ......................................................................................................................................... Add-on blocks and accessories ..........................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 15 - 2 15 - 3 15 - 3

C IRCUIT

PROTECTION AND

I SOLATION

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 15 - 4 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 15 - 4 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 15 - 5

Modular contactors Contactors

Order code

Rated Configura- Qty auxiliary tion and per supply voltage number pkg of contacts

[V]

[kg]

NC n°

One-pole or two-pole. 1 module. Ith 20A. 1

1 10

0.135

CN20 11 220 220...230VAC 1

CN20 11 024 24VAC/DC

1 10

0.135

CN20 20 024 24VAC/DC

––

0.135

CN20 20 220 220...230VAC 2

––

0.135

1 10

0.135

CN32 11 220 220...230VAC 1

1 10

0.135

Operational characteristics Type IEC conventional free-air thermal current Ith in AC1 ≤400V [A]

CN32 20 024 24VAC/DC

––

0.135

One-pole or two-pole.

CN32 20 220 220...230VAC 2

––

0.135

CN20...

CN32...

One-pole or two-pole. 1 module. Ith 32A. CN32 11 024 24VAC/DC CN20... CN32 11... - CN32 20...

Three-pole or four-pole. 2 modules. Ith 25A.

Operational current in AC3 ≤400V

Protection fuse gG (IEC)

[A]

CN25 10 024

24VAC/DC

––

0.260

Three-pole or four-pole.

CN25 10 220

220...230VAC 4

––

0.260

CN25...

8.5

CN25 01 024

24VAC/DC

1 5

0.260

CN32...

CN25 01 220

220...230VAC 3

1 5

0.260

CN40...

CN63...

Three-pole or four-pole. 2 modules. Ith 32A.

CN25... CN32 10... - CN32 01...

CN32 10 024

24VAC/DC

––

0.260

CN32 10 220

220...230VAC 4

––

0.260

CN32 01 024

24VAC/DC

1 5

0.260

CN32 01 220

220...230VAC 3

1 5

0.260

– Noise level: • Closed contactor <20dB • Making/breaking operation ≤50dB – IEC degree of protection: IP20 – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60175).

Three-pole or four-pole. 3 modules. Ith 40A. CN40 10 024

24VAC/DC

––

0.425

CN40 10 220

220...230VAC 4

––

0.425

CN40 01 024

24VAC/DC

1 5

0.425

CN40 01 220

220...230VAC 3

1 5

0.425

Operational characteristics of contactor-incorporated auxiliary contacts Type IEC insulation IEC rating (AC15 category) voltage Ui 230V 400V [V]

[A]

CN63 10 024

24VAC/DC

––

0.425

CN20...

440

CN63 10 220

220...230VAC 4

––

0.425

CN25...

440

CN63 01 024

24VAC/DC

1 5

0.425

CN32...

440

CN63 01 220

220...230VAC 3

1 5

0.425

CN40...

500

CN63...

500

Three-pole or four-pole. 3 modules. Ith 63A.

CN40...

Other voltages on request. Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover. 2NC version supplied on request. The last (NC) pole has the same characteristics as the power pole. It can therefore be used indifferently as an auxiliary or as a NC power contact. The fourth NO or NC pole has the same characteristics as the power poles; therefore it can be used indifferently as auxiliary or as power contact. On request can be supplied: 2NO + 2NC or 4NC power poles. Consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover. Can also operate at 220VDC. No auxiliary contacts can be mounted.

CN63...

Maximum number of contactors side-by-side When contactors are mounted side by side and operate in continuous service (≥1 hour), spacing is needed between equipment to consent appropriate cooling. 9mm spacing is required; there is an accessory, called halfmodule spacer, order code CNX 80, for this specific type of mounting. The following table indicates details of the space needed between each.

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095. Utilisation – Lighting systems – Electric home heating – Heat pumps – Conditioning – Ventilation – Civil installations. Lighting circuit switching See page 15-6.

Maximum number of contactors to be mounted side-by-side without spacing; the CNX 80 spacer is required when the number of pieces is more than the indicated below: CN20 CN32 CN25 CN40 CN63

15-2

Add-on blocks/Accessories page 15-3

Ambient temperature ≤40°C

Ambient temperature >40°...55°C

Dimensions page 15-4

Wiring diagrams page 15-4

Technical characteristics page 15-5 to 7

Modular contactors Contactors with manual control

Order code

Rated Configura- Qty auxiliary tion and per supply voltage number pkg of contacts

[V]

[kg]

NC n°

One-pole or two-pole. 1 module. Ith 20A. CNM20 11 024 24VAC/DC

1 10

0.135

CNM20 11 220 220...230VAC 1

1 10

0.135

CNM20 20 024 24VAC/DC

––

0.135

CNM20 20 220 220...230VAC 2

––

0.135

One-pole or two-pole. 1 module. Ith 32A. CNM32 20 024 24VAC/DC CNM20... - CNM32 20...

––

0.135

CNM32 20 220 220...230VAC 2

––

0.135

Three-pole or four-pole. 2 module. Ith 32A. CNM32 10 024 24VAC/DC

––

0.260

CNM32 10 220 220...230VAC 4

––

0.260

CNM32 10...

CNM20

CNM32

Ambient temperature ≤40°C

Ambient temperature >40°...55°C

General characteristics – DC powered magnetic core system assuring silent operation and noise damping during the control phase – Overvoltage protection circuit and voltage peak limitation of the magnetic core – Equipped with 2 or 4 closing contacts of equal capacity permitting use in power or auxiliary circuits – Operation flag indicator – Handle functions Position A: contactor function Position B: contactor permanently switched off, even in case of coil control voltage is present. Position I: contactor closed manually; when the coil is supplied the handle automatically moves to A position. Operational characteristics Type IEC conventional free-air thermal current Ith in AC1 ≤400V [A]

Operational current in AC3 ≤400V

Protection fuse gG (IEC)

[A]

One-pole or two-pole. CNM20...

CNM32...

8.5

Three-pole or four-pole. CNM32...

– Noise level: • Closed contactor <20dB • Making/breaking operation ≤50dB – IEC degree of protection: IP20 – Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60175). Operational characteristics of contactor-incorporated auxiliary contacts Type IEC insulation IEC rating (AC15 category) voltage Ui 230V 400V [V]

[A]

CNM20...

440

CNM32...

440

Add-on blocks and accessories

Order code

Characteristics Max qty per contactor

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

Auxiliary contacts . CNH 11

1NO + 1NC

0.044

CNH 20

2NO

0.044

Set for terminal protection (also sealable). CNP 0

For CN20..., CNM20... and CNM32...

0.001

CNP 1

For CN25... and CNM32...

0.002

CNP 2

For CN40... and CN63...

0.003

CNH...

CNP2

Operational characteristics for auxiliary contacts – IEC rated insulation voltage: 440VAC – IEC conventional free air thermal current Ith: 6A – Minimum switching capacity: 5mA 12V – Conductor section: 1...2.5mm2 – Maximum tightening torque: 1Nm. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC/EN 61095.

Spacer.

CNX 80

Set of 2 pieces.

1/2 mod. wide Dimensions page 15-4

0.013 Wiring diagrams page 15-4

Not suitable for CN20..., CN32 11..., CN32 20..., CNM20... and CNM32... modular contactors.

Technical characteristics page 15-5 to 7

15-3

Page 16-2 FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION R1D type • 1 operation threshold • External toroidal transformer • Adjustable tripping I n and delay time.

Page 16-3 FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION R2D type • 2 operation thresholds • External toroidal transformer • Configurable fail safe operation • Adjustable tripping I n and delay time. R3D type • 2 operation thresholds • External toroidal transformer • Configurable fail safe operation • Flag indicator • Adjustable tripping I n and delay time.

Page 16-2

Page 16-2 MODULAR VERSION RM1 type • 1 operation threshold • External toroidal transformer • Fixed tripping I n and delay time.

MODULAR VERSION RMT type • 1 operation threshold • Incorporated toroidal transformer • Adjustable tripping I n and delay time.

RM type • 1 operation threshold • External toroidal transformer • Adjustable tripping I n and delay time.

Page 16-3

Page 16-3 TOROIDAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS RT type • Solid core • 35mm to 210mm diameter. RTA type • Split core • 110mm and 210mm diameter.

EXTERNAL MULTIPLIER RX10 type • 10-fold multiplier.

Page 16-3 FLUSH-MOUNT VERSION R4D type • 2 operation thresholds • External toroidal transformer • Configurable fail safe operation • Fault current measurement • Digital display • Flag indicator • Shunt tripping circuit • Adjustable tripping I n and delay time.

Page 16-2 COMPACT INTERNAL PANEL VERSION RC type • 1 operation threshold • Incorporated toroidal transformer • Adjustable tripping I n and delay time • 35mm to 110mm diameter.

EARTH LEAKAGE RELAYS

Modular, flush and internal panel mount version, with or without flag indicator, configurable prealarm indication and fail safe operation Versions with automatic toroid connection control Choice of supply voltage ranges Adjustable fault current I n Adjustment and choice of tripping range for both fault current and delay time.

Earth leakage relays With 1 operation threshold ................................................................................................................................................ With 2 operation thresholds ............................................................................................................................................... Toroidal current transformers ............................................................................................................................................ External multiplier .............................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 16 16 16 16

2 3 3 3

C IRCUIT P ROTECTION

AND

I SOLATION

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 16 - 4 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 16 - 5 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 16 - 6

Page 17-2 MODULAR TIME RELAYS • Suitable for modular-slot switchboards • Selectable time ranges on front: 0.1s...100 days • LED indication • Mounting on 35mm DIN rail • Screw terminals.

Page 17-5 PLUG-IN AND FLUSH-MOUNT TIME RELAYS, 48X48MM • Flush and internal panel mounting • Time ranges: 0.05s...10h • LED indication • 8 and 11-pin sockets for panel mounting.

TIME

RELAYS

Modular version for modular-slot switchboards, also suitable for rear mounting plate fixing Plug-in or flush-mount version Vast range of functions and time scales Reliable time and repeat accuracy.

Modular version On delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 relay output ....................................................................................................... Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 2 relay outputs ...................................................................................................... Recycle, independent timings. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................... Off delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... For starting. Multiscale. Multivoltage ................................................................................................................................. For staircase .....................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 17 17 17 17 17 17 17

2 2 3 3 3 4 4

17 17 17 17

5 5 5 5

Plug-in and flush-mount version, 48x48mm/1.9x1.9â&#x20AC;? On delay. Multiscale. Multivoltage ...................................................................................................................................... On delay. Multiscale. Single voltage ................................................................................................................................... Multifunction. Multiscale. Multivoltage .............................................................................................................................. Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................................

A UTOMATION

AND

C ONTROL

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 17 - 6 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 17 - 7 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 17 - 13

Time relays Modular version On delay time relay. Multiscale. Multivoltage

Order code

Time of scale range

TM P

0.1...1s 24...48VDC 1...10s 24...240VAC 6...60s 1...10min 6min...1h 1...10h 0.1...1 day 1...10 days ON only OFF only

TM P A440

0.1...1s 1...10s 6...60s 1...10min

TM P

Rated Qty auxiliary per supply voltage pkg

[V]

n°

[kg]

0.048

380...440VAC 1

0.090

General characteristics – Electronic time relay, multiscale, multivoltage. On delay, delay on make, with start at relay energising for TM P – Electronic time relay, multiscale with 2 normally open (N/O-SPST) contacts with common pole for TM P A 440. – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10...100% – Green LED indicator for power on – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay and steady when relay energised – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when mounted in housing or electric board with IP40); IP20 on terminals. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices Timers. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. Operational diagram See page 17-7.

Multifunction time relay. Multiscale. Multivoltage. 1 relay output

Order code

Time of scale range

Rated Qty auxiliary per supply voltage pkg

TM M1

0.1...1s 12...240V 1...10s AC/DC 6...60s 1...10min 6min...1h 1...10h 0.1...1 day 1...10 days ON only OFF only

[V]

n°

[kg]

0.086

TM M1

General characteristics – Electronic time relay, multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage – Enabling input – 1 relay output with 1 changeover contact (SPDT) – Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with start at relay energising. (b) Pulse on relay energising with start when energised. (c) Flasher starting with OFF interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay energising at external contact closing with start on break. (f) Pulse on relay energising with start on external contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energising with start on external contact opening. (h) On-off delay. Delay on make, with start at external contact closing, and delay at break, with start at external contact opening. (i) Internal ON/OFF trigger with relay contact closing or operating at each closing of an external contact. (j) Pulse generator, unequal timing recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and 0.5s ON pulse. – Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 10...100% – Green LED indicator for power on – Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay and steady when relay energised – Modular DIN 43880 housing, 1 module suitable for fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when mounted in housing or electric board with IP40); IP20 on terminals. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601) as Auxiliary Devices Timers. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61812-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. Operational diagram See page 17-7.

17-2

Dimensions page 17-6

Wiring diagrams page 17-7 and 8

Technical characteristics page 17-12

Pages 18-4 to 7 VOLTAGE MONITORING RELAYS • For three-phase systems with or without neutral and single-phase systems • Minimum and maximum AC voltage • Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence • Asymmetry • Minimum and maximum frequency.

Page 18-10 PUMP PROTECTION RELAYS • For single and three-phase systems • Minimum cos for dry running protection • Maximum AC current • Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence.

Page 18-11 FREQUENCY MONITORING RELAYS • For single and three-phase systems • Minimum frequency • Maximum frequency.

Pages 18-8 and 9 CURRENT MONITORING RELAYS • For single and three-phase systems • Maximum AC/DC current • Minimum or maximum AC/DC current • Minimum and maximum AC/DC current.

Page 18-11 PHASE SHIFT MONITORING RELAYS • For single and three-phase systems • Minimum cos • Maximum cos .

Page 18-12 INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNITS • Compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-21, for low voltage • Compliant with Italian standard CEI 0-16, for medium voltage.

PROTECTION

RELAYS

Modular version for switchgear panels, also suitable for rear mounting plate fixing Minimum and maximum voltage monitoring relays for single and three-phase systems, with or without neutral Voltage asymmetry, phase sequence and phase loss control relays Minimum and maximum current monitoring relays Frequency monitoring relays Interface protection system units compliant with Italian standards CEI 0-21 and CEI 0-16.

Modular voltage monitoring relays For three-phase systems, without neutral ........................................................................................................................... For three-phase systems, with or without neutral ............................................................................................................... For single-phase systems ..................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 18 - 4 18 - 6 18 - 7

Modular current monitoring relays For single systems ..................................................................................................................................................................... For single and three-phase systems ..........................................................................................................................................

Modular pump protection relays ........................................................................................ Modular phase shift monitoring relays ................................................................................ Modular frequency monitoring relays .................................................................................. Interface protection system units .......................................................................................

18 - 8 18 - 9

18 18 18 18

- 10 - 11 - 11 - 12

A UTOMATION

AND

C ONTROL

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 18 - 17 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 18 - 18 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 18 - 30

Page 19-3 LEVEL CONTROL RELAYS • For conductive liquids • Single, dual or multivoltage • Emptying or filling functions • Multifunctions • Automatic reset • Modular and plug-in versions.

Page 19-6 PROBES, ELECTRODES AND ELECTRODE HOLDERS • Single pole • Three pole.

Page 19-8 START-UP PRIORITY CHANGE RELAYS • 2 outputs • Single or multivoltage • Modular and plug-in versions.

Page 19-7 FLOAT SWITCHES • Versions for grey and dirty water • Versions with PVC and Neoprene cable • Emptying or filling functions.

LEVEL CONTROLS

Level monitoring for electrically conductive liquids Modular and plug-in versions Adjustable 2.5â&#x20AC;Ś200kÎŠ sensitivity Single and three-pole probes Float switches Start-up priority change relays.

Level monitoring relays Modular version for conductive liquids .............................................................................................................................. Plug-in version for conductive liquids.................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 19 - 3 19 - 5

Probes, electrodes and electrode holders ............................................................................ 19 - 6 Float switches .............................................................................................................. 19 - 7 Start-up priority change relays Modular version ................................................................................................................................................................ Plug-in version ..................................................................................................................................................................

19 - 8 19 - 8

Accessories ................................................................................................................. 19 - 9

A UTOMATION

AND

C ONTROL

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 19 - 10 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 19 - 11 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 19 - 14

Level controls Float switches For grey water

Order code

Cable material

Cable length

Counterweight included

[m]

n°

[kg]

Yes

0.610

LVFS P1 W 05 PVC

Yes

0.830

LVFS P1 W 10 PVC

Yes

1.410

LVFS P1 W 15 PVC

1.930

Yes

LVFS N1 W 05 Neoprene 5

Yes

0.880

LVFS N1 W 10 Neoprene 10

Yes

1.510

LVFS N1 W 15 Neoprene 15

Yes

2.080

LVFS N1 W 20 Neoprene 20

Yes

2.480

Tank

Start

MIN

MAX

Stop

Start

MIN

This function is achieved by connecting the black and blue float terminals. The level regulator contact closes the lower circuit at minimum level and opens the circuit when the float reaches the upper maximum level. The MIN and MAX levels can be adjusted by varying the distance between counterweight and float.

45°

45° Start Emptying function Tank MAX

Tank MAX

Start

Stop

MIN

Start

Stop

MIN

Stop

This function is achieved by connecting the black and brown float terminals. The level regulator contact closes the upper circuit at maximum level and opens the circuit when the float reaches the lower minimum level. The MIN and MAX levels can be adjusted by varying the distance between counterweight and float.

45°

Order code

Cable material

Cable length

Counterweight

[m]

Tank MAX

1.250

1.860

LVFS N1 B 15 Neoprene 15

Internal

2.460

LVFS N1 B 20 Neoprene 20

Internal

3.060

This function uses two floats and is achieved by connecting the black and blue float terminals. The MIN and MAX levels can be adjusted by varying the position of the floats. Stop

Start

15° Start

Tank

Tank MAX

Stop

MIN

Stop

This function uses two floats and is achieved by connecting the black and brown float terminals. The MIN and MAX levels can be adjusted by varying the position of the floats.

Emptying function

MIN

[kg]

Internal

MIN

Start

n°

LVFS N1 B 10 Neoprene 10

15°

MAX

Tank

Start

MIN

Qty

Internal

MAX

Stop

Operational characteristics They are used for the civil and industrial control of levels of grey water, e.g. rainwater, groundwater or cooling water from industry. They are available with PVC and neoprene cables of various lengths. – Activation angle -45°...+45° – 130g external counterweight included – Float casing material: polypropylene – Cable A05 VV-F3X1 (PVC) available in lengths of 3, 5, 10 and 15m and cable H07 RN-F3X1 (Neoprene) available in lengths of 5, 10, 15 and 20m – Rated cable diameter: 9mm (PVC and Neoprene) – Relay with changeover contact 10(8)A 250VAC 50/60Hz – Maximum installation depth: 30m – Maximum pressure: 3bar – Operating temperature: 0…+50°C – Storage temperature: -20…+70°C – IEC degree of protection: IP68 – Insulation class: II. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: TÜV. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60730-1, IEC/EN 60730-2-15.

Stop

LVFS N1 B 05 Neoprene 5

Filling function

General characteristics Float switches are used in the automation of electrical equipment, such as: pumps, solenoid valves, alarms, motorised sluice gates, etc. All versions feature an internal changeover contact operated in accordance with the level of liquid where the float is located. The cables used are high-quality and offer excellent mechanical and chemical resistance over time. The cables are 3x1 type, that is 3 wires with section 1mm2. This allows the user to choose the filling and emptying function during regulator wiring.

45° Start

For dirty water

LVFS P1 W 03 PVC

Filling function

MAX

Qty

Start

Operational characteristics These float switches are used for the civil and industrial control of levels of dirty water, e.g. sewage or waste water from industry. The float switches comprises of a one-piece external blow-moulded polypropylene casing, with fixed internal counterweight located in the cable exit area. The regulator contact is positioned centrally in its own watertight chamber. This is insulated from the external casing by injecting closed-cell foam. This solution further increases protection against moisture leakage and heat insulates the watertight chamber housing the contact, eliminating the creation of condensation. – Activation angle -15°...+15° – Internal counterweight – Float casing material: polypropylene – Cable H07 RN-F3X1 (Neoprene) available in lengths of 5, 10, 15 and 20m – Rated cable diameter: 9mm – Relay with changeover contact 10(4)A 250VAC 50/60Hz – Maximum installation depth: 50m – Maximum pressure: 5bar – Operating temperature: 0…+50°C – Storage temperature: -20…+70°C – IEC degree of protection: IP68 – Insulation class: II. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: TÜV. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60730-1. IEC/EN 60730-2-15.

Stop

15°

15° Start

Stop

PATENTED It is possible to use even a single float for black water, adjusting the level in a fixed range of 10cm MAX, a solution which is not advisable for turbulent waters.

Dimensions page 19-10

19-7

Page 20-4 MICRO PLCs • 10 Inputs/Outputs (LRD10...) • 12 Inputs/Outputs (LRD12...) • 20 Inputs/Outputs (LRD20...) • 12VDC, 24VDC, 24VAC or 100...240VAC power supply • Relay or transistor outputs.

Page 20-5 ACCESSORIES • Program backup memory • Programming and supervision software • Power supply unit • HMI operator panel with graphic LCD.

Page 20-4 EXPANSION AND COMMUNICATION MODULES • 4 digital inputs / 4 digital outputs • Analog inputs, 0...10V or 0...20mA • Analog outputs, 0...10V or 0...20mA • Relay or transistor outputs • PT100 temperature sensor inputs • Modbus-RTU protocol slave communication unit • 24VDC, 24VAC or 100...240VAC power supply.

Page 20-5 STARTER AND TRAINING KITS • Complete kit to begin using micro PLCs, each equipped with LRD relay, programming-supervision software and USB connecting cable • Training kits complete with micro PLC and inputs/outputs simulation board.

Micro PLCs

10, 12 and 20 Input-Output base modules Expansion modules with 4 digital Inputs and 4 digital Outputs Expansion modules for analog Inputs-Outputs Modbus-RTU slave communication module RS232/USB serial interface port for PC, HMI operator panel or program backup memory connection On-board programming languages: Italian, English, Spanish, French, German, Portuguese and Chinese PC programming languages: Italian, English and Spanish.

Micro PLCs Base modules .................................................................................................................................................................. Expansion and communication modules..........................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 20 - 4 20 - 4

Accessories ................................................................................................................. 20 - 5 Starter and training kits .................................................................................................. 20 - 5

A UTOMATION

AND

C ONTROL

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 20 - 6 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 20 - 7 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 20 - 8

Page 21-2 POWER SUPPLIES MODULAR AND DIN RAIL MOUNT VERSIONS • Single phase • Output voltage: 12 or 24VDC • Output power: 10...100W.

Page 21-3 POWER SUPPLIES DIN RAIL MOUNT VERSION • Single, two and three phase • Output voltage: 24 or 48VDC • Output power: 5...960W.

Page 21-3 REDUNDANCY MODULES • Modular and 35mm DIN rail mount • Output voltage: 12 or 24VDC • Output current: 10 or 20A.

SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES

Versions: modular and 35mm DIN rail mount Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer Short-circuit protection Built-in input voltage surge suppressor Used as power supply for DC electromechanical and electronic equipment Redundancy modules

Modular switching power supplies Single phase ......................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 21 - 2

DIN rail mount switching power supplies Single phase ...................................................................................................................................................................... Two phase ......................................................................................................................................................................... Three phase ......................................................................................................................................................................

21 - 3 21 - 3 21 - 3

Redundancy modules ..................................................................................................... 21 - 3

A UTOMATION

AND

C ONTROL

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 21 - 4 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 21 - 5 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 21 - 6

Switching power supplies DIN rail mount. Redundancy modules Din Rail mount version

Order code

Rated output voltage

Rated output current

Output power

Qty per pkg

[V]

[A]

[W]

n°

[kg]

Single phase. PSL1 005 24

PSL1 005 24 PSL1 010 24 PSL1 018 24

PSL1 030... PSL1 060...

0.21

0.190

PSL1 010 24

24VDC

0.42

0.196

PSL1 018 24

0.75

0.226

PSL1 030 24

1.25

0.336

PSL1 060 24

2.5

0.400

PSL1 100 24

4.2

100

0.508

PSL1 120 24

120

1.018

PSL1 240 24

240

1.486

PSL1 300 24

12.5

300

1.496

480

2.348

0.625

0.336

PSL1 060 48

1.25

0.400

PSL1 100 48

2.1

100

0.508

PSL1 120 48

2.5

120

1.018

PSL1 240 48

240

1.486

PSL1 300 48

6.25

300

1.496

PSL1 480 48

480

2.348

PSL1 480 24 PSL1 030 48

PSL1 100... PSL1 120...

PSL1 240... PSL1 300...

48VDC

Two phase. PSL2 100 24

24VDC

4.2

100

0.570

PSL2 100 48

48VDC

2.1

100

0.570

24VDC

Three phase . PSL1 480 24 PSL1 480 48

PSL3 120 24

120

0.910

PSL3 240 24

240

1.190

PSL3 480 24

480

1.995

PSL3 960 24

960

3.672

240

1.190

PSL3 480 48

480

1.995

PSL3 960 48

960

3.672

PSL3 240 48

48VDC

Two-phase connection is admissible with a 25% output power derating.

PSL3 960...

Redundancy modules

Order code

Rated output voltage

Rated output current

Qty per pkg

[V]

[A]

n°

[kg]

PSLRM 10 24

12...24VDC

0.075

PSLR 20 24

24VDC

0.210

Indications (PSLR 20 24) PSLR M1024

Input voltage A

Input voltage B

LED LED Relay A B A

Relay B

Within limits

Energ.

Within limits

<MIN or >MAX ON

<MIN or >MAX Within limits

Energ.

OFF Energ.

OFF ON

De-energ.

De-energ. Energ.

<MIN or >MAX <MIN or >MAX OFF OFF De-energ. De-energ.

PSLR 2024

General characteristics This type of equipment is used to power supply electromechanical and electronic devices with DC control, such as contactors, time relays, sensors, PLCs, DC motors, displays, SSRs and other equipment normally found in automation systems and networks. Protections: – Short circuit – Overload – Input voltage peaks. Indications: – LED indicator for low voltage conditions – LED indicator for power on. Operational characteristics – Rated supply voltage: 100...240VAC (PSL1 005...PSL1 100) 115...230VAC self-configurable (PSL1 120...PSL1 480) 400...500VAC (PSL2... and PSL3... ) – Rated output voltage: 24VDC (PSL...24) / 48VDC (PSL...48) – Mains frequency: 50/60Hz – Output voltage adjustment by front potentiometer – PFC function for types: PSL1 120 24...PSL3 960 24 PSL1 120 48...PSL3 960 48 – Parallel connection for types: PSL1 120 24, PSL1 240 24, PSL1 300 24, PSL1 480 24, PSL2 100 24, PSL3 240 24, PSL3 480 24, PSL3 960 24, PSL1 120 48, PSL1 240 48, PSL1 300 48, PSL1 480 48, PSL2 100 48, PSL3 240 48, PSL3 480 48, PSL3 960 48 – High efficiency up to 92% – 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting – Screw connection terminals – Plastic or metal housing depending on type – IEC degree of protection: IP20 on terminals. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC; UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus-File E318016) as Power Supplies in power circuit and motor-mounted apparatus category. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 107.1. General characteristics They are used for the redundancy connection of two or more power supplies to enhance the reliability of the DC supply. The redundancy modules ensure a perfect insulation between the power supplies connected. Indications (only for PSLR 20 24): – LED indicator for DC voltage within limit – Alarm relay. Operational characteristics – Rated input voltage: 12...24VDC (PSLRM 10 24) 24VDC (PSLR 20 24) – Rated input current: 10A (PSLRM 10 24) 20A (PSLR 20 24) – Maximum input current (for channel): 8A per 300s(PSLRM 10 24) 16A per 300s (PSLR 20 24) – Rated output current : 10A (PSLRM 10 24) 20A (PSLR 20 24) – Maximum output current: 16A per 300s (PSLRM 10 24) 30A per 300s (PSLR 20 24) – Modular housing DIN 43880 2 modules (PSLRM 10 24) – 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting (PSLR 20 24) – Screw connection terminals – Plastic or metal housing depending on type – IEC degree of protection: IP20 on terminals. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus (only for PSLR 20 24), EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1, IEC/EN 61000-4-2, IEC/EN 61000-4-3, IEC/EN 61000-4-4, IEC/EN 61000-4-6, IEC/EN 61000-4-8, UL 508 (only for PSLR 20 24).

Dimensions page 21-4

Wiring diagrams page 21-5

Technical characteristics page 21-7

21-3

AUTOMATIC BATTERY CHARGERS

Switching and linear technology 1 charging level Versions for non-sealed and sealed lead-acid batteries, 1.25 to 12A ratings Versions with RS485 and NFC communications integrated Charging current limitation selectable.

Automatic battery chargers for lead-acid batteries Switching BCF series, modular version .............................................................................................................................. Switching BCG series ........................................................................................................................................................ Switching BCG series, communicating version ............................................................................................................... Linear BCE series ..............................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 22 22 22 22

2 3 4 5

A UTOMATION

AND

C ONTROL

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 22 - 6 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 22 - 6 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 22 - 7

Automatic battery chargers Switching BCG series communicating version For non-sealed and sealed lead-acid batteries

Order code

Rated output current

Rated output voltage in DC

Qty per pkg

[A]

[V]

n°

[kg]

0.582

0.760

0.582

0.760

Adapter for 35mm DIN rail 1 vertical mount of BCG 06 12RS and BCG05 24RS

0.022

1 charging level. BCG 06 12 RS

BCG 12 12 RS

BCG 05 24 RS

BCG 10 24 RS

Accessories. BCG X00

BCG...RS

U Uc

Alarms

ON GRN LED

Correct output ON voltage

0.5Uc

a - constant current charge b - constant voltage charge

REV RED LED

ALA RED LED

CHG YEL RED

RELAY

OFF

Energ.

Charging

OFF

Energ.

Low battery voltage

OFF

Energ.

Reverse polarity

OFF

De-energ.

Short circuit / Overload

OFF

De-energ.

Steady light if the charging current is more than approx. 30% of programmed current value.

Flashing during Hiccup operating conditions. Type

Maximum power Internal fuse consumption dissipation Mains side (type T) [VA]

[W]

[A]

BCG 06 12RS 230

BCG 12 12RS 284

290

6.3

BCG 05 24RS 364

158

6.3

BCG 10 24RS 630

311

Not replaceable.

General characteristics The BCG battery chargers with the built-in communication have integrated functions necessary where is needed the permanent control of the battery state of charge (SOC): – Supervision and remote control – Communication with the compatible devices (ATL 800, ATL 900, RGK 800, RGK 900) and display the battery charger status on dedicated pages – Battery disconnected alarm – Double supply for the built-in RS485 communication that allows a permanent supervision in case of emergency – Switching technology – Wide auxiliary supply range – High efficiency – Isolated RS485 communication – RTU and ASCII Modbus protocols – Charging voltage selectable in function of the battery type (Pb – Sealed Pb – Ni-Cd): • 12V models: 12...15 VDC • 24V models: 24...30 VDC – BOOST external command or via Modbus to deep charge of the battery – Hiccup function for battery recharging when its voltage is lower than 50% rated value – Charging current limiting trimmer resistor – Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail mount (IEC/EN 60715). Protection: – Input fuse on AC side – Electronic lock in case of short circuit on battery terminals, reverse battery polarity and output overload, battery not connected – Signalling absence of auxiliary power supply AC – Automatic reset at end of alarm conditions. LED indications: – Power on – Charging operation (I>30% Ic) – Overload or short circuit conditions – Reverse battery polarity. Operational characteristics – Auxiliary supply voltage: 110...240VAC ±10% 50/60Hz ±10% – Parameters can be set with RS485 or NFC connection: • Current limit: 20...100% of the rated current value • Charging voltage • Boost voltage • Boost interval • Boost duration – Current limitation – Charging cycle according to DIN 41773 standards – IEC degree of protection: IP20. Alarm output circuit – Type of output: 5A 30VDC duty relay, normally energised. App for smartphones and tablets The app LOVATO Electric , installed on Android devices with NFC connectivity, allows the user to set the parameters of BCG ... RS. For more information see section 27.

– Setup configuration with: • NFC connection and the app LOVATO Electric ; supervision and energy management software • configuration and remote control software • – Supervision of measures, states and alarms with or – Automatic and programmable BOOST function – Compatibility with automatic transfer switch controllers ATL800, ATL900 and gen-set controllers RGK800 and RGK 900: it is possible to display the battery charger status on dedicated pages of the controllers.

22-4

Dimensions page 22-6

supervision and energy management software See section 27. configuration and remote control software See section 27. Certifications and compliance Certifications pending: EAC; UL Recognized for USA and Canada (cURus - File E360865), as Power Supplies Component. Products having this type of marking are intended for use as components of complete workshop-assembled equipment. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60950-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL 60950-1, CSA C22.2 n°60950-1.

Wiring diagrams page 22-6

Technical characteristics page 22-7

Page 23-8

Page 23-13

ENERGY METERS • Single phase, three phase with neutral, three phase with or without neutral • Direct connection or by current transformers • MID certified versions • Versions that can be expanded with EXP... expansion modules • Versions with built-in RS485 communication port.

DATA CONCENTRATORS • Energy consumption data storage for network usage • Connection up to 14 energy meters equipped with static output • Photovoltaic monitoring type • Expandable with EXP... expansion modules • Built-in RS485 communication port.

Page 23-14

Page 23-17

DIGITAL LCD MULTIMETERS AND POWER ANALYZERS • Graphic or icon LCD • Version with touch screen • Modular and panel mount types • Remote display • Versions that can be expanded with EXP... expansion modules.

PORTABLE POWER ANALYZERS • IP65 casing • With built-in USB interface • GPRS/GSM communications • Available kits of current clamps and cables.

Page 23-18

Page 23-27

LED MEASURING INSTRUMENTS • Voltmeters, ammeters, frequency meters, cosphi meters and wattmeters. DIGITAL LED MULTIMETERS • Basic version, with energy meters, with 2 programmable outputs and built-in RS485 communication port.

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS • Primary current: 50-4000A • Secondary current: 5A • Solid and split-core types • Instrument and accuracy versions.

METERING

INSTRUMENTS AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Digital voltmeters, ammeters, wattmeters, frequency meters and cosphi meters Digital multimeters and power analyzers, expandable, with graphic LCD Connection to single, two, three phase systems Ideal for distribution systems, electricity cogeneration and on-board machinery installations. High measurement accuracy Totally programmable digital outputs RS485, RS232, USB, Ethernet, Profibus DP serial interface for remote control and data-logger.

Energy meters Single phase .................................................................................................................................................................... Single phase, MID certified .............................................................................................................................................. Three phase with or without neutral ................................................................................................................................ Three phase with neutral, MID certified ........................................................................................................................... Three phase with or without neutral, UTF certified ..........................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 23 23 23 23 23

8 9 10 11 12

Data concentrators General use ...................................................................................................................................................................... For photovoltaic control and supervision ........................................................................................................................

23 - 13 23 - 13

Digital metering instruments Modular LCD multimeters ............................................................................................................................................... Flush mount LCD multimeters ......................................................................................................................................... Flush mount touch-screen LCD power analyzers ............................................................................................................ Flush mount LED measuring instruments ....................................................................................................................... Flush mount LED multimeters ......................................................................................................................................... Modular LED measuring instruments ..............................................................................................................................

23 23 23 23 23 23

14 16 17 18 20 23

Communication devices, protection covers, accessories .......................................................... 23 - 25 Converter gateway, connecting cables ................................................................................. 23 - 26 Current transformers ...................................................................................................... 23 - 27

E NERGY M ANAGEMENT

Dimensions.................................................................................................................. 23 - 30 Wiring diagrams............................................................................................................ 23 - 33 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 23 - 36

Metering instruments and current transformers Energy meters Three phase with or without neutral, non expandable

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

63A direct connection, 4U, 2 programmable static outputs, multi-measurements

0.360

DME D301

80A direct connection, 4U RS485 interface, multi-measurements

0.360

DME D305 T2

Connection by CT /5A, 4U, 2 programmable static outputs, multi-measurements

0.332

Digital meter for three phase with neutral. DME D300 T2

DME D300 T2

Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral. DME D330

Connection by CT /5A sec. 4U, RS485 interface, multi-measurements

0.332

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

DME D330

Three phase with or without neutral, expandable

Digital meter for three phase with or without neutral. DME D310 T2

Order code

DME D310 T2

Connection by CT /5A 1 secondary, 2 programmable static outputs, 4U, LCD graphic display multimeasurements , expandable

0.332

configuration and remote control software See Section 27.

Description

EXM series expansion modules See page 28-3.

EXM10 00

2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated

EXM10 01

2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC

Communication ports.

EXM10 10

Operational characteristics – Nominal supply voltage: • 380...415VAC (L-L) for DME D300 T2, DME D310 T2, DME D330 and DME D305 • 190...415VAC (L-L) for DME D301 – Voltage range: • 323...456VAC (L-L) for DME D300 T2, DME D310 T2, DME D330 T2 and DME D305 • 162...456VAC (L-L) for DME D301 – Direct connection 63A for DME D300 T2 and 80A for DME D301 – Connection by TA /5A or 1A for DME D310 T2, DME D330 and DME D305 T2 – Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 0,5s (IEC/EN 62053-22) for DME D301, DME D305 T2 and DME D330 Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21) for other types. – Active energy measurement and accuracy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23) – LCD multifunction meter – Metrological LED with pulse emission for consumption indication – Clearable partial active energy measurements – 1 programmable digital input – 2 programmable static outputs except DME D330 and DME D301 – Built-in RS485 port for DME D330 and DME D301 and optional for DME D310 T2; compatible with and – Optic interface for EXM10... expansion modules with DME D310 T2 – Modular housing, 4 module – Sealable terminal blocks, standard supplied – Degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals. supervision and energy management software See Section 27.

DME D310 T2 EXPANSION MODULES. Inputs and outputs.

EXM10 10

General characteristics The energy meters are digital meters/analyzers of electric energy for systems with direct three-phase connection or by CT. Expandable with up to 3 EXM series interfaced by infrared beam.

Opto-isolated USB interface

EXM10 11

Opto-isolated RS232 interface

EXM10 12

Opto-isolated RS485 interface

EXM10 13

Ethernet interface with Web server function

EXM10 20

Opto-isolated RS485 interface and 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC

EXM10 30

Data storage, clock-calendar (RTC) with backup reserve energy for data logging

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC. Compliant with standards: EN 50740-3, IEC/EN 61010-1. Multi-measurements: - Total and partial active energy - Total and partial reactive energy - Voltage - Current - Active and reactive power - Power factor - Frequency - Total and partial hour counter - Average active power (calculation on every last 15 minutes) - Maximum demand.

Maximum combination

MAX 3

23-10

Software and accessories pages 23-25 and 26

Expansion modules page 28-3

Dimensions page 23-30

Wiring diagrams page 23-33

Technical characteristics page 23-38

Metering instruments and current transformers Digital measuring instruments. Starter kits Modular LCD multimeters non expandable

Order code

Description

Qty Wt per pkg. n°

Icon LCD, auxiliary supply 1 100...240VAC/120...250VDC. Multilanguage: Italian, English, French, Spanish, Portuguese and German

0.294

DMG 101

Icon LCD, auxiliary supply 1 100...240VAC/120...250VDC. 2 digital inputs and 2 outputs. Multilanguage: Italian, English, French, Spanish, Portuguese and German

0.294

DMG 110

Icon LCD, RS485 port, 1 auxiliary supply 100...240VAC/120...250VDC. Multilanguage: Italian, English, French, Spanish, Portuguese and German

0.294

DMG 200

Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, auxiliary supply 100-240VAC/110-250VDC. Multilanguage: Italian, English, French, Spanish and Portuguese

0.294

DMG 200 L01

Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 auxiliary supply 100-240VAC/110-250VDC. Multilanguage: English, Czech, Polish, German and Russian

0.294

DMG 210

Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 RS485 port, auxiliary supply 100-240VAC/110-250VDC. Multilanguage: Italian, English, French, Spanish and Portuguese

0.300

DMG 210 L01

Graphic 128x80 pixel LCD, 1 RS485 port, auxiliary supply 100-240VAC/110-250VDC. Multilanguage: English, Czech, Polish, German and Russian

0.300

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

DMG 1...

DMG 200 - DMG 210

Starter kits

[kg]

DMG 100

n°

[kg]

DMG KIT 100 060 Composed of one DMG 100 multimeter and n°3 CTs 60/5A for Ø22mm cable

1.035

DMG KIT 100 100 Composed of one DMG 100 multimeter and n°3 CTs 100/5A for Ø22mm cable

1.035

DMG KIT 100 150 Composed of one DMG 100 multimeter and n°3 CTs 150/5A for Ø23mm cable

0.856

DMG KIT 100 250 Composed of one DMG 100 multimeter and n°3 CTs 200/5A for Ø23mm cable

0.856

General characteristics DMG... digital multimeters are available with a modular housing, 4 module size, and are equipped with a graphic backlight LCD (except DMG 100/101/110 with icon display) capable of providing extremely clear, intuitive and flexible viewing of all electrical parameters of an installation. For DMG 110 and DMG 210 versions, there is a built-in isolated RS485 interface, while DMG 101 features 2 programmable digital inputs and 2 outputs. Main measurements: – Voltage: phase, line and system values – Current: phase values (neutral current calculated) – Power: apparent, active and reactive phase and total values – P.F.: Power Factor per phase and total – Frequency of measured voltage value – HIGH-LOW-AVERAGE value functions of all measurements – Maximum demand of power and current values – Asymmetric voltage and current – Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage and current values – Energy meters for active, reactive and apparent values – Hour counter (total and partial, 1 on DMG 200/210, 4 programmable on DMG 100/101/110) – Phase energy (DMG 100/110) – Harmonic analysis up to the 15th order (DMG 100/110). Operational characteristic – Auxiliary supply voltage range: 85...264VAC / 93,5...300VDC – Maximum rated measurement voltage • 600VAC (DMG 100/101/110) • 690VAC (DMG 200/210) – Voltage measurement range: • 50...720VAC phase-to-phase (DMG 100/101/110) • 20...830VAC phase-to-phase (DMG 200/210) – Usage in medium and high-voltage systems with voltage transformers – Rated input current: With external CT /5A (also 1A for DMG 100/101/110) – Current measurement range with CT up to 10,000A – Frequency measurement range: 45-66Hz – True RMS measurements for voltage and current values – Accuracy: • Voltage: ±0,5% (50...720VAC for DMG 1...) (50...830VAC) for DMG 2... • Current: ±0,5% (0,1...1,1In) • Power: ±1% f.s. • Frequency: ±0,05% • Active energy: Class 1 (IEC/EN 62053-21) • Reactive energy: Class 2 (IEC/EN 62053-23) – Non-volatile memory for data storage – Communication protocol Modbus-RTU and ASCII (only for DMG 210 and DMG 110) – Programming and remote control by software (only for DMG 210 and DMG 110; compatible with and software) – Modular housing, 4 module – Degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at terminals. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS OF DMG… KITS – Operating frequency: 50…60Hz – Secondary output current: 5A – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn – Rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V – Rated short time thermal current Ith: 40…60Ipn for 1 second – Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5Ith for 1 second – Insulation (dry type): class E – Faston terminals – Degree of protection: IP30. supervision and energy management software See Section 27.

DMG KIT 100 150

configuration and remote control software See Section 27. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: EAC for all; UL Listed for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices Multimeter for DMG 1.../DMG 2... types. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4; UL61010-1, CSA C22.2 n° 61010-1 for DMG 100/110 (DMG 101 pending); UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14 for DMG 200/210; IEC/EN 60044-1 for transformers of starter kits.

23-14

Software and accessories pages 23-25 and 26

Dimensions page 23-30

Wiring diagrams page 23-34

Technical characteristics page 23-40

Metering instruments and current transformers Current transformers Solid-core

Order code

Primary Burden current Ipn cl. 0.5 cl. 1

Qty Weight per pkg.

/5 [A]

[VA]

n°

[kg]

For Ø22mm/0.87” cable.

DM0T...

DM2T...

DM3T...

DM0T 0050

—

1.25

0.200

DM0T 0060

—

1.5

0.200

DM0T 0080

—

1.5

0.200

DM0T 0100

100

—

1.5

0.200

DM0T 0150

150

—

0.200

For Ø23mm/0.90” cable. For 30x10mm/1.18x0.39”, 25x12.5mm/0.98x0.49”, 20x15mm/0.79x0.59” busbars.

General characteristics The current transformers (CTs) in the DM series are installed in an electrical system to reduce the line current to a secondary value of 5A compatible with the ammeter inputs of the digital multimeters or protection relays. DM... are instrument transformers in class 1/0.5 without a primary winding and are normally used for high primary current values starting from 50A. The number of loops of the primary cable does not modify the accuracy but converts the primary current value proportional to secondary current.

300/5A

DM2T 0100

100

—

0.130

DM2T 0150

150

—

1.5

0.130

DM2T 0200

200

—

0.130

DM2T 0250

250

—

2.5

DM2T 0300

300

1.5

0.130

DM2T 0400

400

0.130

S2 L S1 K

For Ø30mm/1.18” cable. For 40x10mm1.57x0.39”, 30x20mm/1.18x0.79”, 25x25mm/0.98x0.98” busbars. DM3T 0200

200

—

0.260

DM3T 0250

250

—

0.260

DM3T 0300

300

2.5

0.260

DM3T 0400

400

2.5

0.260

DM3T 0500

500

2.5

0.260

DM3T 0600

600

0.260

DM3T 0800

800

0.260

For Ø66mm/2.60” cable. For 80x12,5mm/3.15”x0.49”, 60x30mm/2.36x1.18”, 50x50mm/1.97x1.97” busbars. DM35T 0800

800

0.460

DM35T 1000

1000

0.460

DM35T 1250

1250

0.460

300:n/5A 300:1/5A=300/5A

300/5A S2 L S1 K

300:n/5A 300:2/5A=150/5A

300/5A S2 L

DM4T 1000

1000

0.700

DM4T 1250

1250

0.760

DM4T 1500

1500

0.760

DM4T 1600

1600

0.800

DM4T 2000

2000

0.840

DM4T 2500

2500

0.900

DM4T 3000

3000

0.900

DM4T 3500

3500

0.900

DM4T 4000

4000

0.900

DM4T...

n°=2 300 / 5A 2 loops = 150 / 5A

9 J-2 K P1

For Ø86mm/3.38” cable. For 100x30mm/3.94x1.18”, 80x50mm/3.15x1,97”, 70x60mm/2.75x2.36” busbars.

DM35T...

300 / 5A standard 1 loop = 300 / 5A

9 J-2 K P1

0.130

n°=1

n°=3

S1 K

9 J-2 K P1

300 / 5A 3 loops = 100 / 5A

300:n/5A 300:3/5A=100/5A Operational characteristics – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz – Secondary output current: 5A – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V – IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith: 40-60 Ipn for 1 second – IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second – Insulation (dry type): Class E – Terminals: • Faston for DM2T and DM3T types • Screw for DM0T, DM4T and DM35T types – Sealable terminal covers for DM4T and DM35T types – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or by screws (fixing elements standard supplied with the product) – IEC degree of protection: IP30 – Ambient conditions • Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C • Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C. • Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%. Reference standards Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61869-2, IEC/EN 61869-1.

Dimensions page 23-31

23-27

Metering instruments and current transformers Current transformers Accuracy solid-core

Order code

Primary Burden Qty Weight current per Ipn cl. 0.5s cl. 0.5 pkg. /5 [A]

[VA]

n°

[kg]

For Ø28mm/1.10” cable. For 30x10mm/1.18x0.39”, 25x12.5mm/0.98x0.49”, 20x20mm/0.79x0.79” busbar.

DM1TP...

DM1TP 0060

1.5

0.560

DM1TP 0080

2,5

0.580

DM1TP 0100

100

2.5

3.75

0.480

DM1TP 0150

150

2.5

3.75

0.480

DM1TP 0200

200

2.5

3.75

0.480

DM1TP 0250

250

2.5

0.480

DM1TP 0300

300

2.5

0.480

DM1TP 0400

400

0.480

DM1TP 0500

500

0.480

General characteristics The DM...TP type accuracy current transformers (CTs) are installed in an electrical system to reduce the line current to a secondary value of 5A compatible with the ammeter inputs of the digital multimeters or protection relays. DM...TP are accuracy current transformers in class 0.5s without a primary winding and are normally used for high primary current values starting from 60A. The number of loops of the primary cable does not modify the accuracy but converts the primary current value proportional to secondary current.

300/5A

n=1 300 / 5A standard 1 loop = 300 / 5A

For Ø52mm2.04” cable. For 60x20mm/2.36x0.79”, 50x25mm/1.97x0.98” busbar.

DM3TP...

DM3TP 0500

500

3.75

0.700

DM3TP 0600

600

0.700

DM3TP 0800

800

0.700

DM3TP 1000

1000

0.700

For Ø66mm/2.60” cable. For 100x20mm/3.94x0.79”, 80x45mm/3.15x1.77” busbar.

DM5TP...

DM5TP 1000

1000

0.900

DM5TP 1250

1250

7.5

0.900

DM5TP 1600

1600

7.5

0.900

DM5TP 2000

2000

0.900

DM5TP 2500

2500

0.900

DM5TP 3000

3000

0.900

Consult Customer Service to inquiry about versions with Italian UTF certificates. For Ø33mm cable. For 40x10mm, 30x20mm, 25x25mm busbar.

Versions with Italian UTF certificates on request.

300:n/5A 300:1/5A=300/5A 300/5A

n=2 300 / 5A 2 loops = 150 / 5A

300:n/5A 300:3/5A=100/5A 300/5A

n=3 300 / 5A 3 loops = 100 / 5A

300:n/5A 300:3/5A=100/5A Operational characteristics – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz – Secondary output current: 5A – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V – IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith: 40-60 Ipn for 1 second – IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second – Insulation (dry type): Class E – Screw terminals – Sealable terminal covers – Fixing on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or by screws (fixing elements standard supplied with the product) – IEC degree of protection: IP30 – Ambient conditions • Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C • Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C. • Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%.

Reference standards Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61869-2, IEC/EN 61869-1.

23-28

Dimensions page 23-31

Metering instruments and current transformers Current transformers Compact prewired split-core

Order code

Primary Burden current Ipn cl. 0.5 cl. 1 /5 [A]

[VA]

Qty Weight per pkg. n°

[kg]

24x24mm/0.94x0.94” hole. Cable supplied as standard, length 1m.

DM1TMA...

DM1TMA 0100

100

––

1.2

0.200

DM1TMA 0150

150

––

1.2

0.200

DM1TMA 0200

200

––

1.2

0.200

DM1TMA 0250

250

––

1.2

0.200

36x38mm/1.42x1.50” hole. Cable supplied as standard, length 1m. DM2TMA 0250

250

––

1.5

0.380

DM2TMA 0300

300

––

1.5

0.380

DM2TMA 0400

400

––

1.5

0.380

DM2TMA 0500

500

––

1.5

0.380

Order code

Primary Burden current Ipn cl. 0.5 cl. 1 /5 [A]

Qty Weight per pkg.

[VA]

n°

[kg]

50x80mm/1.97x3.15” hole.

DM1TA...

DM2TA...

Operational characteristics – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz – Secondary output current: 5A – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V – IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith: 40-60 Ipn for 1 second – IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second – Cable supplied as standard, length 1m. – Insulation (dry type): Class E – Ambient conditions: • Operating temperature: -25...+50°C • Storage temperature: -40...+80°C • Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%. Reference standards Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61869-2, IEC/EN 61869-1.

DM2TMA...

Split-core

General characteristics The DM...TMA type current transformers (CTs) are installed in an electrical system to reduce the line current to a secondary value of 5A compatible with the ammeter inputs of the digital multimeters or protection relays. DM...TMA are instrument transformers in class 1 without a primary winding and are normally used for high primary current values starting from 100A.

DM1TA 0250

250

0.900

DM1TA 0300

300

1.5

0.900

DM1TA 0400

400

1.5

0.900

DM1TA 0500

500

2.5

0.900

DM1TA 0600

600

2.5

0.900

DM1TA 0800

800

7.5

0.900

DM1TA 1000 1000 5 80x80mm/3.15x3.15” hole.

0.900

DM2TA 0250

250

1.050

DM2TA 0300

300

1.5

1.050

DM2TA 0400

400

1.5

1.050

DM2TA 0500

500

2.5

1.050

DM2TA 0600

600

2.5

1.050

DM2TA 0800

800

7.5

1.050

DM2TA 1000

1000

1.050

80x120mm/3.15x4.72” hole. DM3TA 0500

500

—

1.250

DM3TA 0600

600

—

1.250

DM3TA 0800

800

7.5

1.250

DM3TA 1000

1000

1.250

DM3TA 1250

1250

7.5

1.250

DM3TA 1500

1500

1.250

General characteristics The DM...TA type current transformers (CTs) are installed in an electrical system to reduce the line current to a secondary value of 5A compatible with the ammeter inputs of the digital multimeters or protection relays. DM...TA are instrument transformers in class 0.5/1 without a primary winding and are normally used for high primary current values starting from 250A. Operational characteristics – Operating frequency: 50-60Hz – Secondary output current: 5A – Overload withstand: 120% Ipn – IEC rated insulation voltage Ui: 720V – IEC rated short-time thermal current Ith: 40-60 Ipn for 1 second – IEC rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 Ith for 1 second – Insulation (dry type): Class E – Screw terminals – Sealable terminal covers – Screw fixing (fixing elements standard supplied with the product) – IEC degree of protection: IP30 – Ambient conditions • Operating temperature: -25 ... +50°C • Storage temperature: -40 ... +80°C. • Relative humidity, non condensing: 90%. Reference standards Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61869-2, IEC/EN 61869-1.

80x160mm/3.15x6.30” hole.

DM3TA...

DM4TA 2000

2000

3.160

DM4TA 2500

2500

3.340

DM4TA 3000

3000

3.500

DM4TA 4000

4000

3.760

DM4TA...

Dimensions page 23-32

23-29

Page 24-8 DCRM SERIES • Modular housing • 2 steps • Settings by front potentiometers • 3 LED indications.

Page 24-10

Page 24-9 DCRL SERIES (EXPANDABLE) • Flush-mount housing: DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 (96x96mm/3.78x3.78”) DCRL 8 (144x144mm/5.67x5.67”) • 3/5/8 steps, expandable with EXP series modules (step increment, digital outputs, communication ports, etc.) • Backlit icon LCD • Ethernet communication interface (only for DCRL 8) • Alarm codes with scrolling texts, programmable in 6 languages (Italian, English, Spanish, French, German and Portuguese) • Independent voltage measurement input • Suitable for low and medium voltage systems • Capacitor overload protection • Internal panel temperature sensor • Voltage and current harmonic-content measurement up to 15th order • Front optical USB and Wi-Fi communication port for PC, smartphone and tablet connection • Programmable alarms • Protection via 2-level password to prevent all undesired access • Compatible with supervision and energy management software,

configuration and remote control software and with the application for Android/iOS.

DCRG SERIES (EXPANDABLE) • Flush-mount housing: DCRG 8 - DCRG 8IND (144x144mm/5.67x5.67”) • 8 steps, expandable with EXP series modules (step increment, inputs and outputs, communication ports, GPRS/GSM modem, data memory, etc.) and with Master-Slave function • 128x80 backlit graphic LCD, facilitating data reading even in poor lighting conditions and the display of system information clearly and intuitively • Ethernet communication interface • Texts in 10 languages: Italian, English, Spanish, French, German, Czech, Polish, Russian, Portuguese and one customisable • Voltage measurement input independent of supply input • Suitable for low and medium voltage systems • Capacitor overload protection • Internal panel temperature sensor • Voltage and current harmonic-content measurement up to 31st order • Suitable for dynamic power factor correction. • Power factor correction by single phase (SPPFC) • Capacitive reactive power factor correction (DCRG 8IND version) • Front optical USB and Wi-Fi communication port for PC, smartphone and tablet connection • Programmable alarms • Protection via 2-level password to prevent all undesired access • Calendar-clock with backup reserve energy. • Logging of up to 250 events • Compatible with supervision and energy management software,

configuration and remote control software and with the application for Android/iOS.

Page 24-13 THYRISTOR MODULES • 30, 50, 100kvar • Suitable for dynamic power factor correction • Current flow zero-crossing controlled connection-disconnection • Over-temperature protection • Over-current protectional capacitor switching.

AUTOMATIC

POWER FACTOR CONTROLLERS AND THYRISTOR MODULES

Microprocessor supervision and control Accurate TRMS measurement circuit Automatic intelligent adjustment system Versions from 2 to 24 steps and up to 32 with Master-Slave function Versions with static outputs Versions for capacitive reactive power factor correction Use in cogeneration and mediumvoltage systems USB, serial, Ethernet communication interfaces Modbus-RTU and ASCII communication protocols Thyristor modules for dynamic correction.

Reactive current control relay DCRM series .....................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 24 - 8

Automatic power factor controllers DCRL series ..................................................................................................................................................................... DCRG series ..................................................................................................................................................................... Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................... Communication devices ...................................................................................................................................................

24 24 24 24

9 10 12 12

Thyristor modules ......................................................................................................... 24 - 13

E NERGY M ANAGEMENT

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 24 - 14 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 24 - 15 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 24 - 17

Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules Automatic power factor controllers DCRL series

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

Single and three-phase low and medium-voltage systems.

DCRL 3 - DCRL 5

DCRL 3

3 steps, expandable up 1 to 6 steps, 100…440VAC

0.340

DCRL 5

5 steps, expandable up 1 to 8 steps, 100…440VAC

0.340

DCRL 8

8 steps, expandable up 1 to 14 steps, 100…440VAC

0.640

EXP80 00

Plastic insert for customisation label (only for DCRL 8)

0.050

Order code

Description

Accessory. 10

EXPANSION MODULES. Additional steps. EXP10 06

2 relay outputs to increase number of power factor correction steps

EXP10 07

3 relay outputs to increase number of power factor correction steps

DCRL 8

Inputs and outputs. EXP80 00

EXP10 03

2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC

Communication ports. EXP10 10

Opto-isolated USB interface

EXP10 11

Opto-isolated RS232 interface

EXP10 12 EXP10 13

Opto-isolated RS485 interface Opto-isolated ETHERNET interface (only for DCRL 8)

EXP 10... Snap-in fixing of EXP... expansion modules DCRL 3 - DCRL 5 with 1 module DCRL 8 with 2 modules

MAX 1 MAX 2 Backlit icon LCD Inductive / capacitive

Automatic Mode

Cooling fan status Output status

Manual mode

Step status Main display

Alarm active

Graphic bar

Indication of communication

General characteristics The DCRL series was developed with advanced functionality and produced with a dedicated ultracompact housing. It combines modern front design with practical mounting and expandability (EXP… modules). Its main features are: – Backlit icon LCD with excellent information display – Alarm codes with scrolling texts, programmable in 6 languages (Italian, English, Spanish, French, German and Portuguese) – Connection in single or three phase lines and cogeneration systems with 4-quadrant operation – Voltage measurement input independent of supply and which can be used in medium-voltage lines with VTs – Drastic reduction in the number of switching operations – Balanced use of steps with same power rating – Measurement of reactive power installed for each step – Capacitor over-current protection – Panel over-temperature protection via internal sensor – Accurate micro-breaking protection – Vast choice of measurements available, including voltage and current THD with single harmonic analysis up to the 15th order. – Wide voltage measurement range – High accuracy of true root mean square (TRMS) measurements – Front optical USB (CX 01 dongle) and Wi-Fi (CX 02 dongle) communication port for PC, smartphone and tablet connection – Compatible with Ethernet communication modules EXP10 13 (only for DCRL 8) – Compatible with supervision and energy management software, configuration and remote control software and with the application for Android/iOS. – Customisation with label on front (only for DCRL 8). Operational characteristics – Supply: • Auxiliary voltage: 100…440VAC • Frequency: 50/60Hz ±10% – Voltage input: • Rated voltage: 600VAC L-L (346VAC L-N) • Frequency range: 45…65Hz – Current input: • Single-phase connection • Rated current: 1A or 5A, configurable – Measurements and control: • Power factor adjustment: 0.5ind.…0.5cap. • Voltage measurement range: 50…720VAC L-L; 50…415VAC L-N • Current measurement range: 0.025…1.2A for 1A full scale; 0.025…6A for 5A full scale • Type of voltage and current measurement: true root mean square (TRMS). – Relay outputs (steps): • DRCL 3: 3 outputs • DCRL 5: 5 outputs • DCRL 8: 8 outputs • Contact arrangement: NO; the last is a changeover • Rated current: 5A 250VAC AC1 – Flush-mount housing: DCRL 3, DCRL 5 (96x96mm / 3.78x3.78”); DCRL 8 (144x144mm / 5.67x5.67”) – IEC degree of protection: DCRL 3, DCRL 5 IP54 and DCRL 8 IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals for all. Certifications and compliance: Certifications obtained: UL Listing for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Power factor controllers, EAC, RCM. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14. Contactors for power factor correction See section 2, page 2-14. Software: See section 27.

and

EXP expansion modules See section 28. Secondary display Accessories page 24-12

Expansion modules page 28-2

Alphanumeric display Dimensions page 24-14

Wiring diagrams page 24-15

Technical characteristics page 24-18

24-9

Automatic power factor controllers and thyristor modules Automatic power factor controllers DCRG series

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

no.

n°

[kg]

DCRG 8

8 steps, expandable up 1 to 24 steps, 100…440VAC

0.980

DCRG 8IND

8 steps, expandable up 1 to 24 steps, 100…440VAC, for capacitive reactive power factor correction

0.980

NTC 01

Remote temperature sensor, length 3m/3.3yd

0.150

Order code

Description

Accessories. 1

DCRG 8

EXPANSION MODULES Additional steps. EXP10 06

2 relay outputs to increase number of power factor correction steps

EXP10 07

3 relay outputs to increase number of power factor correction steps

Inputs and outputs.

EXP 10...

EXP10 00 EXP10 01

4 opto-isolated digital inputs 4 opto-isolated static outputs to increase number of static steps

EXP10 02

2 digital inputs and 2 opto-isolated static outputs

EXP10 03 EXP10 04

2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC 2 PT100 opto-isolated analogue inputs, either 0/4...20mA, 0...10V or 0...±5V

EXP10 05

2 opto-isolated analogue inputs 0/4…20mA, 0…10V or 0…±5V 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC

EXP10 08 EXP10 16

Capacitor protection with 2 inputs for temperature measurement with NTC sensors and 2 three-phase measurement inputs

Communication ports. EXP10 10

Opto-isolated USB interface

EXP10 11

Opto-isolated RS232 interface

EXP10 12 EXP10 13

Opto-isolated RS485 interface Opto-isolated ETHERNET interface with web server function

EXP10 14

Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface

EXP10 15

GPRS/GSM modem , without antenna

Other functions. EXP10 30 Data memory, calendar-clock with backup reserve power for data logging

For configuration via software, contact our Customer Service Office (Tel. +39 035 4282422; E-mail: service@LovatoElectric.com).

Maximum expandability DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND

EXP10 06

EXP10 07

EXP10 01

TOTAL

Controller

Module with 2 relay outputs

Module with 3 relay outputs

Module with 4 static outputs

STEPS

Steps

no. of modules

Relay

4 (2 steps)

–

2 (2 steps)

max. 2 (3 steps)

–

max. 4 (4 steps)

Snap-in fixing of 4 EXP... expansion modules DCRG 8 / DCRG 8IND

Static

General characteristics The DCRG automatic power factor controller satisfies the technical requirements of modern electrical systems in industry. It is designed to satisfy them, with the option of extending its functionality by using specific EXP series expansion modules. Mention should also be made of the optical communication port as standard, for programming the controller, diagnostics and data download. The backlit graphic LCD facilitates data reading even in poor lighting conditions and permits the display of system information clearly and intuitively. Its main features are: – 128x80-pixel backlit graphic LCD with texts in 10 languages: Italian, English, Spanish, French, German, Czech, Polish, Russian, Portuguese and one customisable – Connection in single and three-phase lines as well as three-phase lines with neutral control and cogeneration systems (4 quadrants) – Capacitive reactive power factor correction (DCRG 8IND) – Independent power factor correction for each single phase (SPPFC) – Use with medium-voltage lines with VTs – Capability for correct operation even in systems characterised by high harmonic content – Drastic reduction in the number of switching operations – Balanced use of steps with same power rating – Measurement of reactive power installed for each step – Recording of the number of connections for each step – Capacitor over-current protection on all three phases – Panel over-temperature protection via internal sensor and external sensor – Accurate micro-breaking protection – Current and voltage harmonic analysis – Quick CT programming function – USB (CX 01 dongle) and Wi-Fi (CX 02 dongle) communication port for PC, smartphone and tablet connection – Modbus-RTU TCP and ASCII communication protocol – Compatible with supervision and energy management software, configuration and remote control software and with the application for Android/iOS – Sending and reception of SMS, sending of e-mails with alarm diagnosis and data files, FTP Client function (with EXP10 15 module). Operational characteristics – Voltage measurement circuit: • Auxiliary supply voltage: 100...415VAC • Rated frequency: 50/60Hz (±10%) – Current measurement circuit: • Single and three-phase input • Rated current: 5A (1A programmable) – Measurements and control: • Power factor adjustment: 0.5ind....0.5cap. • Voltage measurement range: 50...720VAC • Current measurement range: 0.025...6A • Temperature measurement range: -30...+85°C • Capacitor overload current measurement range: 0...250% • Type of voltage and current measurement: true root mean square (TRMS). – Relay outputs: • 7 each with NO contact and the last as changeover • Rated current: 5A 250VAC AC1 – Flush-mount housing (144x144mm / 5.67x5.67”) – IEC degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 on terminals. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: UL Listing for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Electronic power factor regulator, EAC, RCM (only for DCRG 8). Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508, CSA C22.2 n°14. Contactors for power factor correction See section 2, page 2-14.

MAX 4

24-10

Accessories page 24-12

Expansion modules page 28-2

Dimensions page 24-14

Software: See section 27.

and

EXP expansion modules See section 28.

Wiring diagrams page 24-16

Technical characteristics page 24-18

Page 25-6 ATL 600 • Management of two power sources • AC power supply • 6 programmable digital inputs • 7 programmable relay outputs.

Page 25-7 ATL 800 • Management of 2 power sources and 1 tie breaker • AC and DC power supply • 8 programmable digital inputs • 7 programmable relay outputs • Built-in NFC technology • Real time clock (RTC) • Non-priority load management • Closed transition with brief parallel configuration • Built-in RS485 communication • Built-in PLC logic • Expandable with EXP series modules (inputs and outputs, communication ports).

Page 25-9 ATL DPS1 • Module specifically designed to control power supply voltage of motorised circuit breakers and changeover switches • Continuous monitoring of supply line status • Management via microcontroller management.

Page 25-6 ATL 610 • Management of two power sources • AC and DC power supply • 6 programmable digital inputs • 7 programmable relay outputs • Real time clock (RTC) • Expandable with EXP series modules (inputs and outputs, communication ports).

Page 25-8 ATL 900 • Management of 3 power sources and 2 tie breakers • AC and DC power supply • 12 programmable digital inputs • 10 programmable relay outputs • 1 programmable static output • Built-in NFC technology • Real time clock (RTC) • Non-priority load management • Closed transition with brief parallel configuration • Built-in RS485 communication • Built-in PLC logic • 4 current inputs • Expandable with EXP series modules (inputs and outputs, communication ports).

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROLLERS

Supervision of two or three three-phase power sources Emergency demand supervision for standby generating set Tie-breaker management Control of contactors, motorised circuit breakers and motorised changeover switches Closed transition Automatic non-priority load management Event logging Remote control and supervision Front optical port Built-in NFC technology Expandable with EXP modules Communication protocols Modbus-ASCII, RTU and TCP Real time clock.

Automatic transfer switch controllers for 2 power sources ATL 600 type non expandable for controlling 2 power sources............................................................................................. ATL 610 type expandable with EXP modules for controlling 2 power sources ...................................................................... ATL 800 type expandable with EXP modules for controlling 2 power sources and 1 tie breaker ............................................

SEC. - PAGE 25 - 6 25 - 6 25 - 7

Automatic transfer switch controllers for 3 power sources ATL 900 type expandable with EXP modules for controlling 3 power sources and 2 tie breakers ..........................................

25 - 8

Accessories Dual power supply module ................................................................................................................................................ Communication devices, software and accessories ............................................................................................................

25 - 9 25 - 10

E NERGY M ANAGEMENT

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 25 - 11 Wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................... 25 - 12 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 25 - 14

Automatic transfer switch controllers ATL series

ATL 600

ATL 610

ATL 800

ATL 900

POWER SUPPLY Rated DC supply voltage

––

12/24VDC

12/24/48VDC

Rated AC supply voltage

110...240VAC

45...66Hz

LCD graphic 128x80 pixel

LCD graphic 128x112 pixel

144x144mm/5.67x5.67”

IP40 / optional IP65

IP65

––

2 modules

3 modules

Frequency FRONT PANEL / HOUSING Backlit display Languages Size Degree of protection Expandable with EXP series modules

240x180x45mm/9.45x7.09x1.77” 240x180x45mm/9.45x7.09x1.77”

VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MEASUREMENT INPUT 2

Voltage inputs per line

Power sources that can be controlled

3 phases + neutral

Rated voltage Ue L-L

100…480VAC

690VAC

––

4 (by 5A or 1A CTs)

45…65Hz

Current inputs Frequency range BUILT-IN DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Number of inputs

Number of outputs

6 NO + 1 changeover

4 NO + 3 changeover

6 NO + 4 changeover + 1 SSR

Contact configuration INTERFACE

––

Front optical USB communication port

with CX01

Front optical Wi-Fi communication port

Programming with NFC technology

with CX02

USB communication

––

EXP10 10

RS232 communication

––

EXP10 11

RS485 communication

––

EXP10 12

(built in)

Ethernet communication

––

EXP10 13

Profibus communication

––

EXP10 14

Communication via Modem

––

EXP10 15

Communication via Modbus with automatic battery charger type BCG...RS

––

Number of tie breakers that can be managed

––

Programmable source type (utility or generation)

Closed transition

––

Non-priority load management

––

Switching management with power thresholds

––

PLC logic

––

Timers

––

System layout available on display

––

Custom system layouts

––

User alarms

Limits

100

250

FUNCTIONS

Event logging

Real time clock with backup reserve energy

––

Acoustic alarms

––

Analogue inputs

EXP10 04

Analogue outputs

EXP10 05

––

RGK RR

Accessory for alarm remoting

25-2

––

Automatic transfer switch controllers For 2 power sources ATL 600 - ATL 610

NON-STOP CONTROL! BACKLIT GRAPHIC LCD DISPLAY 128x80 pixel, with excellent legibility with adjustable brightness and display of events, alarms and measurements in 5 languages: English, Italian, French, Spanish and German.

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION PORT The optical port on the front, using a standard USB or Wi-Fi point, permits to communication with a PC, smartphone and tablet, to carry out programming, diagnostics and data download without removing power to the electric panel.

COMPACT SIZE

FIXING SYSTEM

INPUTS, OUTPUTS, INTERNAL VARIABLES, COUNTERS The inputs and outputs can be configured by the user to manage the various application requirements. Also available to the user are limit thresholds, counters, user alarms and remote control variables (ATL 610 only) to customise the control functions. The limit and counter statuses, if enabled, are shown in the appropriate pages on the display. CALENDAR CLOCK (ATL 610) Built-in calendar-clock with backup reserve power. DUAL POWER SUPPLY (ATL 610) 110...240VAC and 12/24VDC supply. EXPANDABILITY (ATL 610) Basic functions of the transfer switch controllers can be easily extended using EXP series expansion modules: - Relay outputs - Digital and analogue inputs and outputs - Opto-isolated RS232 interface - Opto-isolated RS485 interface - Opto-isolated Ethernet interface. Using modules dedicated to communications the device can be controlled and supervised by the software and controlled remotely and configured software. with the

44mm 1.73â&#x20AC;? 9mm 0.35â&#x20AC;?

Slim frame profile and reduced total depth simplify installation of the transfer switch controller also in very compact electric panels.

HIGH PROTECTION DEGREE The controller front and the optional frame seal have been designed to warrant an IP65 protection degree.

MAINTENANCE COUNTERS ATL features two counters used for maintenance; the first monitors the operating time and the second counts the number of switching operations. Exceeding the limit set on the counters activates the corresponding alarm.

The fixing system with metal screws guarantees excellent, lasting hold over time.

STATISTICS AND EVENTS The recorded statistical data is available to the user for understanding how the system operates. A cyclical internal memory records up to 100 events.

EMERGENCY DEMAND SUPERVISION FOR STANDBY GENERATING SET In applications where one of the two supply sources is a generating set, the transfer switch controller has specific functions to supervise the generator starting and stopping operations.

MAX 2

12/24VDC battery supply input

25-3

Automatic transfer switch controllers For 2 and 3 power sources ATL 800 - ATL 900

VERSATILE

CONFIGURATION ATL 800 Management of 2 energy sources and 1 tie breaker. 6 preconfigured system layouts. Non-priority load management. Management of transition with brief parallel configuration. RS485 built in. Built-in NFC technology. App and software: , , , .

GRAPHIC LCD AND 8-LANGUAGE TEXT The backlit graphic display simplifies the user interface and permits good visibility in environments with poor lighting. For ATL 800 and ATL 900 the texts are available in 8 languages: English, Italian, French, Spanish, German, Portuguese, Polish and Russian. The new interface allows the user to see, clearly and simply: - System status - Measurements - Statistical data - Threshold control - Alarm pop-up windows.

INPUTS, OUTPUTS, INTERNAL VARIABLES, COUNTERS The input and output functions are preconfigured with the most frequently used settings; the user can easily modify the predefined configuration and adapt the switch to their application requirements. All the inputs and outputs can be configured. There are various types of programmable internal variables: - Limit thresholds - Remote control variables - User alarms - Programmable counters - Timer. The limit, counter and enabled timer statuses are available for display on dedicated pages.

MAINTENANCE COUNTERS Two counters can be used for scheduling maintenance on the transfer systems installed: the first for recording the operating time and the second for monitoring the number of switching operations. Exceeding the limit set on the counters activates the corresponding alarm.

HIGH PROTECTION RATING The controller front and the frame seal have been designed to warrant an IP65 protection degree.

25-4

STATISTICS AND EVENTS The statistical data recorded by the transfer switch controller is available to the user for analysing the performance of the switching system. A cyclical internal memory records up to 250 events, providing useful information on the history of the system controlled.

BUILT-IN CALENDAR CLOCK A built-in calendar clock with backup reserve energy permits each event to be identified using the time and date on which it occurred.

BUILT-IN RS485 COMMUNICATION Thanks to the built-in RS485 communication port, ATL 800 and ATL 900 are already set up for remote supervision and control. In addition to this communication port, the user can install two further types of communication from those available in the EXPâ&#x20AC;Ś expansion modules.

DUAL AC/DC SUPPLY ATL switches can deal with all supply solutions demanded by the market. The best and safest solution is the simultaneous use of AC and DC supply. The switches can then be supplied by the AC line available and, during switching, in the absence of the AC line, the switch will be supplied by the battery via the DC inputs. Non-stop control! AC supply ensures supply during system monitoring and DC supply guarantees constant supply during switching.

PROGRAMMABLE PLC LOGIC With the built-in PLC functions, new switching logic can be defined through appropriate combinations of input, output and internal variable signals. TIMER 8 timer variables are available for use in the systemâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s PLC logic, in combination with the outputs or user alarms. Each timer variable has an input variable that controls it. When this variable changes state, so does the timer variable, but it remains in the new state only for the time specified then returns automatically to the starting condition. NFC CONNECTION Programming the parameters via tablet and smartphone is now possible also through NFC wireless technology. Bringing a smartphone or tablet with NFC connection enabled close to the display of the ATL 800-900 activates the app and the switch connected is recognised automatically. It will then be possible to modify the parameters and program the ATL. USB AND WI-FI COMMUNICATION INTERFACES ATL 800 and ATL 900 feature a front optical port for programming via optional USB (CX 01) or Wi-Fi (CX 02) communication interface. Advantages: - Not necessary to disconnect the supply from the panel to connect to the switch - Electrical safety (no physical connection) - Convenience of operating on the front.

Automatic transfer switch controllers For 2 and 3 power sources ATL 800 - ATL 900

FULL

OPTIONAL, FOR EVERY REQUIREMENT ATL 900 Management of 3 energy power sources and 2 tie breakers. 4 current inputs for the three phases and neutral. 14 preconfigured system layouts. Non-priority load management. Management of transition with brief parallel configuration. RS485 built in. Built-in NFC technology. App and software: , , , .

WI-FI COMMUNICATION INTERFACE (VIA CX 02) This connection can be used to: - Copy the parameters All the parameters of the ATL can be saved in the CX 02 memory and if necessary loaded back onto the same device (backup function) or a new switch (replication of the configuration). - Clone the device settings In addition to copying the parameters, the current values of the statistical data, counters and events can be saved in the memory in order to completely replicate an ATL on another device of the same type or restore the ATL to a previously saved state.

THREE TYPES OF TRANSITION AVAILABLE Open transition The switch transfers the load between the two sources, interrupting the supply for a period of time that can be programmed by the user.

ATL 900: Management of three sources and two tie breakers A single transfer switch controller can be used to manage applications which in the past required several transfer switch controllers in a cascade connection. 24 system layouts are available. 4 current inputs The current inputs permit the monitoring of the demand load and defining of the correct switching strategy. Knowing the power demanded by the system and the rated power of the sources, ATL900 can select the best source available that can supply the loads correctly.

In-phase transition The switch transfers the load between the two sources, interrupting the supply for a period of time that can be programmed. In this case the load is passed to a new source if spontaneous synchronisation is found; the amplitude, phase and frequency of the two sources must not differ from the maximum value set.

EXPANDABILITY ATL 800 and ATL 900 functionality can be extended thanks to the EXPâ&#x20AC;Ś series expansion modules. Three expansion slots are available, and while the switch is restarting the modules are recognised and configured entirely automatically. The following EXPâ&#x20AC;Ś modules are available: - Digital I/O modules - Analogue I/O modules - USB, RS232, RS485, Ethernet and Profibus communication modules - GPRS/GSM modem Since the additional modules are shared with other LOVATO Electric products, it is possible to save in management costs, guaranteeing flexibility and ease of installation, above all when the system has already been commissioned.

Closed transition With switches and external protections, configured appropriately, the two sources will be synchronised (where possible) or spontaneous synchronisation will be expected within a limit time. In presence of all synchronisation conditions the load will be transferred with closed transition and instantaneous parallel without interrupting supply.

EXP10...

25 MAX 3

25-5

Automatic transfer switch controllers For 2 power sources Expandable with EXP… modules

Order code

Description

ATL 800

Automatic transfer switch controller with optical port and NFC for 2 lines control and 1 tie breaker, 110...240VAC supply and 12/24/48VDC, expandable with EXP… series modules

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

1.000

ATL 800

EXPANSION MODULES. Snap on fixing of three modules on rear. Digital inputs and outputs.

EXP10...

EXP10 00

4 opto-isolated digital inputs

EXP10 01

4 opto-isolated static outputs

EXP10 02

2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated

EXP10 03

2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC

EXP10 06

2 relay outputs, normally open contact 5A 250VAC

EXP10 07

3 relay outputs, normally open contact 5A 250VAC 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 5A relay outputs 250VAC

EXP10 08

Analogue inputs and outputs. EXP10 04

2 opto-isolated analogue inputs 0/4...20mA or PT100 or 0...10V or 0...+-5V

EXP10 05

2 opto-isolated analogue outputs 0/4...20mA or 0...10V or 0...+-5V

Communication ports. EXP10 10

Opto-isolated USB interface

EXP10 11

Opto-isolated RS232 interface

EXP10 12

Opto-isolated RS485 interface

EXP10 13

Opto-isolated Ethernet interface

EXP10 14

Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface

General characteristics The automatic transfer switch controller ATL 800 is used for the automatic or manual switching of the load between two lines in accordance with the selected switching logic. It has outputs for the “automatic” and/or “manual” control of contactors or motorised circuit breakers and switches. It can also manage a third control device as tie breaker or non-priority load management. The layout and system status are displayed directly on the graphic LCD. The main features are: – AC and DC supply inputs – Measurement inputs for three phase + neutral voltage values; also suitable for 1 and 2 phase lines – 128x80 backlit graphic LCD to view measurements, events and alarms in 8 languages (English, Italian, French, Spanish, German, Portuguese, Polish and Russian) – Active operating mode indicator LED – Viewing of L-L and L-N voltage values of the controlled lines – Viewing the status of contactors or motorised circuit breakers both via display and LED – 6 system layouts available – Management of a tie breaker – 8 programmable digital inputs – 7 programmable relay outputs – Viewing of L-L and L-N voltage values of the controlled lines – Configuration programming of lines, type of source (line/generator), control and supervision parameters for emergency demand of generating set – Possibility of transferring load with closed transition and spontaneous or controlled genset synchronisation – Non-priority load management – Built-in programmable PLC logic – Built-in RS485 communication – Event logging – Virtual calendar clock (RTC) – Communication interface by front optical port with CX01 or CX02 dongle using USB or Wi-Fi – Parameter programming via NFC technology and the App supervision and energy – Compatible with management software, remote control and configuration software and with the application for Android/iOS – Modbus-RTU, ASCII and TCP communication protocol CONTROL FUNCTIONS OF THE LINES – Phase sequence and phase loss – Minimum and maximum voltage – Voltage asymmetry – Minimum and maximum frequency. Operational characteristics – Power supply • Power supply voltage: 100...240VAC; 12/24/48VDC – Voltage measurement inputs • Rated voltage Ue: 100...600VAC (L-L) • Frequency range: 45...65Hz. – Programmable digital inputs • Negative inputs – Programmable relay outputs • 2 each with 1 normally open contact (NO - SPST) rated 12A 250VAC • 2 each with 1 normally open contact (NO - SPST) rated 8A 250VAC • 3 each with 1 changeover contact (NO/NC - SPDT) 8A 250VAC – Enclosure • Flush-mount housing: 180x240mm/5.7x5.7” • IEC degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 at back.

EXP… expansion module fixing on ATL 800

MAX 3

, See section 27

and

software and APP

EXP expansion modules See page 28-2. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, RCM. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61010-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-6-1, UL508 and CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Accessories page 25-9 and 10

Dimensions page 25-11

Wiring diagrams page 25-12

25-7

Automatic transfer switch controllers For 3 power sources Expandable with EXP… modules

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

ATL 900

Automatic transfer switch 1 controller with optical port and NFC for 3 lines control and 2 tie breakers, 110...240VAC supply and 12/24/48VDC, expandable with EXP… series modules

n°

[kg]

Order code

Description

1.800

ATL 900

EXPANSION MODULES. Snap on fixing of three modules on rear. Digital inputs and outputs.

EXP10...

EXP10 00

4 opto-isolated digital inputs

EXP10 01

4 opto-isolated static outputs

EXP10 02

2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated

EXP10 03

2 relay outputs 5A 250VAC

EXP10 06

2 relay outputs, normally open contact 5A 250VAC

EXP10 07

3 relay outputs, normally open contact 5A 250VAC 2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 5A relay outputs 250VAC

EXP10 08

Analogue inputs and outputs. EXP10 04

2 opto-isolated analogue inputs 0/4...20mA or PT100 or 0...10V or 0...+-5V

EXP10 05

2 opto-isolated analogue outputs 0/4...20mA or 0...10V or 0...+-5V

Communication ports. EXP10 10

Opto-isolated USB interface

EXP10 11

Opto-isolated RS232 interface

EXP10 12

Opto-isolated RS485 interface

EXP10 13

Opto-isolated Ethernet interface

EXP10 14

Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface

EXP10 15

GPRS/GSM modem

EXP… expansion module fixing on ATL 900

MAX 3

General characteristics The automatic transfer switch controller ATL 900 is used for the automatic or manual switching of the load between three lines in accordance with the selected switching logic. It has outputs for the “automatic” and/or “manual” control of contactors or motorised circuit breakers and switches. It can also manage two more control devices as tie breakers or non-priority load management. It has four current inputs for managing switching with power thresholds. The layout and system status are displayed directly on the graphic LCD. The main features are: – AC and DC supply inputs – Measurement inputs for three phase + neutral voltage values; also suitable for 1 and 2 phase lines – 4 current measurement inputs – 128x112 backlit graphic LCD to view measurements, events and alarms in 8 languages (English, Italian, French, Spanish, German, Portuguese, Polish and Russian) – Active operating mode indicator LED – Viewing of L-L and L-N voltage values of the controlled lines – Viewing the status of contactors or motorised circuit breakers both via display and LED – 6 system layouts available – Management of a tie breaker – 12 programmable digital inputs – 10 programmable relay outputs – 1 static output – Viewing of L-L and L-N voltage values of the controlled lines – Configuration programming of lines, type of source (line/generator), control and supervision parameters for emergency demand of generating set – Possibility of transferring load with closed transition and spontaneous or controlled genset synchronisation – Non-priority load management – Built-in programmable PLC logic – Built-in RS485 communication – Event logging – Virtual calendar clock (RTC) – Communication interface by front optical port using USB CX01 or Wi-Fi CX02 dongle – Parameter programming via NFC technology and the App supervision and energy – Compatible with management software, remote control and configuration software and with the application for Android/iOS – Modbus-RTU ASCII and TCP communication protocol. CONTROL FUNCTIONS OF THE LINES – Phase sequence and phase loss – Minimum and maximum voltage – Voltage asymmetry – Minimum and maximum frequency. Operational characteristics – Power supply • Power supply voltage: 100...240VAC; 12/24/48VDC – Voltage measurement inputs • Rated voltage Ue: 100...600VAC (L-L) • Frequency range: 45...65Hz. – Programmable digital inputs • Negative inputs – Programmable relay outputs • 3 each with 1 normally open contact (NO - SPST) rated 12A 250VAC • 3 each with 1 normally open contact (NO - SPST) rated 8A 250VAC • 4 each with 1 changeover contact (NO/NC - SPDT) 8A 250VAC • 1 30VDC 50mA static output – Enclosure • Flush-mount housing: 180x240mm/5.7x5.7” • IEC degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 at back. , See section 27

and

software and APP

25-8

Accessories page 25-9 and 10

Technical characteristics page 25-14

Dimensions page 25-11

Wiring diagrams page 25-13

Automatic transfer switch controllers Dual power supply module

Order code

Description

ATL DPS1

For controlling and selecting supply for motorised breakers/ switches, 110...230VAC configurable

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

0.300

ATL DPS1

110VAC MIN

230VAC MAX

MIN

MAX

Line absent

< 88V

> 152V

< 176V

> 288V

Line present

< 92V

> 144V

< 185V

> 273V

Using the thresholds above ATL DPS1 outputs one of the power supplies available according to the logic shown in the table: Status Line 1

LED Line 1

Status Line 2

LED Line 2

Output

LED Output

ATL DPS1

Alarm contact

LED Fault

<MIN OR >MAX

OFF

ON - from line 1

ON - OK

Closed

OFF

ON - from line 1

ON - OK

Closed

OFF

<MIN OR >MAX

OFF

ON - from line 2

ON - OK

Closed

OFF

<MIN

OFF

<MIN

OFF

Open

OFF

>MAX

OFF

<MIN OR >MAX

OFF

Open

<MIN OR

OFF

>MAX

OFF

Open

<MIN OR >MAX

OFF

ON - Fault Internal relays

OFF

>MIN

OFF

>MAX >MIN OK

ON ON <MIN OR

Open

Open Internal

General characteristics ATL DPS1 is capable of measuring and controlling voltages at its inputs selecting the most ideal to connect to the output. It is suitable to supply motorised circuit breakers and changeover switches in automatic switching systems of 2 three phase supply lines. The two voltage inputs of the module are independent and insulated; each is capable of supplying the internal measuring circuit managed by the microcontroller. It reduces the number of components and improves installation safety. Main ATL DPS1 features include: – Voltage value selectable via bypass terminals – Minimum and maximum voltage tripping thresholds – 2 single phase L+N inputs – 1 single phase L+N output – L1 priority line – Use with motorised control units powered at 110VAC or 230VAC – Output voltage monitoring – Internal relay self-diagnosis – Indicating LEDs for abnormal conditions and status of inputs and outputs. Operational characteristics – Rated supply voltage: 110...230VAC configurable – Frequency: 50/60Hz – Input voltage range: 80…300VAC – Voltage tripping thresholds min / max: 80% and 120% of preset value – 2 line inputs L1-L2: Single phase, between phase and neutral – Current output: 4A max. – Priority line: L1 when both input values are within limits – Fixed delay time between line switching: 0.5s – 4 status indication LEDs for voltage of each line within limits, voltage present at output, relay output anomaly – Mounting: 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or screw-type by means of removable clips – Modular housing, 3 module – IEC degree of protection: IP40 on front; IP20 at rear. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus, EAC, RCM. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61010-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-6-1, UL508 and C22.2 n° 14.

relays

>MAX

Dimensions page 25-11

Wiring diagrams page 25-13

25-9

Page 26-6 ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROLLERS • Starting with or without power key switch • Programmable inputs and outputs • Front LED indicators for engine alarm conditions and diagnostics.

Page 26-8 AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE (AMF) GEN-SET CONTROLLERS • Automatic starting of generator and load switching to stand-by emergency source in case of mains failure • Supervision in “open transition” for contactors, motorised circuit breakers and motorised changeover switches • Engine protection • Programmable inputs, outputs and alarms.

Page 26-10 REMOTE UNITS • Remote viewing and control panels • Remote annunciator for alarm and status indication • Digital outputs for alarm and status condition remotely.

Page 26-7 STAND ALONE GEN-SET CONTROLLERS • Generator voltage and current control • Engine protection • Programmable inputs and outputs • Programmable alarm properties.

Page 26-9 PARALLELING CONTROLLERS FOR MAINS-GENERATOR AND GENERATOR-GENERATOR • Mains-generator “closed transition” synchronising • Mains-generator load sharing with source peak demand control • Generator paralleling supervision (island mode with load sharing).

Page 26-11 COMMUNICATION DEVICES, ACCESSORIES AND SOFTWARE • Communication interfaces • Additional digital and analog inputs and outputs • GPRS-GSM module • Setup and supervision software • APP.

ENGINE

AND GENERATOR CONTROLLERS

Extensive selection of functions to satisfy all application requirements Power supply range 12-24VDC for each single product Totally programmable inputs, outputs and alarms RS232, RS485, USB, Ethernet communication interface Engine control by CANbus Setup and supervision software Modem control for sending alarm messages and emails.

Engine protection controllers .......................................................................................................................................... Stand alone gen-set controllers ....................................................................................................................................... Automatic mains failure (AMF) gen-set controllers ......................................................................................................... Paralleling controllers for mains-generator and generator-generator ............................................................................. Remote units .................................................................................................................................................................... Communication devices and accessories ........................................................................................................................ Software ..........................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 26 26 26 26 26 26 26

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 26

E NERGY M ANAGEMENT

Engine and generator controllers

Engine and generator controllers Characteristics

ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROLLERS

STAND ALONE GEN-SET CONTROLLERS

RGK 30

RGK 20

RGK 400SA RGK 420SA

RGK 600SA RGK 601SA

RGK 700SA

RGK 800SA

Generator voltage control

–

L-N

L1-L2-L3-N

Current control

–

L1-L2-L3

L1-L2-L3-N

Rated frequency

–

50/60Hz

50/60/400Hz

5 neg.+1 pos. (emergency) 4 neg.+1 pos. (emergency) 6 neg.+1 pos. (emergency) 8 neg.+1 pos. (emergency)

Digital inputs

n°

Digital outputs

n°

2 (Relay)

3 (SSR)

5 (SSR)

6 (SSR)

3 (Relay) + 4 (SSR)

3(Relay)+6 (SSR)+1(SO)

“D+” and “AC”

“D+”, “AC”, Hz

“D+”, Hz

“D+”, “AC”, Hz

–

1+2 (EXP1040)

Engine running inputs Ohmic inputs for fuel-pressuretemperature (programmable as digital inputs) Remote supervision

–

CANbus interface

–

RGK 601SA

Rated battery voltage

12/24VDC

Power supply range

9...33VDC

9...35VDC

7...33VDC

Mains voltage control

–

Rated voltage range

–

10...277VAC

100...480VAC

30...600VAC

5A/1A

LCD with icons and backlight

Graphic backlight LCD, 128x80 pixels

“W” or generator frequency or “Pick-up”

VT programming

–

Rated input current

–

TRMS voltage measurement

–

TRMS current measurement

–

Display

–

7 digit LCD

Engine running magnetic pick-up input

–

“W”

“W” or generator frequency

Engine speed input

RGK 600SA “W” or generator frequency or “Pick-up”

“W” or generator frequency or “Pick-up”(RGK 600SA)

Auxiliary analog input

–

I/O expansion

–

1 x EXP1040

RGK RR

USB/Optical port on front

–

Wi-Fi port on front

–

USB port at rear

–

EXP1010

Ethernet port with Web server function

–

EXP1013

–

GPRS/GSM modem

–

RS232 serial port

–

– (TTL)

–

– –

RS485 serial port

–

Event logging

–

3 x EXP... + RGK RR

EXP1015 EXP1011

RTC (Real Time Clock)

–

Programmable Inputs/Outputs

–

PLC logic function

–

5 (GB - I - F - P - E)

Alarms User alarms

n°

Alarm property customising

–

Texts for alarms, events and parameters

–

Multilanguage (type)

n°

Upload languages

–

5 (GB - I - F - E - D)

–

Load sharing

–

Generator paralleling

–

Mains-generator synchronising (closed transition)

–

IP40

IP40, IP65 with optional gasket seal

IP65

cULus, EAC

cULus (pending), EAC

cULus, EAC

IEC front degree of protection Certifications

Frequency only. Controller uploading of other mutilanguage sets.

26-2

For RGK 400SA only.

Engine and generator controllers

AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE (AMF) GEN-SET CONTROLLERS

Generator voltage control

PARALLELING / LOAD SHARING CONTROLLERS

RGK 600 RGK 601 RGK 610

RGK 700

RGK 800

RGK 900

RGK 900SA

L1-L2-L3-N

Current control

L1-L2-L3

L1-L2-L3-N

Rated frequency

50/60Hz

50/60/400Hz

Digital inputs

n°

4 neg.+1 pos. (emergency)

6 neg.+1 pos. (emergency)

8 neg.+1 pos. (emergency) 12 neg.+1 pos. (emergency) 12 neg.+1 pos. (emergency)

Digital outputs

n°

6 (SSR)

3 (Relay) + 4 (SSR)

3 (Relay) + 6 (SSR) + 1(SO) 3 (Relay) + 6 (SSR) + 1(SO) 3 (Relay) + 6 (SSR) + 1(SO)

“D+”, Hz

“D+”, “AC”, Hz

Engine running inputs Ohmic inputs for fuel-pressure-temperature Remote supervision

RGK 610

CANbus interface

RGK 601

Rated battery voltage

12/24VDC

Power supply range

7...33VDC

7...36VDC

L1-L2-L3-N

–

100...480VAC

30...600VAC

5A/1A

Display

Graphic backlight LCD, 128x80 pixels

Graphic backlight LCD, 128x112 pixels

Engine running magnetic pick-up input

RGK 600/RGK 610 “W” or generator frequency or “Pick-up”

“W” or generator frequency or “Pick-up”

Mains voltage control Rated voltage range VT programming Rated input current TRMS voltage measurement TRMS current measurement

Engine speed input

“W”/“Pick-up” (RGK 600/RGK 610) or generator frequency

Auxiliary analog input I/O expansion

–

RGK RR

3 x EXP... + RGK RR

4 x EXP... + RGK RR

EXP1010

USB/Optical port on front Wi-Fi port on front USB port at rear

EXP1010 (RGK 610)

–

EXP1010

Ethernet port with Web server function

–

EXP1013

GPRS/GSM modem

–

EXP1015

EXP1011

RS232 serial port

EXP1011 (RGK 610)

RS485 serial port

EXP1012 (RGK 610)

–

Event logging RTC (Real Time Clock) Programmable Inputs/Outputs PLC logic function

–

Alarms User alarms

n°

5 (GB - I - F - P - E)

Alarm property customising Texts for alarms, events and parameters Multilanguage (type) Upload languages

n°

–

Load sharing

–

Generator paralleling

–

Mains-generator synchronising (closed transition)

–

IEC front degree of protection

IP40, IP65 with optional gasket seal

IP65

Certifications

cULus (pending for RGK 610), EAC

cULus, EAC

– –

26-3

Engine and generator controllers Stand alone gen-set controllers

RGK 400SA

RGK 420SA

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

RGK 400SA

12/24VDC, icon LCD display, 5 inputs, 5 outputs

n°

[kg]

0.410

RGK 420SA

12/24VDC, icon LCD display, built-in 3 position key switch, 5 inputs, 5 outputs

0.430

RGK 600SA

12/24VDC, graphic LCD display, 1 w/Pick-up speed input, 4 inputs, 6 outputs

0.540

RGK 601SA

12/24VDC, graphic LCD display, 1 CANbus port, 4 inputs, 6 outputs

0.530

RGK 700SA

12/24VDC, graphic LCD display, 1 RS232 serial port, CANbus port, 6 inputs, 7 outputs

0.900

RGK 800SA

12/24VDC, graphic LCD display, 1 RS485 serial port, CANbus port. Expandable with EXP... modules, 8 inputs, 10 outputs

0.980

Programmable functions and properties

RGK 600SA - RGK 601SA

Charact.

RGK 4...SA RGK 6...SA RGK 700SA RGK 800SA

Inputs

Relay outputs

–

Protected 5 static outputs

Resistive/ 1 Digital inputs

Order code

Description

RGK 700SA - RGK 800SA

EXPANSION MODULES AND ACCESSORIES FOR RGK 4...SA EXP10 40

2 digital/resistive inputs, 2 static outputs

EXP10 41

2 thermocouple inputs, 2 static outputs

EXP80 05

IP65 housing gasket

ACCESSORY FOR RGK 600SA AND RGK 601SA EXP80 01

IP65 housing gasket

EXPANSION MODULES FOR RGK 800SA Inputs and outputs.

EXP 10...

STAND ALONE APPLICATION

G CONTROL PANEL

EXP10 00

4 opto-isolated digital inputs

EXP10 01

4 opto-isolated static outputs

EXP10 02

2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated

EXP10 03

2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC

EXP10 04

2 opto-isolated analog inputs 0/4-20mA or PT100 or 0-10V or 0...±5V

EXP10 05

2 opto-isolated analog outputs 0/4-20mA or 0-10V or 0...±5V

EXP10 08

2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC

EXP10 40

2 digital/resistive inputs, 2 static outputs

EXP10 41

2 thermocouple inputs, 2 static outputs

Communications interfaces. EXP10 10

Opto-isolated USB interface

EXP10 11

Opto-isolated RS232 interface

EXP10 12

Opto-isolated RS485 interface

EXP10 13

Ethernet interface with Web server function

EXP10 15

GPRS/GSM modem

General characteristics for RGK 400SA - RGK 420SA – Key with 3 positions (OFF, local start, remote start), removable in OFF and remote start position (for RGK 420SA) – Power supply: 7...33VDC – VAC inputs: Generator L1-L2-L3-N – Single, two and three phase voltage control – Rated measurement voltage range: 100...480VLL (3PH+N) – Programmable VT ratio – Frequency measurement range: 45...65Hz – Current input: 1PH, /5A or /1A – Display: LCD with icons (52x35mm/2.05x1.38”) – Programming port: IR with support of CX01 (USB) and CX02 (Wi-Fi) dongles – NFC technology for parameter setup – Powersave mode – Inputs: 5 negative + 1 positive for emergency – Outputs: 5 positive, 2A, protected – Common pin dedicated to EV and START outputs to be used with emergency push button – Engine running detection: “D+”, Hz – Engine speed inputs: “W” or Magnetic “Pick-up” – 1 analog ohmic input for oil pressure, engine temperature or fuel level control – Alarm and parameter text in 5 languages – Customisable alarm text (2 alarms) – Operating temperature: -30...+60°C app – Parameter configuration by NFC technology with – Compatible with and software. General characteristics for RGK 600SA - RGK 601SA - RGK 700SA - RGK 800SA – Power supply: 7...33VDC – VAC inputs: Generator L1-L2-L3-N – Single, two and three phase voltage control – Rated measurement voltage range: • 100...480VAC for RGK 600SA and RGK 601SA • 30...600VAC for RGK 700SA and RGK 800SA – Programmable VT ratio – Frequency measurement range: 45...65Hz – Current input: 3PH, /5A or /1A – Graphic LCD: 128x80 pixels with backlight – Programming port: IR with support of CX01 (USB) and CX02 (Wi-Fi) dongles – Common pin dedicated to EV and START outputs to be used with emergency push button – Engine running detection: “D+”, Hz – Engine speed inputs: “W” or Magnetic “Pick-up” (RGK 601SA excluded) – 1 CANbus-J1939 port (RGK 600SA excluded) – 3 analog ohmic inputs for oil pressure, engine temperature and fuel level control – 1 built-in alarm remote port – Non-volatile memory for event storage – Alarm, event and parameter text in 5 languages – Customisable alarm text (8 alarms) – Operating temperature: -30...+70°C. – Modbus-RTU and Modbus-ASCII protocols – Compatible with and software. For RGK 700SA – RGK 800SA only – PLC logic for inputs, outputs and internal status – 1 communication port: RS232 for RGK 700SA; RS485 for RGK 800SA – Degree of protection: IEC IP65 on front; suitable for use with UL/CSA Type 4X outdoor enclosure installation. For RGK 800SA only – Neutral current measurement range: 0.050...6A or 0.050...1.2A – 400Hz frequency support – 1 programmable analog input – Modbus-TCP communication protocol – Current leakage control towards earth/ground – Clock-calendar (RTC) Certification and compliance Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Generator controllers except pending for RGK4...SA; EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. and See Section 27.

LOAD

software,

app

EXP series expansion modules See Section 27, page 2.

Accessories and software pages 26-11 and 12

Expansion modules page 28-2

Dimensions page 26-13

26-7

Engine and generator controllers Automatic mains failure (AMF) gen-set controllers

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

RGK 600

12/24VDC, graphic LCD display, w/Pick-up speed input, 4 inputs, 6 outputs

n°

[kg]

0.540

RGK 601

12/24VDC, graphic LCD display, CANbus port, 4 inputs, 6 outputs

0.540

RGK 610

12/24VDC, graphic LCD 1 display, w/Pick-up speed input, 4 inputs, 6 outputs, expandable with EXP... modules

0.600

RGK 700

12/24VDC, graphic LCD 1 display, RS232 serial port, CANbus port, 6 inputs, 7 outputs

0.880

RGK 800

12/24VDC, graphic LCD 1 display, RS485 serial port, CANbus port, 8 inputs, 10 outputs, expandable with EXP... modules,

0.960

RGK 600 - RGK 601 - RGK 610

RGK 700 - RGK 800

Programmable functions and properties Characteristic

RGK 600 RGK 601 RGK 610

RGK 700

RGK 800

Inputs

Relay outputs

–

Protected static outputs

Resistive/ Digital inputs

Order code

Description

ACCESSORY FOR RGK 600, RGK 601 AND RGK 610 EXP80 01

IP65 housing gasket

EXPANSION MODULES FOR RGK 610 AND RGK 800 Communications interfaces. EXP10 10

Opto-isolated USB interface

EXP10 11

Opto-isolated RS232 interface

EXP10 12

Opto-isolated RS485 interface

EXPANSION MODULES FOR RGK 800 Inputs and outputs. EXP 10...

AMF (AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE) APPLICATION

EXP10 00

4 opto-isolated digital inputs

EXP10 01

4 opto-isolated static outputs

EXP10 02

2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated

EXP10 03

2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC

EXP10 04

2 opto-isolated analog inputs 0/4-20mA or PT100 or 0-10V or 0...±5V

EXP10 05

2 opto-isolated analog outputs 0/4-20mA or 0-10V or 0...±5V

EXP10 08

2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC

EXP10 40

2 digital/resistive inputs, 2 static outputs

EXP10 41

2 thermocouple inputs, 2 static outputs

Communications interfaces. EXP10 13

Ethernet interface with Web server function

EXP10 15

GPRS/GSM modem

AMF PANEL

LOAD

26-8

Accessories and software pages 26-11 and 12

Expansion modules page 28-2

Dimensions page 26-13

General characteristics for RGK 600 - RGK 601 - RGK 610 - RGK 700 - RGK 800 – Power supply: 7...33VDC – VAC inputs: Mains and generator L1-L2-L3-N – Voltage control for one, two and three phase systems with or without neutral – Rated measurement voltage: • 480VAC for RGK 600, RGK 601 and RGK 610 • 600VAC for RGK 700 and RGK 800 – Rated measurement voltage range: • 100...480VAC for RGK 600, RGK 601 and RGK 610 • 30...600VAC for RGK 700 and RGK 800 – Frequency measurement range: 45-65Hz – Programmable VT ratio – Current measurement range (3 PH): 0.050...6A or 0.050...1.2A – Graphic LCD: 128x80 pixels with backlight – 1 USB/optical and Wi-Fi port on front for programming – Engine running detection: “D+”, generator voltage and frequency – Engine speed inputs: “W” or Magnetic “Pick-up” (RGK 601 excluded) – 1 CANbus-J1939 port (RGK 600 and RGK 610 excluded) – 3 analog ohmic inputs for oil pressure, engine temperture and fuel level control – 1 built-in alarm remote port – Non-volatile memory for event storage – Alarm, event and parameter text in 5 languages – Alarm text customisable (8 alarms) – Event log – Modbus-RTU and Modbus-ASCII communication protocols (RGK 600 and RGK 601 excluded) – Compatible with and software – 1 slot for EXP module (EXP10 10, EXP10 11, EXP10 12) for RGK 610 – 3 slots for EXP modules for RGK 800. For RGK 700 – RGK 800 only – PLC logic for inputs, outputs and internal status – 1 communication port: RS232 for RGK 700; RS485 for RGK 800 – Degree of protection: IEC IP65 on front; suitable for use with UL/CSA Type 4X outdoor enclosure installation. For RGK 800 only – Neutral current measurement range: 0.050...6A or 0.050...1.2A – 400Hz frequency support – 1 programmable analog input – Modbus-TCP communication protocol – Current leakage control towards earth/ground – Clock-calendar (RTC). Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus - File E93601), as Auxiliary Devices - Generator controllers except pending for RGK 610; EAC. Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL 508, CSA C22.2 n° 14. and See Section 27.

software

EXP series expansion modules See Section 28, page 2.

Engine and generator controllers Software

Supervision and Energy management software

Parameter configuration and remote control software

APP

Supervision and Energy management software The software provides for the remote control and supervision of the RGK... controllers. See details given in Section 27. Its structure and applications are based on MS SQL relational database management system. Consulting is made through popular programs for Internet browsing available across different platforms and operating systems. It is a highly versatile system, simultaneously accessible to a large number of users/workstations via intranets, VPN or Internet. Parameter configuration and remote control software is a parameter configuration and remote The monitoring software shared by the entire latest generation of RGK gen-set controllers with communication port. It can be installed in the Windows® environment and connect individually (one node at a time) to the RGK gen-set controller connected to the network. – Supports connection via CX01 (USB) or CX02 (Wi-Fi) dongle, USB, RS232, RS485, Ethernet and modem – Product configuration: • Parameter setting • Project file management – Product firmware upgrade (via CX01) – Remote control: • Monitoring of main measurements • Sending commands to products – Reading alarms and events memory. See details given in Section 27. APP for smartphone and tablets (Setup And Maintenance 1) application allows the user to program the controller, view alarm conditions, send commands, read measurements, download statistical data and events and send retrieved data by email. The connection is made by Wi-Fi with a smartphone or tablet using CX02 dongle. It is iOS and Android compatible. For more details, see Section 27 or consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover. App for RGK 4...SA, with integrated NFC technology, allows remote parameter configuration. The parameters can be saved in a file for archive purposes. It is Android compatible. For more details, see Section 27 or consult Customer Service; see contact details on inside front cover.

APP

26-12

Page 27-2 SUPERVISION AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE • Structure and applications based on MS SQL relational database management system • Data consultation through popular Internet browsers • Versatile system, accessible to a large number of users/workstations via intranets, VPN or Internet • Cloud version available on LOVATO Electric portal.

Page 27-6 APP FOR SMARTPHONES AND TABLETS • Users can program the device, view alarm conditions, send commands, read measurements, download statistical data and events and send retrieved data by email • iOS and Android compatible.

Page 27-5 CONFIGURATION AND REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE • Parameter setting • Point-by-point monitoring • Memory module management.

Page 27-7 APP FOR PROGRAMMING VIA NFC TECHNOLOGY • Parameter setting with NFC technology • Access without the need to power up the LOVATO Electric product • Android compatible.

SOFTWARE AND APPLICATIONS

Web-based and multiclient software Simultaneous management of multiple communication channels Three-level multiuser access using Internet Cloud version App for display and configuration via Wi-Fi or NFC.

SEC. - PAGE

Software supervision and energy management software ............................................................................................

27 - 2

configuration and remote control software .....................................................................................................

27 - 5

.............................................................................................................................................................................

27 - 6

.................................................................................................................................................................................

27 - 7

E NERGY M ANAGEMENT

APP

Software and applications

is supervision and energy management web-based software that provides for the monitoring and control of the electrical installation, in a simple and efficient way. It is valid software to sustain the activities indicated by the standard EN ISO 50001 “Energy management systems. Requirements with guidance for use”. In addition to electrical quantities, it allows to check all environmental and process information (operating status, alarms, etc.), acquired from LOVATO Electric products, equipped with communication port, and thereby to carry out commands and parameterising. It is possible to create, without limitations, browsable pages of both data logging and trend graphs; it is also possible to manage alarms, exported files and e-mail and/or FTP server transmission functions for notification and reporting.

FUNCTIONALITY

SIMPLE, GUIDED, INTUITIVE CONFIGURATION

– Communication with all LOVATO Electric measurement and control devices, via serial ports, Ethernet or modem – Database of instantaneous values – Creation of custom graph pages – Datalog files – Energy consumption reports – Graphic display of trends – Automatic reports of consumption periods (e.g. time bands) in both analytical and graphic format – Alarm management, both locally and via e-mail – Energy quality analysis – Field equipment parameterising – Access level management.

Programming does not require any particular computer knowledge since specific configuring instruments have been developed to guide through the configuration of product networks, graphic pages, datalog reports and charts, in a simple and intuitive way.

SERVER-MULTICLIENT SYSTEM structure and applications are based on a MS SQL relational database management system. is consulted through the most popular browsers, so it’s available on various platforms and operating systems. These characteristics make a highly versatile system, simultaneously accessible to a large number of users/workstations via intranets, VPN or Internet.

INTERFACE permits the creation of an unlimited number of pages to monitor the system in real time. With great simplicity, it is possible to insert static images and dynamic objects of various types, to make pages with system overviews, synoptic and/or topographic representations of the electrical network with all detailed information. The buttons can be used to send commands to the systems (provided that there are appropriate field actuators) or navigate among the pages. The dynamic objects available are: – analog instruments at 90° and 270° – digital instrumentation – digital instrumentation with vertical or horizontal bar graphs – 10-digit hour counter – simple label or with dynamic image – normal or reduced multi-measurement panel – specific power factor controller panel – specific generating set controller panel – chart of single measurements – harmonics graph – control and/or page navigation buttons

ALARMS Each value recorded in the archives (datalog) can be associated with one or more alarms, defining for each one: an upper and lower limit, a reference calendar (for enabling/disabling), any representation in trend graphs and the option of automatically sending an e-mail. If the limits are exceeded, records the anomaly and reports it in the software header. The home page always indicates the last 10 alarms, while the specific menu allows the display of detailed information, silencing of alarms and consultation of the datalog.

HOME PAGE The start page summarises the main diagnostic information, to permit immediate verification of the state of the system.

FURTHER INFORMATION For further information on the

27-2

software, consult the site: em.LovatoElectric.com/Synergy

Software and applications Software

Order code

Description

Qty Wt per pack

SYN1 SET

Supervision and energy 1 management software (parameterising, measurement, monitoring, control, web server, e-mail and FTP file transfer) + enablement of monitoring on 1 LOVATO Electric device

0.210

SYN 1 S005

Enable licence of supervision function for 5 additional devices

–

SYN 1 S020

Enable licence of supervision function for 20 additional devices

–

SYN 1 S050

Enable licence of supervision function for 50 additional devices

–

SYN 1 S100

Enable licence of supervision function for 100 additional devices

–

n°

[kg]

is remote control and supervision software for LOVATO Electric devices equipped with communication via serial ports, Ethernet or modem. The supported protocols are Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII and Modbus-TCP. Its structure and applications are based on MS SQL Express that uses a MS IIS Express web server to control the user interface. The software is capable of: – Managing multiple communication channels simultaneously – Connecting the devices to the various channels – Collecting data from all the devices and storing them in a database – Displaying collected data in graphical pages and tables – Generating graphs and alarms starting from the content of the data tables – Allowing access to the devices and their data according to the rights of the different users.

NOTE: For the number of licences, only devices equipped with communication port can be considered.

SYN1 SET

EXAMPLE

Synergy

SYN 1 S050 Enable of 50 devices

supervision software + enable 1 device

SYN 1 S020

SYN 1 S005

Enable of 20 devices

Enable of 05 devices

76 Devices

27-3

Software and applications

The cloud solution is specifically designed to make the software functions described previously available and accessible via PC or tablet on the cloud.LovatoElectric.com Internet portal. With cloud, it is possible to check and view the electrical and energy data for the measurements and statuses recorded by the LOVATO Electric measurement and/or control devices without installing software and without a physical server. This saves on server purchasing, configuration and maintenance costs and eliminates commissioning time and costs. The cloud portal is extremely simple and self-configuring and meets the most common measurements requirements of energy managers. To create it, various sampling scenarios were designed and can be assigned to the individual devices in accordance with the logic most appropriate to the needs of the user. For detail of the LOVATO Electric devices that can be monitored and the scenarios that can be assigned during registration, please consult the cloud.LovatoElectric.com site in the product guide section. Communication between the field instrumentation and cloud server is carried out through the typical rules of the Modbus protocol. A Master Modbus is activated on the Cloud which collects the data from the field devices (slave Modbus) configured as clients directed at the server: consequently, they don’t require a public static IP address, just I/O access to the Internet.

SECURITY

FEATURES

The security of the data is guaranteed by HTTPS encryption with certificate between server and client PC, by daily backup of the data collected and by stateof-the-art firewall for server access.

– Extremely intuitive interface: no particular technical background required – Data access from all over the world thanks to the Internet and common browsers – Specific design for client requirements (selection of measurement scenarios) – Low data traffic thanks to the extreme economy of the protocol used (Modbus) – Instantaneous data acquisition from various devices that can even be located in different sites – Simple and clear reporting of all energy data – No investment in software database or server – Extremely secure data thanks to HTTPS and daily backup – Automatic updates included – Limited subscription cost.

Devices

Internet

Firewall

Cloud

Synergy

Devices

cloud software

Order code

Description

Fixed type annual licence: pages, datalogger, graphs predefined. SYN1 C005 F

For 5 devices monitored

SYN1 C010 F

For 10 devices monitored

SYN1 C020 F

For 20 devices monitored

Customisable type annual licence: pages, datalogger, graphs can be customised SYN1 C020 C

For 20 devices monitored

SYN1 C050 C

For 50 devices monitored

Order codes The services offered depend on the annual (365 days from activation date) subscription activated. There are two types of licence: FIXED and CUSTOMISABLE. Fixed licence For each device connected, there are monitoring scenarios in which the values monitored and consequent representations (device web page, online measurements, datalogger, graphs, report) are defined. The system is selfconfiguring and cannot be modified by the user. The maximum number of devices monitored is 20. This solution is most suited to those who find their requirements met among the various scenarios proposed. The skills required to manage the system are extremely limited. Customisable licence It offers the same services as the FIXED solution, with the difference that the client is free to modify the proposed measurement scenarios, web pages, data loggers and reports as they see fit. The client can also create sub-users and assign them with specific access. The maximum number of devices monitored is 50. This solution is most suited to those who need a flexible solution that can be customised in accordance with their requirements. The ability to manage the system can be acquired by downloading the tutorial from the video section on the site: em.LovatoElectric.com. Maintaining the default configurations, whatever the scenarios selected, the energy data is kept online for at least a year and the measurement data (e.g. V, I, PF, kW) for at least two months. The automatic export function allows the transfer of the data collected via e-mail so that the datalog is preserved. To find out the composition of the various scenarios, please access the site: cloud.LovatoElectric.com. cloud therefore meets both basic requirements with a preconfigured product with only the possibility of seeing and collecting the data and complex requirements where it is necessary to perform customisation, including complex customisation, in terms of data processing, graphic interfaces, creation of sub-users, etc.

27-4

Software and applications

is parameter configuration and remote monitoring software shared by the entire latest generation of LOVATO Electric products with communication port. It can be installed in the Windows environment and connect individually (one node at a time) to the LOVATO Electric products connected to the network. – Supports connection via CX01 (USB) or CX02 (Wi-Fi) dongle, USB, RS232, RS485, Ethernet or modem. – Product configuration: • Parameter setting • Project file management for the family of controllers for RGK series generating sets – Product firmware update (via CX01) – Remote control: • Monitoring of main measurements • Sending commands to products – Reading alarms and events memory. Consult the www.LovatoElectric.com site for the list of products supported by

can be ordered using code SYN1 XP00 or downloaded for free from: http://www.lovatoelectric.com/xpressdownload.aspx

MONITORING The measurements of the product connected are divided into context menus to make searching for the right value easy and shown on appropriate graphical gauges.

COMMANDS A command can be sent to the product connected to energise outputs or reset energy consumption or operating time counters for maintenance.

PARAMETERS The options in the setup menu and parameters on the product connected are replicated in the software to allow the user to operate using the terms that they already know. Parameters that differ from the factory values are highlighted in a different colour. The parameters can be saved to a file and recalled in subsequent installations, or defined even in the absence of a connection to the product, to permit preparation of a project to send subsequently.

EVENTS If the product connected features an event memory, the complete list can be downloaded for saving as an external file, in text or spreadsheet format.

ALARMS The alarms active on the product connected can be displayed in the software, for a single screen with the complete list of the faults detected.

DATA-LOGGER MEMORY MANAGEMENT can be used to configure and manage the EXP10 30 and EXM10 30 memory modules, in order to create tables indicating the history of the measurements selected by the user. In particular, the software can be used to set: • the measurements to be sampled • the sampling time • the event that triggers and ends sampling • memory capacity management (FIFO or stop when memory is full). The data acquired can be displayed in graphs and exported to text files or spreadsheets.

27-5

Software and applications APP

General characteristics Configuration and maintenance operations, often done in intolerable or awkward environments due to weather or noisy conditions or narrow places, are now easier to do for all LOVATO Electric devices with communication interface on front, compatible with CX02 dongle. Tablets and smartphones with Android or iOS operating systems can connect to them using the new application called (Setting And Maintenance 1). Therefore, it is no longer necessary to connect and switch on a PC using cables to change configurations, set up parameters etc. With this APP, a file previously saved can be uploaded; commands can be sent; measured quantities can be read from LOVATO Electric devices. The events can be viewed and saved in a text file and later copied and sent by email or to FTP servers. app can be downloaded from Google Play The Store or Apple iTunes store.

Updating driver

Sending e-mail (events, parameters)

PARAMETERS SETTING

SENDING COMMANDS

EVENT LOG VIEWING

ALARMS VIEWING

MEASUREMENTS VIEWING

27-6

Software and applications APP

Updating driver

General characteristics The parameter setting for some LOVATO Electric products is now possible via tablet and smartphone through NFC wireless technology. Bringing the display of a smartphone or tablet (with NFC connection enabled) close to a LOVATO Electric product, activates the app and the device connected is recognised automatically. The parameters can be set without powering up the LOVATO Electric device. The application allows you to: – Set the parameters for the product connected – Save the parameters in a file and send it via e-email – Load a parameter file saved previously. The app can be downloaded from Google Play Store.

Sending e-mail (parameters)

PARAMETERS SETTING

27-7

Page 28-2 EXP SERIES EXPANSION MODULES • For flush-mount products • Digital Inputs and Outputs • Analog Inputs and Outputs • Inputs for PT100 sensors • Communication modules (RS232, RS485, Ethernet, etc.) • GSM/GPRS modem • Data storage with clock-calendar (RTC) • Powered directly by the base product • Automatic identification by base product.

Page 28-3 EXM SERIES EXPANSION MODULES • For modular products. • Digital Inputs and Outputs • Communication modules (RS232, RS485, Ethernet, etc.) • Data storage with clock-calendar (RTC) • Separate auxiliary power supply • Base product connection by IR port • Automatic identification by base product.

Page 28-4 ACCESSORIES • Communication devices • Remote display unit • Protective covers • Converters • Gateway • Connecting cables.

EXPANSION

MODULES AND ACCESSORIES

Digital inputs and outputs Analog inputs and outputs Communication interface Data storage with clock-calendar Communication devices to connect LOVATO Electric products to personal computers, smartphones and tablets Connecting cables to link LOVATO Electric products to personal computers, modems and converter drives.

Expansion modules EXP series ........................................................................................................................................................................ EXM series .......................................................................................................................................................................

SEC. - PAGE 28 - 2 28 - 3

Accessories 28 28 28 28 28 28

4 4 4 5 5 5

E NERGY M ANAGEMENT

Communication devices ................................................................................................................................................... Remote display unit ......................................................................................................................................................... Protective covers ............................................................................................................................................................. Converters ....................................................................................................................................................................... Gateway ........................................................................................................................................................................... Connecting cables ............................................................................................................................................................

Expansion modules and accessories EXP series Expansion modules for flush-mount products

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

Inputs and outputs.

EXP10...

EXP10 00

4 digital inputs, opto-isolated

0.060

EXP10 01

4 static outputs, opto-isolated

0.054

EXP10 02

2 digital inputs and 2 static outputs, opto-isolated

0.058

EXP10 03

2 relay outputs, rated 5A 250VAC 1

0.050

EXP10 04

2 analog inputs, opto-isolated 0/4...20mA, PT100, 0-10V or 0...±5V

0.056

EXP10 05

2 analog outputs, opto-isolated 0/4...20mA, 0-10V or 0...±5V

0.064

EXP10 06

2 relay outputs to increase number of steps

0.064

EXP10 07

3 relay outputs to increase number of steps

0.085

EXP10 08

2 opto-isolated digital inputs and 1 2 relay outputs rated 5A 250VAC

0.058

EXP10 40

2 digital/resistive inputs, 2 static outputs

0.058

EXP10 41

2 thermocouple inputs, 2 static outputs

0.058

Communication ports.

General characteristics EXP series expansion modules can increase the functionality of the LOVATO Electric products, such as: • Digital inputs • Relay outputs • Static outputs • Analog inputs • Inputs for PT100 temperature sensor • Thermocouple inputs “J” or “K” types • Analog outputs • Communication interface • GPRS/GSM modem (without antenna, see page 28-4) • Data storage. – Powered directly by the base product – Automatic identification by the base product – Rear base product mounting with no need of tools. Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: UL Listed, for USA and Canada (cULus File E93601), as Listed Accessory under Auxiliary Devices; EXP10 18 excluded, EAC. Compliant with standards: – For EXP10 18: IEC/EN 61850 and Italian CEI 0-16, CEI 0-21 – For EXP10 04 and EXP10 10: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-4, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14 – For EXP10 15: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 62311, ETSI EN 301 489-1, ETSI EN 301 469-7, EN 301511, USA/FCC 47 CFR part 15, Subpart B, CAN/ICES-003 – For all other types: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3, UL508 (pending for EXP10 40 and EXP10 41), CSA C22.2 n° 14 (pending for EXP10 40 and EXP10 41).

EXP10 10

Opto-isolated USB interface

0.060

EXP10 11

Opto-isolated RS232 interface

0.040

EXP10 12

Opto-isolated RS485 interface

0.050

EXP10 13

Opto-isolated Ethernet interface with Web server function

0.060

EXP10 14

Opto-isolated Profibus-DP interface 1

0.080

For overall dimensions, wiring diagrams and technical characteristics, consult the technical instructions in Downloads of the local or global websites; see details on inside front cover.

EXP10 18

IEC/EN 61850 interface

0.060

Expansion module fixing

Various functionality.

IEC/EN 61850 protocol The module will be made available only when the competent authorities have established the exact terms of the supervision and control of the specific commands (at the time of catalogue printing, currently under study as specified in the Italian CEI 0-16 and CEI 0-21 standards).

EXP10 15

GPRS/GSM modem

0.080

EXP10 16

Capacitor bank protection

0.080

EXP10 30

Data storage, clock-calendar

0.050

EXP10 31

Data storage, clock-calendar with Energy Quality (EN 50160)

0.060

A2 CLICK!

EXP series compatibility with LOVATO Electric products INTERFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM UNITS

DIGITAL MULTIMETERS

POWER FACTOR CONTROLLERS

ENGINE AND GENERATOR CONTROLLERS

DCRG 8

ATL 610

RGK 800...

RGK 900...

EXP10 01

EXP10 02

EXP10 04

EXP10 05

EXP10 03

DMG 800 DMG 900/900T DCRL 3/5/8

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROLLERS

EXP10 00

TYPE

PMVF20/30 DMG 600/610 DMG 700

DIGITAL POWER ANALYZERS

EXP10 06 EXP10 07

EXP10 11

EXP10 12

EXP10 13

(DCRL 8)

EXP10 14

EXP10 15

EXP10 16 EXP10 18

EXP10 30

EXP10 31

EXP10 40 EXP10 41

RGK 610...

EXP10 10

EXP10 08

ATL 800/900 RGK 4...SA

Max n° of modules addable

28-2

1 (DCRL 3/5) 2 (DCRL 8)

Expansion modules and accessories Accessories Communication devices

CX 01

Order code

Description

CX 01

PC LOVATO Electric product 1 dongle, with USB optic connector for programming, data download, diagnostics and firmware upgrade

0.090

PC LOVATO Electric product Wi-Fi dongle for programming, data download, diagnostics and firmware upgrade

0.090

CX 02

CX 03

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

GSM penta-band 1 (850/900/1800/1900/2100MHz) for EXP10 15 expansion module

0.090

General characteristics Communication devices to link LOVATO Electric products to: – Personal computers (PC) – Smartphones – Tablets. CX 01 This USB/optical dongle, complete with cable, allows to connect compatible LOVATO Electric products with a PC without having to disconnect the power supply from the electric panel. The PC identifies the connection as a standard USB. CX 02 This Wi-Fi point connection, lets LOVATO Electric products be viewed by a PC, smartphone and tablet without having to connect cables. CX 03 Antenna compatible with major part of worldwide mobile networks, thanks to the 850/900/1800/1900/2100MHz frequencies. IEC degree of protection: IP67. Fixing by Ø10mm/0.39” drilling. Cable length 2.5m/2.73yd.

CX 02

For overall dimensions, wiring diagrams and technical characteristics, consult technical instructions online in Downloads of local global website; see details on inside front cover.

CX 03

Certification Certification obtained: EAC.

Remote display unit

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

EXC RDU 1

Remote display unit, graphic LCD, touch screen 128x112 pixels for ADXL..., IP65 protection

0.360

RGK RA

Remote display unit, 1 graphic LCD, touch screen 128x112 pixels for RGK..., IP65 protection

0.360

EXC RDU 1 - RGK RA

General characteristics Alarm conditions can be viewed on the remote display and alarm silencing can also be activated. – Dual 100...240VAC / 12...24VDC power supply – Touch screen 128x112 pixel backlight graphic LCD – Built-in buzzer – Static (SSR) output for global alarm signalling – Opto-isolated RS485 interface port – Conductor cross section: 0.2...2.5mm² (24...12 AWG; 18...12 AWG per UL/CSA) – Tightening torque: 0.56Nm (4.5lbin) – Compatible with RGK... for RGK RA – Compatible with ADXL... for ECX RDU 1. Certification and compliance Certification obtained: cULus, EAC (both pending for EXC RDU 1). Compliant with standard: IEC/EN 61010-1, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-3, UL508, CSA C22.2 n° 14.

Protective covers

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

PA 96X48

Front IP65 protective cover for DMK 0/1...

0.048

31 PA96X96 Front IP54 protective cover for DMK 2...

0.077

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

EXP80 00

Plastic insert for customising label for DMG 600/610 and DCRL…

0.005

EXP80 01

IP65 gasket seal for ATL600/610 1 and DCRL8

0.150

EXM80 04

Set of sealable terminal covers for DMG 100/101/110/200/ 210/300

0.020

NTC 01

External/remote temperature 1 sensor, with 3m/3.3yd long cable

0.150

RGK X00

IP65 gasket seal for RGK600/601

0.100

General characteristics If high IEC degree of protection is needed, the protective covers give to the device the necessary protection required. Certification Certification obtained: EAC.

31 PA96X96

Accessories

EXP80 00

EXP80 01

28-4

Certification Certification obtained: EAC.

Expansion modules and accessories Accessories Converters

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

EXC CON 01 RS485/ Ethernet converter, 12...48VDC, including DIN rail fixing kit

0.400

4 PX1

0.600

EXC CON 01

RS232/RS485 converter, opto-isolated, 220...240VAC power supply (110...120VAC on request). Repeater drive for RS485 bus extension

Certifications and compliance Certifications obtained: cULus (UL 60950-1) Listed, FCC CLASS A for EXC CON 01; EAC only for 4 PX1. Compliant with standards: – for MOXA NPORT5230: EN 60950-1.

4 PX1

Gateway

General characteristics The EXC CON 01 converter can interface “Slave” devices connected in a RS485 bus with a “Master” equipped with an Ethernet interface port: – Kit consisting of a converter and DIN rail mounting accessory – Web interface programming – No power pack included. The 4 PX1 converter can interface “Slave” devices connected in an RS485 bus with a “Master” equipped with RS232 interface port. When configured appropriately, it can also be used as RS485 repeater whenever the devices connected to the bus are many or the maximum distance among the bus devices is longer than the allowed.

Order code

Description

EXC M3G 01 RS485 Gateway/3G modem, 9.5…27VAC/9.5…35VDC, including antenna and programming cable

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

0.340

EXC M3G 01

General characteristics The EXC M3G 01 gateway can interface “Slave” devices connected in a RS485 with a “Master” using a 3G network: – Connection TCP server through 3G or 2G network – Transparent mode: data is transferred from the 3G side to the serial side and vice versa without protocol conversion – Settable parameters: TCP server IP and remote port, network operator apn (with username and password), SIM card pin (with enabling), connection time-out, serial parameters (baud rate from 1,200 bps to 115,200 bps, stop bit, character length, parity) – RJ45 port for programming parameters and diagnostics with simple software tool – Antenna compatible with major part of worldwide mobile networks, thanks to the 850/900/1800/1900/2100MHz frequencies. IEC degree of protection: IP67. Fixing by Ø10mm/0.39” drilling. Cable length 2.5m/2.73yd. Compliance Compliance with standards: EN 60950-1.

Connecting cables

Order code

Description

Qty per pkg

n°

[kg]

General characteristics Connecting cables to link LOVATO Electric devices to: – Personal computer (PC) – Modem – Bus converter.

Connecting cables. 51 C2

For PC LOVATO Electric device, 1.8m/2yd long

0.090

51 C3

For PC GSM modem, 1.8m/2yd long

0.210

51 C4

For PC RS232/RS485 converter 1 drive, 1.8m/2yd long

0.147

51 C5

For Analog modem LOVATO 1 Electric device, 1.8m/2yd long

0.111

51 C6

For 4 PX1 converter drive LOVATO device + EXP10 11, 1.8m/2yd long

0.102

51 C7

For GSM modem LOVATO 1 Electric device, 1.8m/2yd long

0.101

51 C8

For ADX remote keypad, 3m/3.3yd long

0.080

51 C9

For 4 PX1 converter drive front IP54 modem

0.137

51 C4

For overall dimensions, wiring diagrams and technical characteristics, consult technical instructions online in Downloads of local or global website; see details on inside front cover. Certification Certification obtained: EAC.

Consult Customer Service for information; see contact details on inside front cover.

28 28-5